You are on page 1of 439

1 01 Sep,2015 FOR CONSTRUCTION S.K.JIN Y.D.BOK Y.D.

BOK

0 22 July,2015 FOR INFORMATION S.K.JIN Y.D.BOK Y.D.BOK

REV. DATE DESCRIPTION DSGN CHKD APPD

FOR CONSTRUCTION
OWNER :

PROJECT NAME :

MIRFA INDEPENDENT WATER AND POWER PROJECT


CONTRACTOR : SUBCONTRACTOR :

DESIGNED BY: DATE TITLE

S.K.JIN 2015.07.22
CHECKED BY: DATE

Y.D.BOK 2015. 07.22


PRELIMINARY OPERATION AND
APPROVED BY: DATE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Y.D.BOK 2015. 07.22

SCALE DOCUMENT NUMBER


MF-VI-IG-78-9001
USER'S GUIDE

Vaisala Combined Pressure, Humidity,


and Temperature Transmitter
PTU300

M210796EN-G
PUBLISHED BY

Vaisala Oyj Phone (int.): +358 9 8949 1


P.O. Box 26 Fax: +358 9 8949 2227
FI-00421 Helsinki
Finland

Visit our Internet pages at www.vaisala.com.

Vaisala 2013

No part of this manual may be reproduced, published or publicly displayed in any form
or by any means, electronic or mechanical (including photocopying), nor may its
contents be modified, translated, adapted, sold or disclosed to a third party without prior
written permission of the copyright holder. Translated manuals and translated portions
of multilingual documents are based on the original English versions. In ambiguous
cases, the English versions are applicable, not the translations.

The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.

This manual does not create any legally binding obligations for Vaisala towards
customers or end users. All legally binding obligations and agreements are included
exclusively in the applicable supply contract or the General Conditions of Sale and
General Conditions of Service of Vaisala.
_________________________________________________________________________________

Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION .......................................................................... 13
About This Manual ................................................................. 13
Contents of This Manual ..................................................... 13
Version Information ............................................................. 14
Related Manuals ................................................................. 14
Documentation Conventions ............................................... 14
Safety ....................................................................................... 15
ESD Protection ....................................................................... 15
Recycling ................................................................................ 16
Regulatory Compliances ....................................................... 16
EU Declaration of Conformity.............................................. 16
DNV Type Approval ............................................................ 17
Transmitters with LAN or WLAN Interface .......................... 17
Transmitters with WLAN Interface ...................................... 18
Patent Notice .......................................................................... 18
Trademarks ............................................................................. 18
Software License .................................................................... 19
Warranty .................................................................................. 19

CHAPTER 2
PRODUCT OVERVIEW ................................................................................ 21
Introduction to PTU300 .......................................................... 21
Basic Features and Options ................................................ 23
New and Improved Features Compared to PTU200 ..... 23
Structure of the Transmitter ................................................ 24
Probe Options ..................................................................... 26
Warmed Probe PTU307 ...................................................... 28

CHAPTER 3
INSTALLATION ............................................................................................ 29
Mounting the Housing ........................................................... 29
Standard Mounting without Mounting Plate ........................ 29
Wall Mounting with Wall Mounting Kit ................................. 30
Mounting with DIN Rail Installation Kit ................................ 32
Pole Installation with Installation Kit for Pole or Pipeline .... 32
Mounting Rain Shield with Installation Kit ........................... 34
Panel Mounting Frame ........................................................ 35
Wiring ...................................................................................... 37
Cable Bushings ................................................................... 37
Grounding the Cables ......................................................... 38
Grounding the Transmitter Housing .................................... 39
Alternate Wiring Systems ...................................................... 39

VAISALA _________________________________________________________________________ 1
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Signal and Power Supply Wiring ......................................... 40


8-Pin Connector ................................................................... 41
D-9 Connector ..................................................................... 42
Connections to a 24 VAC Power Supply ............................. 43
Probe Mounting ...................................................................... 44
General Instructions for Probes with Cable ......................... 44
PTU303 for General Use ..................................................... 46
PTU307 for High Humidities ................................................ 47
Temperature Probe (Optional) ............................................ 47
Optional Modules.................................................................... 48
Power Supply Module.......................................................... 48
Installation ...................................................................... 49
Warnings ........................................................................ 50
Galvanic Isolation of the Power Supply ............................... 53
Third Analog Output ............................................................ 53
Installation and Wiring .................................................... 54
Relays .................................................................................. 55
Installation and Wiring .................................................... 55
Selecting the Activation State of the Relay .................... 55
RS-422/485 Interface .......................................................... 57
Installation and Wiring .................................................... 58
LAN Interface ....................................................................... 61
WLAN Interface ................................................................... 62
Attaching the WLAN Antenna......................................... 63
Data Logger Module ............................................................ 63

CHAPTER 4
OPERATION ................................................................................................. 65
Getting Started ........................................................................ 65
Display/Keypad (Optional) ..................................................... 66
Basic Display ....................................................................... 66
Pressure 3h Trend and Tendency Reading ........................ 67
Using Basic Display ........................................................ 67
Pressure tendency graphics and codes ......................... 67
Using Serial Line ............................................................ 69
Missing Trend ................................................................. 69
Graphic History .................................................................... 70
Information Display .............................................................. 72
Menus and Navigation ......................................................... 73
Changing the Language ................................................. 73
Rounding Setting ............................................................ 74
Display Backlight Setting ................................................ 74
Display Contrast Setting ................................................. 74
Using Display/Keypad ............................................... 74
Using Serial Line ....................................................... 75
Keypad Lock (Keyguard) ................................................ 75
Menu PIN Lock ............................................................... 75
Factory Settings ............................................................. 76
Configuring Display Alarms ................................................. 76
Using Display/Keypad .................................................... 77
Using Serial Line ............................................................ 79
MI70 Link Program for Data Handling .................................. 80
Serial Line Communication ................................................... 81

2 ____________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
_________________________________________________________________________________

User Port Connection .......................................................... 81


User Port Operating Modes ........................................... 82
Service Port Connection ..................................................... 82
Connection Cables ......................................................... 82
Installing the Driver for the USB Cable .......................... 83
Using the Service Port ................................................... 83
LAN Communication .............................................................. 84
IP Configuration .................................................................. 84
Using Display/Keypad .................................................... 85
Using Serial Line ............................................................ 86
Wireless LAN Configuration ................................................ 87
Using Display/Keypad .................................................... 88
Using Serial Line ............................................................ 89
Communication Protocol ..................................................... 90
Web Configuration for LAN and WLAN ............................... 90
Terminal Program Settings ................................................. 91
Opening a Serial/USB connection ................................. 91
Opening a Telnet Session (LAN/WLAN) ........................ 92
List of Serial Commands ..................................................... 94
Getting Measurement Message from Serial Line................ 97
Starting Continuous Outputting ...................................... 97
R................................................................................ 97
Stopping Continuous Outputting .................................... 97
S ................................................................................ 97
Outputting Reading Once .............................................. 97
SEND ........................................................................ 97
Assign an Alias for the SEND Command ...................... 98
Outputting Reading Once From All Transmitters ........... 98
Communicating with a Transmitter in POLL Mode ............. 99
OPEN ............................................................................. 99
CLOSE ........................................................................... 99
Formatting Serial Line Message ....................................... 100
FTIME and FDATE....................................................... 100
General Settings ................................................................... 101
Changing Quantities and Units ......................................... 101
Using Display/Keypad .................................................. 101
Using Serial Line .......................................................... 101
FORM...................................................................... 101
UNIT ........................................................................ 104
Limit RH Output Range ..................................................... 105
Date and Time ................................................................... 106
Using Display/Keypad .................................................. 106
Using Serial Line .......................................................... 106
NMEA Data Format ........................................................... 107
GPS Commands ............................................................... 108
Pressure Compensation Settings ....................................... 109
Using Display/Keypad ....................................................... 109
Using Serial Line ............................................................... 110
PRES and XPRES ....................................................... 110
PFIX ............................................................................. 110
PSTAB ......................................................................... 111
Data Filtering for Pressure ................................................ 112
Data Filtering for Humidity and Temperature .................... 113
Using Display/Keypad .................................................. 113

VAISALA _________________________________________________________________________ 3
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Using Serial Line .......................................................... 114


Device Information............................................................. 115
Using Serial Line .......................................................... 115
? .................................................................................... 115
LIGHT ........................................................................... 116
HELP ............................................................................ 117
ERRS............................................................................ 117
MODS ........................................................................... 117
VERS ............................................................................ 118
Resetting Transmitter using Serial Line ............................ 118
RESET.......................................................................... 118
Locking Menu/Keypad using Serial Line ........................... 118
LOCK ............................................................................ 118
Serial Output Settings .......................................................... 119
Using Display/Keypad ....................................................... 119
Using Serial Line ............................................................... 120
SERI ............................................................................. 120
SMODE ........................................................................ 121
ADDR ........................................................................... 121
INTV ............................................................................. 122
SDELAY ....................................................................... 122
ECHO ........................................................................... 122
Data Recording ..................................................................... 123
Selecting Data Recording Quantities ................................ 123
DSEL ............................................................................ 123
View Recorded Data.......................................................... 123
DIR ............................................................................... 124
PLAY ............................................................................ 125
Deleting the Recorded Files .............................................. 126
UNDELETE .................................................................. 126
Analog Output Settings ....................................................... 127
Changing Output Mode and Range................................... 127
Analog Output Quantities .................................................. 128
AMODE/ASEL .............................................................. 129
Analog Output Tests .......................................................... 130
ITEST ........................................................................... 130
Analog Output Fault Indication Setting .............................. 131
AERR............................................................................ 131
Extend Analog Output Range ............................................ 132
Operation of Relays .............................................................. 132
Quantity for Relay Output .................................................. 132
Measurement-Based Relay Output Modes ....................... 132
Relay Setpoints ............................................................ 132
Hysteresis ..................................................................... 134
Relay Indicating Transmitter Error Status ......................... 134
Enabling/Disabling Relays ................................................. 137
Setting Relay Outputs........................................................ 137
RSEL ............................................................................ 138
Testing Operation Of Relays ............................................. 140
RTEST .......................................................................... 140
Sensor Functions ................................................................. 141
Chemical Purge (Optional) ................................................ 141
Automatic Chemical Purge (Interval Purge) ................. 142
Manual Chemical Purge ............................................... 142

4 ____________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
_________________________________________________________________________________

Chemical Purge in Power Up ....................................... 142


Starting and Configuring Chemical Purge ......................... 142
Using Buttons On Motherboard ................................... 142
Using Display/Keypad (Optional) ................................. 143
Using Serial Line .......................................................... 143
PURGE ................................................................... 143
PUR......................................................................... 144
RGLIMIT ................................................................. 145
Setting Sensor Heating ..................................................... 145
Setting Humidity Sensor Heating using Display/Keypad
..................................................................................... 146
Using Serial Line .......................................................... 146
XHEAT .................................................................... 146

CHAPTER 5
MODBUS .................................................................................................... 147
Overview of Modbus Protocol Support .............................. 147
Taking Modbus into Use ................................................... 148
Enabling Serial Modbus....................................................... 149
Using Display/Keypad (Optional) ...................................... 149
Using Serial Line ............................................................... 149
Enabling Ethernet Modbus .................................................. 150
Using Display/Keypad (Optional) ...................................... 150
Using Serial Line ............................................................... 152
Diagnostic Modbus Counters ............................................. 153
Viewing Counters using Display/Keypad .......................... 153
Viewing Counters using Service Port ................................ 153
Disabling Modbus ................................................................ 154

CHAPTER 6
MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................... 155
Periodic Maintenance .......................................................... 155
Cleaning ............................................................................ 155
Changing the Probe Filter ................................................. 155
Changing the Sensor ........................................................... 156
Error States ....................................................................... 157
Technical Support ................................................................ 159
Product Returns ................................................................... 159

CHAPTER 7
CALIBRATION AND ADJUSTMENT......................................................... 161
Pressure ................................................................................ 161
Opening and Closing the Adjustment Mode ..................... 162
Pressure Adjustment ........................................................... 163
One-Point Adjustment Using Display/Keypad................... 163
One-Point Adjustment using Serial Line ........................... 164
LCI........................................................................... 164
LC............................................................................ 164
MPCI ....................................................................... 165
MPC ........................................................................ 166

VAISALA _________________________________________________________________________ 5
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Relative Humidity Adjustment............................................. 167


Using Push Buttons ........................................................... 167
Using Display/Keypad ....................................................... 168
Using Serial Line ............................................................... 169
Multipoint Relative Humidity Adjustment Using Serial Line
........................................................................................... 171
MPC RH Command Syntax.......................................... 171
Example Multipoint Adjustment Procedure .................. 172
Relative Humidity Adjustment After Sensor Change........ 174
Using Display/Keypad ....................................................... 174
Using Serial Line ............................................................... 174
FCRH............................................................................ 174
Temperature Adjustment ..................................................... 175
Using Display/Keypad ....................................................... 175
Using Serial Line ............................................................... 176
Analog Output Adjustment (Ch1 and Ch2) ........................ 177
Using Display/Keypad ....................................................... 177
Using Serial Line ............................................................... 177
ACAL ............................................................................ 177
Feeding Adjustment Information ........................................ 178
Using Display/Keypad ....................................................... 178
Using Serial Line ............................................................... 178
CTEXT .......................................................................... 178
CDATE ......................................................................... 178

CHAPTER 8
TECHNICAL DATA .................................................................................... 179
Specifications ....................................................................... 179
Performance ...................................................................... 179
Barometric Pressure ..................................................... 179
Relative Humidity ......................................................... 180
Temperature (+ Operating Pressure Ranges) ............. 181
Optional Temperature Probe ........................................ 181
Calculated Variables .................................................... 182
Accuracies of Calculated Variables ................................... 182
Accuracy of Dewpoint Temperature C ........................ 182
Accuracy of Mixing Ratio g/kg (Ambient Pressure
1013 mbar) ................................................................... 183
Accuracy of Wet Bulb Temperature C ........................ 183
Accuracy of Absolute Humidity g/m ............................ 183
Dewpoint Temperature (PTU307 Warmed Probe Option) 184
Operating Conditions .................................................... 184
Inputs and Outputs ....................................................... 185
Mechanics .................................................................... 186
Technical Specifications of Optional Modules ................... 187
Power Supply Module .................................................. 187
Analog Output Module .................................................. 187
Relay Module ............................................................... 187
RS-485 Module ............................................................ 188
LAN Interface Module ................................................... 188
WLAN Interface Module ............................................... 188
Data Logger Module ..................................................... 188

6 ____________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
_________________________________________________________________________________

Spare Parts and Accessories .............................................. 189


Dimensions (mm/inch) ......................................................... 191
PTU301 ............................................................................. 192
PTU303 ............................................................................. 194
PTU307 ............................................................................. 194
Temperature Probe ........................................................... 194

APPENDIX A
PROBE INSTALLATION KITS AND INSTALLATION EXAMPLES ......... 195
Duct installation kits (for PTU303/307) ............................... 195
Duct Installation Kit for Temperature Probe (for PTU307)196
Pressure Tight Swagelok Installation Kits (For PTU307) . 196
RH Probe Installation ........................................................ 196
Temperature Probe Installation ......................................... 198
Examples of Vapor Tight Installations with Cable Gland . 199
RH-Probe Installations (for PTU303/307) ......................... 199
T- Probe Installations (PTU307)........................................ 201
Meteorological Installation Kit (for PTU307)...................... 202

APPENDIX B
CALCULATION FORMULAS .................................................................... 203

APPENDIX C
MODBUS REFERENCE ............................................................................. 207
Function Codes .................................................................... 207
Register Map ......................................................................... 208
Data Encoding ................................................................... 208
32-Bit Floating Point Format ........................................ 208
16-Bit Integer Format ................................................... 209
Measurement Data (Read-Only) ....................................... 210
Status Registers (Read-Only) ........................................... 211
Configuration Registers ..................................................... 211
Exception Status Outputs ................................................... 212
Diagnostic Sub-Functions ................................................... 213
Device Identification Objects .............................................. 214
Exception Responses .......................................................... 214

VAISALA _________________________________________________________________________ 7
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

List of Figures
Figure 1 Transmitter Body ...................................................................... 24
Figure 2 Inside the Transmitter ............................................................... 25
Figure 3 PTU301 Fixed Probe ................................................................ 26
Figure 4 PTU301 Short Cable Probe ...................................................... 26
Figure 5 Probe Options ........................................................................... 27
Figure 6 Standard Mounting ................................................................... 29
Figure 7 Mounting with Wall Mounting Kit .............................................. 30
Figure 8 Dimensions of the Plastic Mounting Plate (mm/inch) ............... 30
Figure 9 Dimensions of the Probe Holder Plate (mm/inch) .................... 31
Figure 10 Mounting with DIN Rail Installation Kit ..................................... 32
Figure 11 Vertical Pole.............................................................................. 32
Figure 12 Horizontal Pole ......................................................................... 33
Figure 13 Mounting with Metal Wall Mounting Plate ................................ 33
Figure 14 Dimensions of Metal Mounting Plate (mm/inch) ....................... 34
Figure 15 Mounting Rain Shield with Installation Kit ................................ 34
Figure 16 Panel Mounting Frame ............................................................. 35
Figure 17 Panel Mounting Dimensions (mm/inch) .................................... 36
Figure 18 Cable Bushings......................................................................... 37
Figure 19 Grounding the Screen of Electrical Cable ................................ 38
Figure 20 Screw Terminal Block on Motherboard .................................... 40
Figure 21 Pinout of the Optional 8-Pin Connector .................................... 41
Figure 22 Wiring of Optional D-9 Connector............................................. 42
Figure 23 Connections to 24 VAC Power Supply ..................................... 43
Figure 24 Measurement Error at 100 %RH .............................................. 44
Figure 25 Horizontal Mounting of Probe ................................................... 45
Figure 26 Vertical Mounting of Probe ....................................................... 45
Figure 27 Power Supply Module ............................................................... 48
Figure 28 Galvanic Isolation Module ........................................................ 53
Figure 29 Third Analog Output ................................................................. 53
Figure 30 Third Analog Output Selection.................................................. 54
Figure 31 Relay Module ............................................................................ 56
Figure 32 RS-485 Module ......................................................................... 57
Figure 33 4-Wire RS-485 Bus ................................................................... 59
Figure 34 2-Wire RS-485 Bus ................................................................... 60
Figure 35 LAN Interface Module ............................................................... 61
Figure 36 WLAN Interface Module ........................................................... 62
Figure 37 Data Logger Module ................................................................. 64
Figure 38 Basic Display ............................................................................ 66
Figure 39 Basic Display with P3H Trend and Tendency ............................ 67
Figure 40 Pressure Tendency Description ............................................... 68
Figure 41 Graphical Display...................................................................... 70
Figure 42 Graphical Display with Data Logger ......................................... 71
Figure 43 Device Information on Display .................................................. 72
Figure 44 Main Menu ................................................................................ 73
Figure 45 Alarm Limits Shown on Graph Screen ..................................... 77
Figure 46 Display Alarm Active ................................................................. 77
Figure 47 Display Alarms .......................................................................... 78
Figure 48 Modifying an Alarm Limit .......................................................... 78
Figure 49 Service Port Connector and User Port Terminal on
Motherboard ............................................................................. 81
Figure 50 Connection Example between PC Serial Port and User Port .. 82

8 ____________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
_________________________________________________________________________________

Figure 51 Network Interface Menu ........................................................... 85


Figure 52 IP Configuration Menu.............................................................. 85
Figure 53 Wireless LAN Settings .............................................................. 88
Figure 54 Entering Network SSID ............................................................ 88
Figure 55 Selecting the Wireless Network Type ...................................... 88
Figure 56 Web Configuration Interface for WLAN .................................... 91
Figure 57 Opening a Serial Connection ................................................... 92
Figure 58 Opening a Telnet Connection .................................................. 93
Figure 59 Current/Voltage Switches of Output Modules ........................ 127
Figure 60 Relay Output Modes ............................................................... 133
Figure 61 FAULT/ONLINE STATUS Relay Output Modes .................... 135
Figure 62 Relay Indicators on Display .................................................... 137
Figure 63 Decrease of Sensor Gain ....................................................... 141
Figure 64 Purge Buttons on Motherboard .............................................. 142
Figure 65 Chemical Purge Settings ........................................................ 143
Figure 66 Performing Chemical Purge ................................................... 143
Figure 67 Serial Interface Settings ......................................................... 149
Figure 68 IP Configuration ...................................................................... 151
Figure 69 Wireless LAN Settings ............................................................ 151
Figure 70 Communication Protocol ........................................................ 151
Figure 71 Modbus Counters ................................................................... 153
Figure 72 Changing the Sensor .............................................................. 156
Figure 73 Error Indicator and Error Message ......................................... 157
Figure 74 Adjustment and Purge Buttons .............................................. 162
Figure 75 Adjustment Menu ................................................................... 163
Figure 76 Selecting Point 1 Reference Type .......................................... 168
Figure 77 Accuracy over Temperature Range ....................................... 181
Figure 78 Accuracy in Dewpoint Measurement...................................... 184
Figure 79 Transmitter Body Dimensions ................................................ 191
Figure 80 WLAN Antenna Dimensions ................................................... 192
Figure 81 PTU301 Fixed Probe Dimensions .......................................... 192
Figure 82 PTU301 Short Cable Probe Dimensions................................ 193
Figure 83 PTU303 Probe Dimensions .................................................... 194
Figure 84 PTU307 Probe Dimensions .................................................... 194
Figure 85 Optional Temperature Probe Dimensions .............................. 194
Figure 86 Duct Mounting Installation Kit ................................................. 195
Figure 87 Duct Mounting Installation Kit for T-Probe ............................. 196
Figure 88 Swagelok Installation Kit for RH-probe .................................. 197
Figure 89 Swagelok Installation Kit for T-Probe ..................................... 198
Figure 90 Cable Installation with Cable Gland ....................................... 199
Figure 91 Probe Installation with Cable Gland ....................................... 200
Figure 92 Vapor Tight Installation........................................................... 201
Figure 93 Wall Mounting Installation ...................................................... 201
Figure 94 Meteorological Installation Kit for Outdoor Installation ........... 202

VAISALA _________________________________________________________________________ 9
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

List of Tables
Table 1 Manual Revisions ..................................................................... 14
Table 2 Related Manuals ....................................................................... 14
Table 3 Application, Location Classes................................................... 17
Table 4 Basic Quantities Measured by PTU300 ................................... 22
Table 5 Optional Quantities Measured by PTU300 ............................... 22
Table 6 Optional Pressure Quantities Measured by PTU300 ............... 22
Table 7 Wiring of the Optional 8-Pin Connector .................................... 41
Table 8 Pin Assignments to RS-232/485 Serial Output ........................ 42
Table 9 Connecting the Twisted Pair Wires to the Screw Terminals .... 58
Table 10 4-Wire (Switch 3: On) ............................................................... 59
Table 11 2-Wire (Switch 3: Off) ............................................................... 60
Table 12 Observartion Periods and Resolution ....................................... 63
Table 13 Periods for Trend and Max/Min Calculations ........................... 70
Table 14 Graph Information Messages in Cursor Mode ......................... 71
Table 15 ALSEL Parameters ................................................................... 79
Table 16 Default Serial Communication Settings for the User Port ........ 81
Table 17 Communication Settings for the Service Port ........................... 83
Table 18 IP Settings for the LAN and WLAN Interfaces .......................... 84
Table 19 Wireless LAN Settings .............................................................. 87
Table 20 Measurement Commands ........................................................ 94
Table 21 Formatting Commands ............................................................. 94
Table 22 Data Recording Commands ..................................................... 95
Table 23 Chemical Purge Commands ..................................................... 95
Table 24 Calibration and Adjustment Commands ................................... 95
Table 25 Setting and Testing the Analog Outputs ................................... 95
Table 26 Setting and Testing the Relays ................................................. 96
Table 27 Pressure Commands ................................................................ 96
Table 28 GPS Commands ....................................................................... 96
Table 29 Other Commands ..................................................................... 96
Table 30 FORM Command Modifiers .................................................... 102
Table 31 Conversion Factors for Pressure Units .................................. 110
Table 32 Filtering Levels for Humidity Temperature ............................. 113
Table 33 Selection of Output Modes ..................................................... 121
Table 34 Relay State Examples ............................................................ 136
Table 35 Supported Modbus Variants ................................................... 147
Table 36 Error Messages ...................................................................... 158
Table 37 Adjustment and Calibration Commands ................................. 162
Table 38 Indicator Led Functions .......................................................... 163
Table 39 Example List for Multipoint Correction .................................... 172
Table 40 Calculated Variables (Typical Ranges) .................................. 182
Table 41 Standard Probe Cable Lengths and Approximate
Transmitter Weight (in kg/lb) .................................................. 186
Table 42 Spare Parts and Accessories ................................................. 189
Table 43 Supported Function Codes ..................................................... 207
Table 44 PTU300 Modbus Register Blocks........................................... 208
Table 45 Measurement Data Registers ................................................. 210
Table 46 Status Registers ..................................................................... 211
Table 47 Configuration Parameter Registers ........................................ 211
Table 48 Configuration Flag Registers .................................................. 212

10 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
_________________________________________________________________________________

Table 49 PTU300 Exception Status Outputs ........................................ 212


Table 50 PTU300 Modbus Diagnostics ................................................. 213
Table 51 PTU300 Modbus Device Identification ................................... 214
Table 52 PTU300 Modbus Exception Responses ................................ 214

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 11
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

This page intentionally left blank.

12 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 1 _________________________________________________________ General Information

CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION

About This Manual


This manual provides information for installing, operating, and
maintaining the Vaisala Combined Pressure, Humidity, and Temperature
Transmitter PTU300.

Contents of This Manual


- Chapter 1, General Information, provides general notes for the manual
and the product.
- Chapter 2, Product Overview, introduces the features, advantages, and
the product nomenclature of PTU300.
- Chapter 3, Installation, provides you with information that is intended
to help you install the product.
- Chapter 4, Operation, contains information that is needed to operate
this product.
- Chapter 5, Modbus, contains information that is needed when
operating the transmitter using the Modbus protocol.
- Chapter 6, Maintenance, contains information that is needed in basic
maintenance of the product.
- Chapter 7, Calibration and adjustment, provides information and
instructions concerning calibration and adjustment of PTU300.
- Chapter 8, Technical data, provides the technical data of the product.
- Appendix A, Probe installation kits and installation examples, presents
the installation kits available for PTU300 and provides some
installation examples.
- Appendix B, Calculation Formulas, presents the formulas used for the
calculated output quantities.
- Appendix C, Modbus Reference, describes the Modbus functions and
data of the transmitter.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 13
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Version Information
Table 1 Manual Revisions
Manual Code Description
M210796EN-G December 2013. This manual. Applicable from
transmitter software version 5.14 onward.
Removed references to HUMICAP 180L2
sensor. Added new command descriptions:
ALSEL, AOVER, CON, DSEND, MODS,
RGLIMIT, RHLIMIT, and MPC RH (multipoint RH
calibration). Updated FILT command description.
Various small corrections.
M210796EN-F Previous version. Applicable from transmitter
software version 5.10 onward.
Added Modbus protocol. Updated serial line
command descriptions. Updated storage
temperature range.

Related Manuals
Table 2 Related Manuals
Manual Code Manual Name
M210195EN PTU200 Series Transmitters Users Guide

Documentation Conventions
Throughout the manual, important safety considerations are highlighted
as follows:

WARNING Warning alerts you to a serious hazard. If you do not read and follow
instructions very carefully at this point, there is a risk of injury or even
death.

CAUTION Caution warns you of a potential hazard. If you do not read and follow
instructions carefully at this point, the product could be damaged or
important data could be lost.

NOTE Note highlights important information on using the product.

14 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 1 _________________________________________________________ General Information

Safety
The PTU300 delivered to you has been tested for safety and approved as
shipped from the factory. Note the following precautions:

WARNING Ground the product, and verify outdoor installation grounding


periodically to minimize shock hazard.

CAUTION Do not modify the unit. Improper modification can damage the product,
lead to malfunction, or make the product noncompliant with applicable
legislation.

ESD Protection
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) can cause immediate or latent damage to
electronic circuits. Vaisala products are adequately protected against
ESD for their intended use. However, it is possible to damage the product
by delivering electrostatic discharges when touching, removing, or
inserting any objects inside the equipment housing.

To make sure you are not delivering high static voltages yourself:

- Handle ESD sensitive components on a properly grounded and


protected ESD workbench. When this is not possible, ground yourself
to the equipment chassis before touching the boards. Ground yourself
with a wrist strap and a resistive connection cord. When neither of the
above is possible, touch a conductive part of the equipment chassis
with your other hand before touching the boards.
- Always hold the boards by the edges and avoid touching the
component contacts.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 15
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Recycling
Recycle all applicable material.

Dispose of the unit according to statutory regulations. Do not dispose of


with regular household refuse.

Regulatory Compliances
EU Declaration of Conformity
Vaisala Combined Pressure, Humidity, and Temperature Transmitter
PTU300 is in conformity with the provisions of the following EU
directives:

- Low Voltage Directive


- EMC-Directive

Conformity is shown by compliance with the following standards:

- EN 60950-1: Information technology equipment Safety Part 1:


General requirements.
- EN 61326-1: Electrical equipment for measurement, control, and
laboratory use EMC requirements for use in industrial locations.
- EN 550022: Information technology equipment Radio disturbance
characteristics Limits and methods of measurement.
- EN 61000-3-2: Limits for harmonic current emissions.
- EN 61000-3-3: Limitation of voltage changes, voltage fluctuations
and flicker in public low-voltage supply systems.

16 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 1 _________________________________________________________ General Information

DNV Type Approval


The Vaisala Combined Pressure, Humidity, and Temperature Transmitter
PTU300 is found to comply with Det Norske Veritas' Rules for
Classification of Ships, High Speed & Light Craft and Det Norske
Veritas' Offshore standards.

Applicable tests carried out according to Standard for Certification


No. 2.4, April 2006.

Table 3 Application, Location Classes


Type PTU300
Temperature B
Humidity B
Vibration A
EMC B
Enclosure B/IP65

TYPE APPROVED PRODUCT


CERTIFICATE NO.: A-13529

Transmitters with LAN or WLAN Interface


This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.

This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is
no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If
this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 17
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.


- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Transmitters with WLAN Interface


This device has been designed to operate with a 2 dBi half-wave antenna.
Antennas with a gain greater than 2 dBi are prohibited for use with this
device. The antenna impedance is 50 ohms.

To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and
its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated
power (EIRP) is not more than that permitted for successful
communication.

This Class [B] digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Cet appareil numrique de la classe [B] est conforme la norme NMB-


003 du Canada.

Patent Notice
The Vaisala HUMICAP Humidity, and Temperature Transmitter Series
PTU300 is protected by, for example, the following patents and their
corresponding national rights:

Finnish patents 98861 and 99164, French patents 6650303 and 9504397,
German patents 69418174 and 19513274, Japanese patents 3585973 and
2801156, UK patents 0665303 and 2288465, and U.S. patent 5607564.

Trademarks
HUMICAP and BAROCAP are registered trademarks of Vaisala Oyj.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

18 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 1 _________________________________________________________ General Information

Software License
This product contains software developed by Vaisala. Use of the software
is governed by license terms and conditions included in the applicable
supply contract or, in the absence of separate license terms and
conditions, by the General License Conditions of Vaisala Group.

Warranty
Visit our Internet pages for standard warranty terms and conditions:
www.vaisala.com/warranty.

Please observe that any such warranty may not be valid in case of
damage due to normal wear and tear, exceptional operating conditions,
negligent handling or installation, or unauthorized modifications. Please
see the applicable supply contract or Conditions of Sale for details of the
warranty for each product.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 19
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

This page intentionally left blank.

20 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 2 ___________________________________________________________ Product Overview

CHAPTER 2
PRODUCT OVERVIEW

This chapter introduces the features, advantages, and the product


nomenclature of the Vaisala Combined Pressure, Humidity, and
Temperature Transmitter PTU300.

Introduction to PTU300
The PTU300 transmitter provides reliable pressure measurement in a
wide range of applications. PTU300 series transmitters use a
BAROCAP silicon capacitive absolute sensor developed by Vaisala for
barometric pressure measurement applications. The measurement
principle of the PTU300 series digital transmitters is based on an
advanced RC oscillator and three reference capacitors against which the
capacitive pressure sensor is continuously measured. The microprocessor
of the transmitter performs compensation for pressure linearity and
temperature dependence.

The applications of the PTU300 range from calibration laboratory


environmental condition monitoring to laser interferometer active
wavelength compensation and GPS meterorological measurements.

The PTU300 transmitter combines three measurement parameters:


pressure, temperature and humidity. The quantities measured and
calculated by PTU300 are presented in Table 4 on page 22. The
quantities available as an option are presented in Table 5 on page 22.

Analog outputs can be chosen between current and voltage signals.


Alternatively, digital outputs RS-232 (standard) or RS-422/485 (optional)
can be selected. A local display is also available.

The PTU300 transmitter is available with one or two pressure


transducers. The PTU301, PTU303 and PTU307 probes are available for
the PTU300 transmitter. A PTU30T model with only the temperature
probe (no humidity measurement) is also available.

In outdoor applications it is recommended to use the HMT330MIK


mounting kit with the PTU300 transmitters.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 21
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Table 4 Basic Quantities Measured by PTU300


Quantity Abbreviation Metric Unit Non-Metric Unit
Pressure P See Table 6 on page 22.
1)
Relative Humidity RH %RH %RH
Temperature T C F
1) Relative humidity not included on the PTU30T model

Table 5 Optional Quantities Measured by PTU300


Quantity Abbreviation Metric Unit Non-Metric Unit
Dewpoint /Frostpoint Temperature (Td/f) TDF C F
Dewpoint Temperature (Td) TD C F
3 3
Absolute humidity (a) A g/m gr/ft
Mixing ratio (x) X g/kg gr/lb
Wetbulb temperature (Tw) TW C F
Humid air volume/ dry air volume H2O ppmv/ppmw ppmv/ppmw
(by volume or by weight) (H2O)
2
Water vapor pressure (Pw) PW hPa lb/in
2
Water vapor saturation pressure (Pws) PWS hPa lb/in
Enthalpy (h) H kJ/kg Btu/lb
Difference of T and Td/f (T) DT C F

Table 6 Optional Pressure Quantities Measured by PTU300


Quantity Abbreviation Units Available
Pressure trend and tendency P3h hPa, psia, inHg, torr, bara, barg,
Pressure (measures average pressure P psig, mbar, mmHg, kPa, Pa,
from P1 and P2 if both are connected) mmH2O, inH2O
Pressure from transducer 1 or 2 P1 and P2
QNH pressure QNH
QFE pressure QFE
Height Corrected Pressure HCP

22 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 2 ___________________________________________________________ Product Overview

Basic Features and Options


- Pressure redundancy option: two sensors in one unit
- Two accuracy classes for pressure measurement
- Several probes for various applications
- A 3 h trend and tendency available in pressure measurement
- Calculated output quantities available
- User-friendly display and keypad interface (optional)
- Different probe mounting kits, sensor protection options and probe
cable lengths
- Transmitter mounting kits for multiple installation purposes
- Chemical purge for applications where interfering chemicals in the
measuring environment pose a risk
- Warmed probe and sensor heating for high humidity conditions
(PTU307)
- Support for Modbus serial communications protocol
- Optional temperature sensor for PTU307
- Optional modules:
- Isolated power supply
- Power supply module for AC mains power
- RS-422/485-module
- LAN and WLAN interfaces
- Data logger module with real time clock
- Additional analog output module
- Relay module

New and Improved Features Compared to PTU200


- Improved %RH accuracy
- Graphical display (trend of any parameter)
- Analog outputs (voltage and current)
- Service port for MI70 or PC
- Support for Modbus serial communications protocol
- USB connectivity for service connections via the optional
USB-RJ45 cable
- Isolated RS-485 module (using single barometer module)
- Relay module (using single barometer module)
- LAN and WLAN interfaces (using single barometer module)
- Data logger module with real time clock (using single barometer
module)

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 23
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Structure of the Transmitter

1104-078

Figure 1 Transmitter Body

The numbers refer to Figure 1 above:


1 = Signal + powering cable gland, or WLAN antenna connector
2 = Pressure port
3 = Cable gland for optional module or AC mains cable
4 = Cover screw (4 pcs)
5 = Display with keypad (optional)
6 = Cover LED

24 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 2 ___________________________________________________________ Product Overview

0604-060

Figure 2 Inside the Transmitter

The following numbers refer to Figure 2 above:


1 = Service port (RS-232)
2 = DIP switches for analog output settings
3 = Power supply and signal wiring screw terminals
4 = Relay, RS-422/485, data logger, LAN, WLAN, or analog
output module (optional)
5 = Grounding connector for power supply module
6 = Adjustment buttons (chemical purge buttons) with indicator
LED
7 = Galvanic isolation module (optional)
8 = Temperature probe cable
9 = Humidity probe cable
10 = BARO-1 module
11 = Pressure port
12 = Power supply module.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 25
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Probe Options
The PTU301 is intended for wall-mounted applications. The standard
version has a fixed probe.

1104-079

Figure 3 PTU301 Fixed Probe

The PTU301 short cable probe is a special version for use with the
WLAN module, and when LAN module and power supply module are
simultaneously installed. It has the general use PTU303 probe on a short
cable (21 cm), and a mounting plate with a probe holder.

1104-080

Figure 4 PTU301 Short Cable Probe

26 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 2 ___________________________________________________________ Product Overview

0911-067

Figure 5 Probe Options

The following numbers refer to Figure 5 above:


1 = PTU303 Probe for general use
2 = PTU307 for demanding processes (optionally warmed probe)
3 = Temperature probe

For probe cable lengths, see Table 41 on page 186.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 27
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Warmed Probe PTU307


Temperature difference between the probe and external environment can
cause a risk of condensation on the sensor. A wet probe cannot observe
the actual humidity in the ambient air. If the condensed water is
contaminated, the life span of the probe may shorten and calibration may
change.

PTU307 probe shall be used in applications where condensation can


occur due to high humidity and rapid humidity changes. The warmed
probe is heated continuously so that its temperature is always higher than
that of the environment. This prevents condensation on the probe. The
power consumption of the warmed probe is slightly higher than that of
the other probes.

28 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 3 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

CHAPTER 3
INSTALLATION

This chapter provides you with information that is intended to help you
install the product.

Mounting the Housing


The housing can be mounted either without the mounting plate or with
optional mounting plates.

Standard Mounting without Mounting


Plate
Mount the housing by fastening the transmitter to the wall with 4 screws,
for example, M6 (not provided).

0601-011

Figure 6 Standard Mounting

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 29
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Wall Mounting with Wall Mounting Kit


When mounting with wall mounting kit the mounting plate (Vaisala
order code 214829) can be installed directly on wall or onto a standard
wall box (also US junction box). When wiring through back wall, remove
the plastic plug from the wiring hole in the transmitter before mounting.

0503-004

Figure 7 Mounting with Wall Mounting Kit

The following numbers refer to Figure 7 above:


1 = Plastic mounting plate
2 = Mount the plate to wall with 4 screws M6 (not provided)
3 = Arched side up
4 = Fasten PTU300 to the mounting plate with 4 fixing screws M3
(provided)
5 = Holes for wall/junction box mounting

183 (7.20)
133 (5.24)
4.5 (0.18)
8.5 (0.33)
6.5 (0.26)

6.2 (0.24)
10.5 (0.41)
116 (4.57)
104 (4.09)

84 (3.30)

59 (2.32)

Thickness
9.5 (0.37)

59 (2.32)

0804-065

Figure 8 Dimensions of the Plastic Mounting Plate (mm/inch)

30 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 3 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

The PTU301 short cable probe is designed to be wall mounted with the
probe holder plate (Vaisala order code 226252). The probe holder plate is
similar to the standard mounting plate, except for the probe holder at the
bottom.

0911-061

Figure 9 Dimensions of the Probe Holder Plate (mm/inch)

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 31
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Mounting with DIN Rail Installation Kit


DIN rail installation kit includes a wall mounting kit, 2 clip-fasteners and
2 screws M4 x 10 DIN 7985 (Vaisala order code 215094).

1. Attach two spring holders to the plastic mounting plate by using the
screws provided in the installation kit.
2. Fasten PTU300 to the plastic mounting plate with 4 screws
(provided).
3. Press the transmitter onto the DIN rail so that the clip-fasteners
snap into the rail.

0503-002

Figure 10 Mounting with DIN Rail Installation Kit

Pole Installation with Installation Kit for


Pole or Pipeline
Installation kit for pole or pipeline (Vaisala order code: 215108) includes
the metal mounting plate and 4 mounting nuts for pole mounting. When
mounting, the arrow in the metal mounting plate must point upward;
see Figure 13 on page 33.

0503-006

Figure 11 Vertical Pole

The following numbers refer to Figure 11 above:


1 = U-bolts (2 pcs) M8 (provided) for 30 ... 102 mm poles
2 = Mounting nuts M8 (4 pcs)

32 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 3 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

0503-007

Figure 12 Horizontal Pole

Number refers to Figure 12 above:


1 = Mounting nuts M8 (4 pcs)

Metal mounting plate is included in rain shield with installation kit and
installation kit for pole or pipeline.

0503-041

Figure 13 Mounting with Metal Wall Mounting Plate

The following numbers refer to Figure 13 above:


1 = Mount the plate to wall with 4 screws M8 (not provided)
2 = Fasten the PTU300 to the mounting plate with 4 fixing screws
M6 (provided)
3 = Note the position of the arrow when mounting. This side must
be up when mounting.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 33
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

0509-151

Figure 14 Dimensions of Metal Mounting Plate (mm/inch)

Mounting Rain Shield with Installation Kit


The rain shield is highly recommended for outdoor installations,
especially for transmitters with the display/keypad option.

0503-008

Figure 15 Mounting Rain Shield with Installation Kit

The following numbers refer to Figure 15 above:


1 = Fasten the rain shield with installation kit (Vaisala order code:
215109) to the metal mounting plate with 2 (M6) mounting
screws (provided)
2 = Fasten the mounting plate with rain shield with installation kit to
the wall or to the pole (see pole installation)
3 = Fasten the transmitter to the mounting plate with 4 fixing screws
(provided)

34 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 3 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

Panel Mounting Frame


To enable a neat and dirt free embedded installation of the transmitter, a
panel mounting frame is available as an option (Vaisala order code:
216038). The frame is a thin, flexible plastic frame for the transmitter,
with adhesive tape on one side.

The frame is used to hide any rough edges of the installation hole, and
provide a more finished look. Note that the panel mounting frame is not
intended to bear the weight of the transmitter, and does not include any
mounting supports.

Use the panel mounting frame as follows:

1. Use the frame as a template to mark the required size for the
installation hole in the panel.
2. Cut the hole in the panel.
3. Mount the transmitter through the panel with suitable supports.
4. Remove the paper protecting the adhesive tape on the frame, and
attach the frame around the transmitter. Refer to Figure 16 on page
35.

0704-002

Figure 16 Panel Mounting Frame

The following numbers refer to Figure 16 above:


1 = Panel (not included)
2 = Panel mounting frame

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 35
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

0804-083

Figure 17 Panel Mounting Dimensions (mm/inch)

36 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 3 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

Wiring
Cable Bushings
A single electrical cable with a screen and three to ten wires is
recommended for power and analog/serial connections. The cable
diameter should be 8 ... 11 mm. The number of cable bushings depends
on the transmitter options. See the following recommendations for the
cable bushings:

0604-059

Figure 18 Cable Bushings

The following numbers refer to Figure 18 above:


1 = Cable for signal/powering 8 ... 11 mm
2 = Pressure port
3 = Cable for optional power supply module 8 ... 11 mm

NOTE When there is high electric noise level (for example, near powerful
electric motor) in the operating environment it is recommended to use
shielded cable or take care that the signal cables are separated from other
cables.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 37
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Grounding the Cables


Ground the screen of the electrical cable properly to achieve the best
possible EMC performance.

0605-027

Figure 19 Grounding the Screen of Electrical Cable

Refer to Figure 19 above when performing the procedure below.

1. Cut back outer sheath to desired length.


2. Cut back screen braiding or screen foil to dimension X.
3. Push the domed cap nut (item 1) and the seal insert with contact
socket of the gland (item 2+3) onto the cable as shown in the
diagram.
4. Bend over the screen braiding or screen foil by about 90 (item 4).
5. Push the seal insert with the contact socket of the gland (item 2+3)
up to the screen braiding or screen foil.
6. Mount the lower part (item 5) on the housing.
7. Push the seal with the contact socket of the gland (item 2+3)
into the lower part (item 5).
8. Install the domed cap nut (item 1) onto the lower part (item 5).

38 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 3 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

Grounding the Transmitter Housing


In case you need to ground the transmitter housing, the grounding
connector is found inside the housing; see Figure 2 on page 25. Make
sure that the probe is connected to the same potential as the housing, and
that different groundings are made to the same potential. Otherwise
harmful ground currents may be generated.

If it is needed to have galvanic isolation of the power supply line from


the output signals, PTU300 can be ordered with optional galvanic
isolation module. This module prevents harmful grounding loops.

Alternate Wiring Systems


There are three optional ways to connect the transmitter: using basic
wiring, using 8-Pin connector, or using D-9 connector.

The wiring system is selected when ordering the device. If a connector is


needed for wiring, it is set at the factory.

- When using basic wiring, see section Signal and Power Supply
Wiring.
- When using 8-Pin connector, see section 8-Pin Connector on page 41.
- When using D-9 connector, see section D-9 Connector on page 42.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 39
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Signal and Power Supply Wiring


When wiring the power supply module, see section Power Supply
Module on page 48.

0506-028

Figure 20 Screw Terminal Block on Motherboard


The following numbers refer to Figure 20 above:
1 = Power supply terminals 10 ... 35 VDC, 24 VAC
2 = User port (RS-232 terminals)
3 = Analog signal terminals

WARNING Make sure that you connect only de-energized wires.

1. Open the transmitter cover by taking out the four cover screws.
2. Insert the power supply wires and signal wires through the cable
bushing in the bottom of the transmitter; see the grounding
instructions in the previous sections.
3. Connect the analog output cables to terminals: Ch1 +, Ch1-, Ch2+,
Ch2-. Connect the RS-232 user port cables to terminals RxD, GND
and TxD. For more information about the RS-232 connection refer
to section Serial Line Communication on page 81.
4. When wiring the optional modules, see the corresponding section
for instructions:
- RS-422/485 Interface on page 57
- Relays on page 55
- Third Analog Output on page 53
- LAN Interface on page 61
- WLAN Interface on page 62

40 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 3 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

5. Connect the power supply wires to the connectors: POWER


10...35V+ 24V~ (+) and (-) terminals. If you are using 24 VAC
power supply, see the note below before connecting the supply
wires.
6. Turn on the power. The indicator LED on the cover is lit
continuously during normal operation.
7. Close the cover and replace the cover screws. The transmitter is
ready for use.

8-Pin Connector

1104-126

Figure 21 Pinout of the Optional 8-Pin Connector

Table 7 Wiring of the Optional 8-Pin Connector


Pin Wire Serial Signal Analog Signal
RS-232 (EIA-232) RS-485 (EIA-485)
1 White Data out TX D1+ Ch 3-
2 Brown (Serial GND) (Serial GND) Signal GND (for
channels 1&2)
3 Green - - Ch 2+
4 Yellow - - Ch 1+
5 Grey Supply - Supply - Supply -
6 Pink Supply + Supply + Supply +
7 Blue Data in RX D0- Ch 3+
8 Shield/Red Cable shield Cable shield Cable shield

NOTE The 8-pin connector cannot be used with relay modules or power supply
module that have AC (mains) power connection.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 41
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

D-9 Connector

0605-123

Figure 22 Wiring of Optional D-9 Connector

Table 8 Pin Assignments to RS-232/485 Serial Output


Pin Wire Color Serial Signal
RS-232 C RS-485
1 Red
2 White TX
3 Black RX
4 Yellow
5 Brown Ground
6 Green D0-
7 Blue Ground for supply voltage Ground for supply voltage
8 Grey D1+
9 Orange Supply voltage Supply voltage

42 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 3 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

Connections to a 24 VAC Power Supply


Separate floating supply for each transmitter is recommended (see the
upper part of Figure 23 below). If you have to connect several
transmitters or other instruments to one AC supply, the phase (~) must
always be connected to the (+) connector of each transmitter (see the
lower part of Figure 23).

CAUTION 24 VAC POWER SUPPLY USE


To prevent fire and/or damage, if either 24 VAC wire is grounded or
connected to a "-", "0", or "GND" terminal of any other device, you
must connect the same wire on the "-" terminal also on this instrument.

0703-041

Figure 23 Connections to 24 VAC Power Supply

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 43
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Probe Mounting
In humidity measurement and especially in calibration it is essential that
temperature of the probe and measuring environment is the same. Even a
small difference in temperature between the environment and the probe
causes an error. As the curve below shows, if the temperature is +20 C
and the relative humidity 100 %RH, a difference of 1 C between the
environment and the probe causes an error of 6 %RH.

The graph below illustrates the measurement error at 100 %RH when the
difference between the ambient and sensor temperature is 1 C.

0507-023

Figure 24 Measurement Error at 100 %RH

General Instructions for Probes with


Cable
Mount the probes with a cable with the probe horizontally; this way, any
water condensing on the tube cannot flow onto the sensor.

When there is no alternative but to install the probe in the process


vertically, the point of entry must be carefully insulated. The cable must
also be allowed to hang loosely as this prevents any condensed water
from running onto the probe along the cable.

44 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 3 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

0507-024

Figure 25 Horizontal Mounting of Probe

The following numbers refer to Figure 25 above:


1 = To be sealed
2 = To be insulated
3 = Insulate the cable
4 = Let the cable hang loosely. This prevents condensed water
running to the sensor along the cable.

0507-022

Figure 26 Vertical Mounting of Probe

The following numbers refer to Figure 26 above:


1 = To be sealed
2 = Insulate the cable
3 = To be insulated
4 = Let the cable hang loosely. This prevents condensed water
running to the sensor along the cable.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 45
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

NOTE Please do not attach a heated probe (PTU307) to metal structures to


avoid condensation problems caused by heat conduction along the metal.

If the process temperature is much higher than that of the environment,


the whole probe and preferably plenty of cable must be inside the
process. This prevents measuring inaccuracy caused by heat conduction
along the cable.

When mounted on the side of a duct or channel, the probe must be


inserted from the side of the duct. If this is not possible and the probe
must be inserted from the top, the point of entry must be carefully
insulated.

For Vaisala probe installation kits and some installation examples see
Appendix A on page 195.

PTU303 for General Use


The PTU303 is a small size (d=12mm) probe for general use, up to
+80 C (+176 F). The probe is suitable for weather stations,
environmental compensations, laser interferometers and test benches. It
is suitable for ducts and channels with the installation kit available from
Vaisala.

46 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 3 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

See Appendix A on page 195 for the following probe installation kits for
PTU303 and installation examples.

- Duct mounting kit


- Cable gland

PTU307 for High Humidities


The PTU307 is for environment where relative humidity is very high,
near saturation. The warmed probe prevents the saturation of the sensor.
An additional temperature probe is also available.
The PTU307 RH+T probe is suitable for temperatures up to +180C
(+356F). Note that the operational temperature limit for the PTU307
probe is higher than for the PTU300 transmitter itself. The upper
temperature limit for barometric pressure measurement is +60C (140F).
See Appendix A on page 195 for a presentation of the following probe
installation kits for PTU307 with installation examples:

- Duct mounting kit


- Cable gland
- Pressure tight Swagelok connector
- Vaisala's Meteorological Installation kit

The installation kits are available for both humidity and temperature
probe.

Temperature Probe (Optional)


An additional temperature probe is available to measure the ambient
temperature on the PTU307 (with probe warming) and PTU30T
transmitter models. The additional temperature probe allows you to
measure other humidity quantities apart from dewpoint and mixing ratio.
The temperature probe must be connected to the transmitter at the
factory. Do not cut and re-connect the cable yourself.

You must install the additional temperature probe in the same


measurement environment as the PTU307 probe. Make sure that heat
does not transfer from the warmed probe to the temperature probe.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 47
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Optional Modules
Power Supply Module
The AC (mains) power connection may be connected to the power supply
module only by an authorized electrician. A readily accessible disconnect
device shall be incorporated in the fixed wiring.

0506-027

Figure 27 Power Supply Module

The following numbers refer to Figure 27 above:


1 = Connect AC (mains) voltage wires to these terminals
2 = Grounding terminal
3 = In case the module is not installed in the factory: Connect wires
from these terminals to the POWER 10 ... 35V 24V terminals of
the motherboard.
4 = +
5 = -

48 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 3 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

Installation
1. Disconnect the power and open the transmitter cover.
2. Remove the protective plug from the cable gland and thread the
wires. In case the power supply module is installed in the factory,
continue with the step 5.
3. To attach the module fasten the power module to the bottom of the
housing with four screws. See the position Figure 2 on page 25.
4. Connect the wires from the terminals of the power supply module
marked with + and - to the terminals POWER 10 ... 35 V 24V on
the motherboard of the transmitter.
5. Connect the AC mains voltage wires to the power supply module
terminals marked with N and L.
6. Attach the grounding wire to the grounding terminal on the right-
hand side of the transmitter.
7. Connect the power. The LED on the cover of the transmitter is lit
continuously during normal operation.

WARNING Do not detach the power supply module from the transmitter when the
power is on.

WARNING Do not connect the mains power to power supply module when it is not
installed in the transmitter.

WARNING Always connect protective ground terminal.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 49
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Warnings
Dieses Produkt entspricht der Niederspannungsrichtlinie (2006/95/EWG).

- Das Netzmodul darf nur von einem dazu befugten Elektriker angeschlossen werden.
- Trennen Sie das Netzmodul nicht vom Messwertgeber, wenn der Strom eingeschaltet ist.
- Verbinden Sie das Netzmodul nur mit der Spannungsquelle, wenn es im Messwertgeber
PTU300 montiert ist.
- Das Erdungskabel muss zum Schutz immer angeschlossen sein.

Ce produit est conforme la Directive relative la Basse Tension (2006/95/EEC).

- Seul un lectricien comptent est habilit raccorder le module dalimentation au secteur.


- Ne pas dtacher le module dalimentation du transmetteur lorsquil est en service.
- Ne pas raccorder le secteur au module dalimentation lorsque celui-ci nest pas install dans le
transmetteur PTU300.
- Toujours raccorder un bornier de protection la terre.

Tm tuote on pienjnnitedirektiivin (2006/95/EEC) mukainen.

- Vaihtovirtaliitnnn saa kytke tehonsyttmoduuliin ainoastaan valtuutettu shkasentaja


- l irrota tehonsyttmoduulia lhettimest, kun virta on kytkettyn.
- l kytke verkkovirtaa tehonsyttmoduuliin, jos kyseist moduulia ei ole asennettu PTU300
lhettimeen.
- Kytke aina maadoitusliittimet.

Denna produkt uppfyller kraven i direktivet om lgspnning (2006/95/EEC).

- Ntanslutningen (vxelstrmsanslutningen) fr bara anslutas till strmfrsrjningsmodulen av


en behrig elektriker.
- Ta inte loss strmfrsrjningsmodulen frn mtaren nr strmmen r p.
- Anslut inte strmfrsrjningsmodulen till ntet nr den inte r installerad i PTU300-mtaren
- Anslut alltid en skyddande jordningsplint.

Questo prodotto conforme alla Direttiva sul basso voltaggio (2006/95/CEE).

- La conduttura elettrica pu essere collegata al modulo di alimentazione elettrica soltanto da


un elettricista autorizzato.
- Non staccare lalimentazione elettrica dal trasmettitore quando acceso.
- Non collegare la corrente elettrica al modulo di alimentazione elettrica se non installato nel
trasmettitore PTU300.
- Collegare sempre il morsetto protettivo a terra!

50 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 3 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

Dette produkt er i overensstemmelse med direktivet om lavspnding


(2006/95/ES).

- Netstrmskoblingen til m kun tilsluttes strmforsyningsmodulet af en autoriseret elinstallatr


- Strmforsyningsmodulet m ikke lsgres fra senderen, mens spndingen er sluttet til.
- Slut ikke netspndingen til strmforsyningsmodulet, nr det ikke er installeret i PTU300-
senderen
- Forbind altid den beskyttende jordklemme!

Dit product voldoet aan de eisen van de richtlijn 2006/95/EEG


(Laagspanningsrichtlijn).

- De stroom kan aan de stroomtoevoer module aangesloten worden alleen door een bevoegde
monteur.
- Het is niet toegestaan de stroomtoevoer module van de transmitter los te koppelen wanneer de
stroom aan is.
- Het is niet toegestaan de stroom aan de stroomtoevoer module aan te sluiten als deze niet in
een PTU300-transmitter is gemonteerd.
- Altijd beschermend aardcontact aansluiten!

Este producto cumple con la directiva de bajo voltaje (2006/95/EEC).

- La conexin de la alimentacin principal al mdulo de alimentacin slo puede realizarla un


electricista autorizado.
- No desenchufe el mdulo de alimentacin del transmisor cuando est encendido.
- No conecte la alimentacin principal al mdulo de alimentacin cuando no est instalado en
el transmisor PTU300.
- Conecte siempre el terminal de proteccin de conexin a tierra.

See toode vastab madalpinge direktiivile (2006/95/EEC).

- Voolukaabli vib vooluallika mooduli klge hendada ainult volitatud elektrik.


- rge hendage vooluallika moodulit saatja kljest lahti, kui vool on sisse llitatud.
- rge hendage voolukaablit vooluallika mooduli klge, kui seda pole PTU300-tpi saatjasse
paigaldatud.
- hendage alati kaitsev maandusklemm!

Ez a termk megfelel a Kisfeszltsg villamos termkek irnyelvnek


(2006/95/EGK).

- A hlzati feszltsget csak feljogostott elektrotechnikus csatlakoztathatja a


tpegysgmodulra.
- A bekapcsolt tvadrl ne csatolja le a tpegysgmodult.
- Ne csatlakoztassa a hlzati feszltsget a tpegysgmodulhoz, ha az nincs beptve a
PTU300 tvadba.
- Felttlenl csatlakoztasson fldel vdkapcsot!

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 51
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

is produktas atitinka direktyv dl emos tampos prietais (2006/95/EB).

- Elektros tinkl su energijos tiekimo moduliu sujungti gali tik galiotas elektrikas.
- Niekada neiimkite energijos tiekimo modulio i sistuvo, kai maitinimas yra jungtas.
- Jei energijos tiekimo modulis nra montuotas PTU300 sistuve, nejunkite jo elektros tinkl.
- Visada prijunkite prie apsaugins eminimo jungties!

is produkts atbilst Zemsprieguma direktvai (2006/95/EEC).

- Strvas pieslgumu var pieslgt pie baroanas avota modua tikai autorizts elektriis.
- Neatvienot baroanas avota moduli no raidtja, kad pieslgta strva.
- Nepievienot strvu baroanas avota modulim, ja tas nav uzstdts PTU300 raidtj
- Vienmr pievienot aizsargjou iezemtu terminlu !

Ten produkt spenia wymogi Dyrektywy niskonapiciowej (2006/95/EEC).

- Napicie zasilajce powinno zosta podczone do moduu zasilacza tylko przez


wykwalifikowanego elektryka.
- Nie wolno odcza moduu zasilacza od nadajnika, kiedy zasilanie jest wczone.
- Nie wolno podcza napicia zasilajcego do moduu zasilacza, kiedy nie jest on
zamontowany w nadajniku PTU300.
- Zawsze naley podcza zabezpieczajcy zacisk uziemiajcy!

Tento vrobek vyhovuje Smrnici pro nzk napt (2006/95/EEC).

- Pipojen sovho napjen k napjecmu modulu sm provdt pouze oprvnn elektrik.


- Neodpojujte napjec modul od snmae pi zapnutm napjen.
- Nepipojujte sov napjen k napjecmu modulu, pokud nen instalovn ve snmai
PTU300.
- Vdy zapojte ochrannou zemnc svorku!

52 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 3 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

Galvanic Isolation of the Power Supply


If galvanic isolation of the power supply line from the output signals is
needed, PTU300 can be ordered with optional galvanic isolation module.
This module prevents harmful grounding loops.

NOTE Galvanic isolation module is not needed when using the AC power
supply module. Note also that these two modules are physically
incompatible to be installed at the same time. If both modules are
installed, there is no room to close the transmitter cover completely.

0506-030

Figure 28 Galvanic Isolation Module

Number refers to Figure 28 above:


1 = Galvanic isolation module

Third Analog Output

0503-030

Figure 29 Third Analog Output

The following numbers refer to Figure 29 above:


1 = Flat cable pins
2 = Screw terminals for signal line
3 = DIP switches to select the output mode and range

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 53
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Installation and Wiring


1. Disconnect the power. In case the analog output module is installed
in the factory, continue with the step 4.
2. To attach the module, open the transmitter cover and fasten the
analog output module to the position for MODULE 1 with four
screws. Refer to Figure 2 on page 25.
3. Connect the flat cable between the analog output module and the
motherboard's connector for MODULE 1.
4. Take out the protective plug from the cable gland and thread the
wires.
5. Connect the wires to the screw terminals marked with Ch+ and
Ch- .
6. Select the current/voltage output by setting ON either of the
switches 1 or 2.
7. Select the range by setting ON one of the switches 3...7.

NOTE Only one of the switches 1 ... 2 can be ON at a time.


Only one of the switches 3 ... 7 can be ON at a time.

0508-029

Figure 30 Third Analog Output Selection

8. Connect the power.


9. Select the quantity and scale the channel via the serial line or
display/keypad, see section Analog Output Quantities on page 128.
For testing the analog output, see section Analog Output Tests on
page 130. For fault indication setting, see section Analog Output
Fault Indication Setting on page 131.

54 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 3 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

Relays
PTU300 can be equipped with one configurable relay module. Each
module contains two configurable relays. See the contact ratings in
section Technical Specifications of Optional Modules on page 187.

Installation and Wiring


1. Disconnect the power and open the transmitter cover. In case the
relay-module is installed in the factory, continue with step 5.
2. To attach the module fasten the relay module to the bottom of the
housing with four screws. See the position in Figure 2 on page 25.
3. When the mains power is in use attach the grounding wire to the
grounding terminal.
4. Connect the flat cable between the relay module and the
MODULE 1 pins of the motherboard.
5. Take out the protective plug from the cable gland and thread the
relay wires.
6. Connect the wires to the screw terminals: NO, C, and NC. Refer to
section Selecting the Activation State of the Relay.

7. Connect the power and close the cover.

Selecting the Activation State of the Relay


The middlemost C terminal and either one of the terminals NO/NC must
be connected. The polarity can be freely selected.

NO Normally open
C Common relay
NC Normally closed

Relay NOT activated: C and NC outputs are closed, NO is open


Relay IS activated: C and NO outputs are closed, NC is open.

NOTE For instructions on how to operate the relay (for example, selecting
quantity for the relay output and setting the relay setpoints), see section
Operation of Relays on page 132.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 55
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

0503-037

Figure 31 Relay Module

The following numbers refer to Figure 31 above:


1 = Indication led for the relay 1 or 3
2 = Relay test buttons
3 = Flat cable pins
4 = Indication led for relay 2 or 4

WARNING The relay module may contain dangerous voltages even if the
transmitter power has been disconnected. Before opening the transmitter
you must switch off both the transmitter and the voltage connected to
the relay terminals.

WARNING Do not connect the mains power to relay unit without grounding the
transmitter.

56 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 3 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

RS-422/485 Interface
The RS-422/485 interface enables communication between an RS-485
network and the PTU300 transmitter. The RS-485 interface is isolated
and offers a maximum communications rate of 115 200 bits/s. (For
maximum bus length of 1 km, use bit rate 19200 b/s or less.)

When selecting an RS-232 to RS-485 converter for the network, avoid


self-powered converters, as they do not necessarily support the needed
power consumption.

NOTE RS-232 User Port on PTU300 main board cannot be used and connected
when RS-485 module is connected. Service port operates normally.

1
1102-023

Figure 32 RS-485 Module

The following numbers refer to Figure 32 above:


1 = Flat cable pins
2 = Selection switches
3 = Screw terminals for wiring

NOTE The data lines on earlier versions of the RS-422/485 module are marked
A and B instead of D1+ and D0-. When the line is idle, D1+ has positive
voltage compared to D0-.
When connecting the module, be prepared to swap the D1+ and D0-
wires if you have a communication problem.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 57
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Installation and Wiring


1. Disconnect the power. In case the RS-422/485 module is installed
in the factory, continue with the item 4.
2. To attach the module, open the transmitter cover and fasten the
RS-422/485 module to the bottom of the housing with four screws.
3. Connect the flat cable between the RS-422/485 module and the
motherboard's pins MODULE1 (Communications).
4. Pull the network wirings through the cable gland.
5. Connect the twisted pair wires (1 or 2 pairs) to the screw terminals
as presented in Table 9 below:

Table 9 Connecting the Twisted Pair Wires to the Screw


Terminals
Screw Terminal Data Line Data Line
(2-wire RS-485) (4-wire RS-422/485)
1 (not connected) Rx D0-
2 (not connected) Rx D1+
3 Common Common
4 D0- Tx D0-
5 D1+ Tx D1+

To avoid problems in the RS-422/485 network, the Common


terminal should be wired to the corresponding terminals of the
other devices.
6. If you use RS-422 or RS-485 to connect just one PTU300 to a
master computer, enable the internal termination of PTU300 by
switching switches 1 and 2 ON. Make sure that the master's end of
the line is also terminated (by using master's internal termination or
with a separate terminator).
If you are connecting many transmitters to the same RS-485 bus,
make sure that switches 1 and 2 are OFF and terminate the bus with
separate terminators at both ends. This allows removing any
transmitter without blocking the bus operation.

NOTE If you use the internal termination of the transmitter at the end of the RS-
485 bus (instead of using separate terminators) removing that transmitter
will block the bus operation.

7. Use the bus type (4-wire/2-wire) to select the selection switch 3.

In 4-wire mode RS-485 master sends data to the PTU300 through


terminals Rx D1+ and Rx D0- and receives data from PTU300
through terminals Tx D1+ and Tx D0-.

58 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 3 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

Termination Termination

120R
Rx D0-
Rx D1+ 120R
Common Junction
Tx D0- box
Tx D1+ Common
Stub line
RS485 bus master
Twisted pair

Address NN
Switch Tx D0-
Term off Tx D1+ Junction
Term off Common
2/4 wire on Rx D0- box
RS422 off Rx D1+ Common
Stub line
RS485-1
Twisted pair

Address MM
Switch Tx D0-
Term off Tx D1+ Junction
Term off Common
2/4 wire on Rx D0- box
RS422 off Rx D1+ 120R
Stub 120R
RS485-1

Baud > 19.2K Stub < 10ft, 3m Termination Termination


Baud > 112K Stub < 1ft, 0.3m
1102-028

Figure 33 4-Wire RS-485 Bus

Table 10 4-Wire (Switch 3: On)


RS-485 master Data PTU300
Tx D1+ Rx D1+
Tx D0- Rx D0-
Rx D1+ Tx D1+
Rx D0- Tx D0-

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 59
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Termination

120R
D0-
D1+
Common Junction
box

Stub
RS485 bus master
Twisted pair Common line
Address NN
Switch
Term off
Term off Common Junction
2/4 wire off D0- box
RS422 off D1+
Stub
RS485-1
Twisted pair Common line
Address MM
Switch
Term off Junction
Term off Common
2/4 wire off D0- box
RS422 off D1+
Stub 120R
RS485-1
Termination
1102-027

Figure 34 2-Wire RS-485 Bus

Table 11 2-Wire (Switch 3: Off)


RS-485 master Data PTU300
D1+ D1+
D0- D0-

8. When operating in communication mode RS-422, set both switches


3 and 4 to ON position (4-wire wiring is required for RS-422
mode).
9. Connect the power and close the cover.

60 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 3 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

LAN Interface
The optional LAN interface enables an Ethernet connection to the
transmitter. The user can establish a virtual terminal session using a
Telnet client program such as PuTTY or by using Modbus TCP protocol.
When the LAN interface is in use, serial communication using the RS-
232 User Port is disabled.

The LAN interface module must be installed at the factory (when


ordering the transmitter), or by a Vaisala Service Center. Once installed,
the module is automatically used by the transmitter. The physical
connection to the network is made to the RJ45 connector on the LAN
interface module, using a standard twisted pair Ethernet cable
(10/100Base-T). Transmitters with the optional LAN interface are
delivered pre-installed with a suitable cable and cable gland.

The LAN interface can use both static and dynamic network settings. If
the interface is configured to use dynamic settings, the network where the
LAN interface is connected must have a DHCP server that provides the
settings.

The network configuration can be done using the optional display and
keypad, or by using the service port. For instructions, see section LAN
Communication on page 84. The LAN interface also provides a web
configuration interface, which you can access by entering the IP address
of the LAN interface in the address field of a web browser. See section
Web Configuration for LAN and WLAN on page 90.

CAUTION The LAN interface is designed to be used in trusted network


environments (trusted corporate LAN or VPN-based connection over
internet). Avoid connecting the transmitter directly to a public network
because the device can be attacked by a malicious user through the
network.

1 = Flat cable connector


2 = RJ45 connector with
indicator LEDs for
link and activity

0709-003

Figure 35 LAN Interface Module

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 61
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

WLAN Interface
The optional WLAN interface enables a wireless Ethernet connection
(IEEE 802.11b) to the transmitter. The user can establish a virtual
terminal session using a Telnet client program such as PuTTY or by
using Modbus TCP protocol. When the WLAN interface is in use, serial
communication using the RS-232 User Port is disabled.
The interface supports Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) and Wi-Fi
Protected Access (WPA, WPA2). For WEP, 64 and 128 bit encryption is
supported, with open system or shared key authentication. WPA is used
in the Pre-Shared Key (PSK) mode, with either TKIP or CCMP (also
known as AES) encryption.
Similarly to the LAN interface, the WLAN interface can use both static
and dynamic network settings. If the interface is configured to use
dynamic settings, the network where the WLAN interface is connected
must have a DHCP server that provides the settings.
The WLAN interface also provides a web configuration interface, which
you can access by entering the IP address of the WLAN interface in the
address field of a web browser. See section Web Configuration for LAN
and WLAN on page 90.

1 = Flat cable connector


2 = Connector for antenna
cable (connected to
transmitter cover)

0802-103

Figure 36 WLAN Interface Module

CAUTION The WLAN interface is designed to be used in trusted network


environments (trusted corporate LAN or VPN-based connection over
internet). Avoid connecting the transmitter directly to a public network
because the device can be attacked by a malicious user through the
network.

NOTE The default country setting for the WLAN interface is United States,
which limits the operation to WLAN channels 1 ... 11. To enable
additional channels (12 ... 14), you can change the country setting using
the web configuration interface.

62 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 3 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

NOTE The WLAN interface is not recommended for use with the PTU301 fixed
probe model (for wall-mounted applications). The PTU301 short cable
probe is designed to be used with the WLAN interface.

Attaching the WLAN Antenna


The WLAN interface module must be installed at the factory (when
ordering the transmitter), or by a Vaisala Service Center. Before taking
the transmitter into use, you must attach the antenna of the WLAN
interface into the RP-SMA connector on the transmitter cover. The
location of the antenna is shown in Figure 80 on page 192.

Data Logger Module


The optional data logger module extends the data storage for the
measurement data. When the data logger is present, this storage is
automatically used by the transmitter. The stored data can be browsed
using the optional display module, and accessed through the serial
connections. See sections Graphic History on page 70 and Data
Recording on page 123.

The data logger module contains non-volatile flash memory providing 4


years 5 months of storage for 4 parameters at a 10 second sampling
interval. When the memory is full, the data recording will not stop.
Instead, the oldest data is overwritten. For each parameter and
observation period, the module stores the minimum and maximum values
during the interval, as well a data trend value that is averaged from
samples taken during the interval (see Table 12 below).

Table 12 Observartion Periods and Resolution


Observation Period Period for Trend/Max/Min
Calculations (Resolution)
20 minutes 10 seconds
3 hours 90 seconds
1 day 12 minutes
10 days 2 hours
2 months 12 hours
1 year 3 days
4 years 12 days

The quantities that are logged are the same that have been selected for
measurement using the display/keypad or the serial line. When taking the
transmitter into use, verify that the desired quantities are selected. If you
change the quantities later, the transmitter will start logging the new
quantities, and stop logging the quantities that are no longer selected.
Changing the quantities does not delete any measurement data that is

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 63
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

already in memory. However, the data of any removed quantity cannot be


accessed unless the quantity is re-activated first.
The data logger module has a real time clock with a battery back-up. The
clock has been set to the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) at the
factory, and its time cannot be set by the user. The data that is stored in
the logger's memory is timestamped using the logger's clock.

When date and time are set on the transmitter, they are stored to the
transmitter's memory as an offset from the time on the logger's clock.
When browsing the stored data, the time offset is applied to the
timestamps shown in the graphical history, and data outputted from the
serial port. The timestamps in the data logger's memory remain as they
were originally stored.

You can compensate for the clock drift (less than 2 min/year) by setting
the time on the transmitter. This updates the time offset used on the
display and the serial port. You can set the time by using the
keypad/display or the serial commands.

1 = Flat cable pins


2 = Battery

0706-068

Figure 37 Data Logger Module

After a reset or a power up, it will usually take at least 10 seconds before
the data logger module is initialized. The instrument will not start up
before the data logger module is ready.

The indicator LED on the module will blink green during normal
operation. If the LED is lit in red color, there is a problem with the
module. The transmitter will also indicate the problem by activating the
"Internal error on add-on module" error. If the module is not operating
correctly, the transmitter must be sent to Vaisala for maintenance.

The data logger module must be installed at the factory (when ordering
the transmitter), or by a Vaisala Service Center. Once installed, the
module is automatically used by the transmitter. When the module
requires a new battery, the transmitter must be sent to Vaisala for
maintenance.

64 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

CHAPTER 4
OPERATION

This chapter contains information that is needed to operate this product.

Getting Started
Within a few seconds after power-up the led on the cover of the
transmitter is lit continuously indicating normal operation. If the data
logger module is installed, the startup may take up to 18 seconds. When
using the optional display and turning the transmitter on the first time, the
language selection menu window opens. Select the language with the
arrow buttons and press the SELECT button (the left-hand
button).

The pressure has an effect on humidity calculations and accuracy.


Therefore, accurate calculations can be achieved only when the ambient
pressure is taken into consideration. PTU300 uses measured pressure for
compensation by default.

See section Pressure Compensation Settings on page 109 for instructions


on how to set the pressure.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 65
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Display/Keypad (Optional)
The optional display and keypad combination enables shortcuts for
viewing current settings and status of the device, current measurement
values, and graph of the recent measurement history. Additionally the
device has user friendly, visible menu system for adjusting settings and
turning functions on or off.

Basic Display
Display shows you the measurement values of the selected quantities in
the selected units. You can select 1 ... 4 quantities for the basic display
(see section Changing Quantities and Units on page 101).

0601-014

Figure 38 Basic Display

The following numbers refer to Figure 38 above:


1 = INFO shortcut key; see section Information Display on
page 72.
2 = GRAPH shortcut key; see section Graphic History on page 70.
3 = Quantities selected for display

NOTE From any view, even in the absence of an EXIT button, a four-second
press on the right-hand function button takes you directly to the basic
display.

66 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Pressure 3h Trend and Tendency


Reading
Using Basic Display

0604-056

Figure 39 Basic Display with P3H Trend and Tendency

The following numbers refer to Figure 39 above:


1 = Tendency: Increasing/decreasing graph symbol with the code
number (for more information, see Figure 40 on page 68)
2 = P3h symbol
3 = Trend (middlemost numeric value)

Pressure tendency graphics and codes


The characteristic symbols of pressure tendency during the three hours
preceding the time of observation are described in Figure 40 on page 68.

Source: The World Meteorological Organization (WMO) publication


Manual on Codes Vol. I.1, International Codes, Part A - Alphanumerical
Codes, 1995 Edition, WMO - No. 306. Section C, Code Table 0200: a.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 67
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

0604-055

Figure 40 Pressure Tendency Description

The following numbers refer to Figure 40 on page 68:


0 = Increasing, then decreasing; atmospheric pressure the same or
higher than three hours ago
1 = Increasing, then steady; or increasing, then increasing more
slowly; atmospheric pressure now higher than three hours ago
2 = Increasing (steadily or unsteadily); atmospheric pressure now
higher than three hours ago
3 = Decreasing or steady, then increasing; or increasing then
increasing more rapidly; atmospheric pressure now higher than
three hours ago
4 = Steady; atmospheric pressure the same as three hours ago
5 = Decreasing, then increasing; atmospheric pressure the same or
lower than three hours ago
6 = Decreasing, then steady; or decreasing, then decreasing more
slowly; atmospheric pressure now lower than three hours ago
7 = Decreasing (steadily or unsteadily); atmospheric pressure now
lower than three hours ago
8 = Steady or increasing, then decreasing; or decreasing then
decreasing more rapidly; atmospheric pressure now lower than
three hours ago

68 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Using Serial Line


Pressure 3h trend and tendency reading is also available through serial
line. Key in the lines below:
>form "P=" p "trend=" p3h "tend=" a3h #r#n
OK

>send
P= 1024.7trend= 0.8tend=1

The last line shows the values.

For more information on the Form command, see the section Changing
Quantities and Units, starting on page 101.

Missing Trend
The PTU300 series barometers output a code "*" when the pressure
tendency has not yet been calculated - that is, less than three hours have
elapsed since the power-up of the barometer. The absence of the pressure
trend is indicated in a similar manner, too.

NOTE When the P3H tendency is chosen as a display quantity, the PTU300 logs
actual measured pressure, instead of trend or tendency value.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 69
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Graphic History
The graphical display shows the data trend or min/max graph of the
selected quantities, one at a time. The graph is updated automatically
while measuring.

0706-052

Figure 41 Graphical Display

Trend graph: Shows you a curve of average values. Each value is a


calculated average over a period. See Table 13 below.

Max/min graph: Shows you the minimum and maximum values in a


form of curve. Each point shows the absolute minimum and maximum
observed during the time period represented by the data point. See Table
13 below.

Table 13 Periods for Trend and Max/Min Calculations


Observation Period Period for Trend/Max/Min
Calculations (Resolution)
20 minutes 10 seconds
3 hours 90 seconds
1 day 12 minutes
10 days 2 hours
2 months 12 hours
1 year 3 days
4 year* 12 days
* Shows the maximum logging period of the data logger module (available when data
logger module is installed)

Use the following functions in the graphical display:

- Press the NEXT button to change between the trend graph and
max/min graph for the quantities selected for display.
- Press the EXIT button to return to the basic display.
- Press the arrow buttons to zoom in and out in the graph window.
- Press the arrow buttons move the cursor (vertical bar) along the
time axis. The cursor mode allows you to observe individual
measuring points. The numerical value at the cursor position is shown
at the left upper corner. The right upper corner shows the time from
the present to the chosen moment (without the logger module), or the
date and time at the cursor position (when the logger module is
installed).

70 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

- If the optional data logger module is installed, you can scroll the
cursor off the screen to move to a new point on the time axis. The new
date will be displayed, and the cursor will be centered at the date
where the cursor scrolled off the screen.

0706-030

Figure 42 Graphical Display with Data Logger

If the data logger module is installed, you can move quickly on the time
axis: zoom out, move the cursor, and zoom back in.

The time that is shown below the graph is adjusted with the current time
offset of the transmitter. If you change the transmitter's date and time
setting, the displayed timestamps in the history graph change
accordingly. For an explanation of the effect of changing the date and
time manually, see section Data Logger Module on page 63.

Table 14 Graph Information Messages in Cursor Mode


Message Interpretation
Power outage Power failure (marked also with dashed
vertical line)
No data Quantity has not been selected for the display
System error General device or power supply problem
T meas. error Temperature measurement/sensor failure
RH meas. error Humidity measurement/sensor failure
P meas. error Pressure measurement/sensor failure
Adj. mode active Adjustment mode active (data recorded in the
adjustment mode is not displayed)

A question mark after time indicates that at least one power failure
(dashed vertical line) has occurred after the chosen moment. In this case,
the exact time difference between the present and the cursor position is
not exactly known. If the data logger module is installed, the time is
known and the question marks are not present.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 71
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Information Display
The information display contains current settings and status of the device.
You can open the display by pressing the left function button INFO in
the basic display. The following information will be shown:

- Current sensor operation (for example, chemical purge), if any, in


progress
- Present or past unacknowledged errors, if any
- Device identification; product name, version and serial number
- Adjustment information (the latest date, user made adjustments)
- Measuring settings
- Information on chemical purge settings (when applicable)
- Display Alarm settings
- Serial interface information
- Network settings and status of the LAN or WLAN interface
(when applicable)
- Analog output information
- Relay output information (when applicable)

0706-002

Figure 43 Device Information on Display

Proceed in the information views by pressing the MORE button


repeatedly until you get the desired information. You can also press the
left/right arrow buttons to browse through the information.

To exit the display, press the right function button OK.

72 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Menus and Navigation


You can change settings and select functions in the menus.

1. Open the Main Menu by pressing any of the arrow buttons


in the basic display mode.
2. Scroll the list upwards or downwards by pressing the up/down
arrow buttons .You can select an option by highlighting it.
3. To open a submenu, press the right arrow button .
4. To return to the previous menu level, press the left arrow button .
5. To return to the basic display directly, press the right function
button EXIT.

0706-028, 0706-053, 0802-040

Figure 44 Main Menu

Some menu items, such as Chemical Purge in the Measuring menu, are
only shown if supported by the transmitter and the installed options.

Changing the Language


1. Go back to the basic display by keeping the right-hand button
pressed for four seconds.

2. Open the Main Menu by pressing any of the buttons.


3. Scroll to the System menu option, and press the button. The
menu option is indicated with the wrench symbol.
4. Scroll to the Language menu option, and press the left-hand
button. The menu option is indicated with the flag symbol.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 73
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

5. Select the language with the buttons, and confirm the


selection by pressing the left-hand button.
6. Press the right-hand button to exit to the basic display.

Rounding Setting
Round off one decimal by using the Rounding function . The default
setting is rounding on. Rounding has no effect on quantities without
decimals.

1. Open the Main Menu by pressing any of the arrow buttons.


2. Select Display and press the right arrow button.
3. Select Rounding and press the ON/OFF key.
4. Press the EXIT key to return to the basic display.

Display Backlight Setting


As a default the display backlight is always on. In the automatic mode
the backlight stays on for 30 seconds from the last press of any key.
When pressing any key, the light turns on again.

1. Open the Main Menu by pressing any of the arrow buttons.


2. Select Display, press the right arrow button.
3. Select Backlight, press the CHANGE key.
4. Select On/Off/Automatic, press the SELECT key.
5. Press the EXIT key to return to the basic display.

Display Contrast Setting


Display contrast is automatically adjusted based on the ambient
temperature. However, depending on the installation location and
viewing direction, it may be necessary to fine-tune the contrast manually.

Using Display/Keypad
1. Open the Main Menu by pressing any of the arrow buttons.

2. Select Display, press the right arrow button.


3. Select Contrast, press the ADJUST key.
4. Adjust the contrast by pressing the left/right arrow buttons.
5. Press the OK key and then EXIT to return to the basic display

74 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Using Serial Line


Use the serial line command CON to view or set the display contrast.

CON [xxx]<cr>

where
xxx = Contrast value for display. Recommended range -9 ... 9,
default 0. Negative values make screen lighter, positive
values make it darker.

Example (view current contrast setting):


>con
Contrast : 0
>

Example (set contrast to 5):


>con 5
Contrast : 5
>

Keypad Lock (Keyguard)


This function locks the keypad and prevents unintentional key presses.
1. Press and hold down the left function button for 4 seconds to lock
the keypad (at any display).
2. To unlock the keypad, press and hold down the same key for 4
seconds.

Menu PIN Lock


You can prevent unauthorized changes of the device settings by
activating the menu PIN lock. When this function is activated, the basic
display, graphical view, and device information displays are available,
but access to the menus is locked. The key symbol indicates the
activation of this feature.

1. Open the Main Menu by pressing any of the arrow buttons.


2. Select System, press the right arrow button.
3. Select Menu PIN, press the ON key.
4. Enter a PIN code by using the up/down arrow buttons. Move to the
next digit by pressing the left/right arrow buttons. Press the OK
key to confirm the setting. Now the PIN lock is on and a key
symbol is shown in a display.
5. Press the EXIT key to return to the basic display. Returning to the
menu is possible only by entering the correct PIN code.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 75
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

When you want to turn off the PIN lock, open the menu by entering the
PIN code and select System, Menu PIN, press the OFF key.

In case you have forgotten the PIN code, open the transmitter cover and
press the ADJ button once. Wait for a few seconds and the Adjustment
menu opens. Select Clear menu PIN, press the CLEAR key.

NOTE You can also disable the keypad completely with serial command
LOCK. See section Locking Menu/Keypad using Serial Line on page
118.

Factory Settings
Use the display/keypad to restore the factory settings. This operation
does not affect the adjustments. Only settings available in the menus are
restored.

1. Press any of the arrow buttons to open the Main Menu.


2. Select System, press the right arrow button.
3. Select Factory settings and press the REVERT key to confirm
your selection. Press the YES key to reset all settings to the factory
defaults.

In case you change your mind and want to exit the menu without making
any changes, press the NO key.

See section General Settings on page 101 for a description of the other
menu options.

Configuring Display Alarms


The Display Alarm feature provides two independently configurable
alarms for transmitters with the display/keypad option. Each alarm tracks
a selected quantity, with freely configurable limit values. Each alarm also
has a configurable hysteresis value to prevent unnecessary triggering
when the measurement fluctuates around an alarm limit. The alarms can
be configured for any quantity supported by the transmitter. The
configuration of the Display Alarms can only be done using the
display/keypad option.

You can have the alarm activate inside or outside the specified range by
setting the limits correctly:

- To have the alarm activate when the measured quantity is outside the
specified range, set the Act. above limit higher than the Act. below
limit.

76 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

- To have the alarm activate when the measured quantity is inside the
range, set the Act. above limit lower than the Act. below limit.

The alarm limits are shown on the graph display as thicker dotted lines.
When a display alarm is activated, the automatic scaling of the graph
display always keeps the limits in view.

1102-012

Figure 45 Alarm Limits Shown on Graph Screen

When an alarm is activated, an alarm note is displayed on the display,


and the lights of the display will blink. If the data logger module is
installed, the alarm note includes the time and date of the alarm.

0802-041

Figure 46 Display Alarm Active

Multiple alarms can be active at the same time; the alarm that was
triggered first will be shown on the display. The next active alarm is
revealed when the currently shown alarm is acknowledged by pressing
the OK button.

Activated alarms are only shown on the screen; there are no alarm
messages output to the serial line. After an alarm has been
acknowledged, you must refer to the data graphs to see when the
measured quantities have exceeded the limits. You may use the optional
relay outputs as alarm outputs by configuring them separately; see
section Setting Relay Outputs on page 137.

Using Display/Keypad
1. Enter the Main Menu by pressing an arrow button on the keypad.
2. Use the arrow keys to select Display, followed by Alarms, to open
the Display Alarms menu. The Display Alarms menu shows the
currently enabled and disabled alarms.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 77
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

0802-069

Figure 47 Display Alarms

3. Use the arrow keys to select an alarm to configure. The alarm


editing page opens.

NOTE Changes you do on the alarm editing page will take effect immediately,
and may cause an alarm to appear on the screen.

4. To select a quantity for the alarm, press the CHANGE button and
select the quantity from the list.
5. To modify or remove the alarm limit values, move the selection
over the Act. above or Act. below field and press the SET button.
You will be prompted to Modify or Remove the value.

0802-070

Figure 48 Modifying an Alarm Limit

When modifying the value, use the arrow up and down buttons to
change the value under the cursor. Left and right arrow buttons
move the cursor. Select the OK button to accept the modified
value, or Cancel to undo the modification.
6. Set a suitable Hysteresis value to prevent the alarm from being
triggered unnecessarily by small measurement changes that pass
the alarm limit repeatedly.
7. Set or clear the Alarm enable checkbox to enable or disable the
alarm.
8. Press the EXIT button to leave the alarm configuration screen and
return to the basic view.

78 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Using Serial Line


Use the serial line command ALSEL to view or set the display alarms.

ALSEL [quantity1 quantity2]<cr>

where
quantity1 = Quantity for display alarm 1. You can set any quantity
available on your transmitter; see tables on page 22. In
addition to quantities, you can also select the following:

FAULT Alarm for device errors


ONLINE Alarm for sensor operations that freeze the
measurement output (for example, chemical purge).
quantity2 = Quantity for display alarm 2. Options are the same as for
quantity1.

Example (view current display alarm settings):


>alsel ?
Al1 P above: - ?
Al1 P below: 1013.00 hPa ?
Al1 P hyst : 10.00 hPa ?
Al1 P enabl: ON ?
Al2 T above: 40.00 'C ?
Al2 T below: - ?
Al2 T hyst : 1.00 'C ?
Al2 T enabl: OFF ?
Warning! One or more alarms disabled.
>

Table 15 ALSEL Parameters


Name Description
above If specified, the alarm goes off when the quantity value rises above
the exact value of this setpoint. However, if above < below, the
alarm goes off at (above + hyst) and (below hyst) instead.
Cannot be set for fault and online alarms.
below If specified, the alarm goes off when the quantity value decreases
below the exact value of this setpoint. However, if above < below,
the alarm goes off at (above + hyst) and (below hyst) instead.
Cannot be set for fault and online alarms.
hyst Distance from setpoint amount of extra retractment needed in order
to regenerate alarm on the next crossing of the setpoint.
Cannot be set for fault and online alarms.
enabl Enable (ON) or disable (OFF) the display alarm.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 79
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Example (set Tdf and T as display alarm quantities and configure the
alarms as prompted):
>alsel tdf t
Al1 Tdf above: 80.00 'C ? 10
Al1 Tdf below: - ?
Al1 Tdf hyst : 1.00 'C ?
Al1 Tdf enabl: ON ?
Al2 T above: 40.00 'C ? -
Al2 T below: - ? 0
Al2 T hyst : 1.00 'C ?
Al2 T enabl: OFF ? on
>

MI70 Link Program for Data Handling


MI70 Link is a support program that enables you to handle the
measurement data of your Vaisala transmitter using a Windows PC.
Using the MI70 Link you can, for example:

- Monitor the transmitters measurement readings directly using the


real-time window function.
- Transfer recorded data from the main transmitter memory in numeric
or graphical format, for further use in a spreadsheet program (such as
Microsoft Excel) or virtually any other application. Note that the
maximum amount of data points that can be downloaded in one
transfer is 65000.

To use the MI70 Link program, you must connect your Windows PC to
the service port of the transmitter with a serial or USB cable. The MI70
Link program, and the optional connection cables, are available from
Vaisala. See section Spare Parts and Accessories on page 189.

Follow the steps below to connect your transmitter to the MI70 Link
program using the serial interface:

1. Connect your PC to the service port of the transmitter. Refer to


section Service Port Connection on page 82.
2. Check that the PTU300 is powered.
3. Start the MI70 Link program.
4. Start using the program. There is usually no need to select a COM
port manually, the MI70 Link software can detect it automatically.

NOTE For instructions on using the MI70 Link, see the programs online help.

80 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Serial Line Communication


Connect the serial interface by using either the user port or the service
port.
For permanent interfacing to host system, use the user port. You can
change the serial settings and operate in RUN, STOP, SEND, POLL, and
MODBUS modes.
For temporary connections use the service port. Service port is always
available with fixed serial settings.

0605-039

Figure 49 Service Port Connector and User Port Terminal on


Motherboard
The following numbers refer to Figure 49 above:
1 = Service port connector
2 = User port terminals

User Port Connection


Use suitable serial cable between the user port RxD, GND and TxD
screw terminals and the PC serial port, see Figure 50 on page 82.
Table 16 Default Serial Communication Settings for the User
Port
Parameter Value
Bits per second 4800
Parity Even
Data bits 7
Stop bits 1
Flow control None

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 81
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

1036 V=
+

ANALOG OUTPUTS USER PORT POWER

24 V~

RxD

RS-232
GND
TxD
Ch1+
Ch1
1 2 3 4 5
Ch2+
6 7 8 9
Ch2
IOIOI
0506-033

Figure 50 Connection Example between PC Serial Port and User


Port

Connections to pins 4,6,7 and 8 on PC serial port are required only if you
are using software requiring hardware handshaking.

User Port Operating Modes


When the transmitter is powered up, it will behave according to its
configured operating mode:
- In STOP mode, the transmitter outputs the software version and the
command prompt (if echo is on).
- In RUN mode a measurement output starts immediately.
- In SEND mode one measurement message is printed and command
prompt is displayed (if echo is on).
- In POLL or MODBUS mode, the transmitter does not output anything
after power-up.

For a description of the modes, see section SMODE on page 121.

NOTE RS-232 User Port cannot be used when a communication module


(LAN, WLAN, or RS-422/485 interface) has been installed.

Service Port Connection


Connection Cables
To connect to the service port, you need a suitable cable with an RJ45
connector. Depending on the connections of your PC, you can either use
the Serial Connection Cable (optional accessory 19446ZZ) or the
USB-RJ45 Serial Connection Cable (optional accessory 219685). The
USB cable enables you to connect the transmitter to a PC via a standard
type A USB port. Note that the USB cable does not enable high speed

82 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

data transfer, since the bit rate is limited by the serial interface of the
service port.

Installing the Driver for the USB Cable


Before taking the USB cable into use, you must install the provided USB
driver on your PC. When installing the driver, you must acknowledge
any security prompts that may appear.

1. Check that the USB cable is not connected. Disconnect the cable if
you have already connected it.
2. Insert the media that came with the cable, or download the latest
driver from www.vaisala.com.
3. Execute the USB driver installation program (setup.exe), and
accept the installation defaults.
4. After the driver has been installed, connect the USB service cable
to a USB port on your PC. Windows will detect the new device,
and use the driver automatically.
5. The installation has reserved a COM port for the cable. Verify the
port number, and the status of the cable, using the Vaisala USB
Instrument Finder program that has been installed in the
Windows Start menu.

Windows will recognize each individual cable as a different device, and


reserve a new COM port. Remember to use the correct port in the
settings of your terminal program.

Using the Service Port


1. Open the screws on the transmitter cover, and open the cover.
2. Connect the desired cable (serial interface cable or USB cable) to
your PC and the service port connector on the transmitter. For the
location of the service port, refer to Figure 49 on page 81.
3. Open a terminal program and set the communication settings as
follows:
Table 17 Communication Settings for the Service Port
Parameter Value
Bauds 19200
Parity None
Data bits 8
Stop bits 1
Flow control None

For a detailed explanation of using a terminal program, see section


Terminal Program Settings on page 91.

4. Power-up the PTU300.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 83
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

LAN Communication
To enable LAN communication, a LAN or WLAN interface must be
physically connected to the network, and the networking settings must be
suitable for your network. For a description of interfaces, see sections
LAN Interface on page 61 and WLAN Interface on page 62.

The LAN and WLAN interfaces both operate by accessing the serial
interface (User Port) of the transmitter. All commands and protocols that
are available using the serial interface are available through the LAN and
WLAN interfaces; refer to section List of Serial Commands on page 94.
For instructions on how to connect using a terminal program, see section
Terminal Program Settings on page 91.

IP Configuration
The IP settings of the LAN and WLAN interfaces are described in Table
18. The current settings can be viewed on the serial line or using the
device information display; see section Information Display on page 72.

Table 18 IP Settings for the LAN and WLAN Interfaces


Parameter Description
Automatic configuration If enabled, the transmitter will retrieve its network
(DHCP) settings (including the IP Address) from a server
in the network. If disabled, static network settings
are used instead.
Web configuration If enabled, the settings of the interface can be
changed using a web browser. The configuration
page can be accessed by browsing to the IP
address of the transmitter.
IP Address The four part network ID of the transmitter. Must
be set manually if automatic configuration is not
used.

Example value: 192.168.0.222


Netmask Used together with the IP address to determine
which network the transmitter is a part of. Must be
set manually if automatic configuration is not
used.

A common netmask is 255.255.255.0


Gateway IP address of the server that enables the
transmitter to access other networks. Must be set
manually if automatic configuration is not used.

Example value: 192.168.0.1


MAC The MAC address is the unique hardware address
of the LAN or WLAN interface. Cannot be
changed.

84 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Using Display/Keypad
You can configure the IP settings of the LAN and WLAN interfaces
using the display/keypad as follows:

1. Press any of the arrow buttons to open the Main Menu.


2. Press the arrow button to select Interfaces.
3. Press the arrow button to select Network settings. There will be
a delay as the transmitter refreshes the network information.
4. You are now in the Network Interface menu. Selecting the IP
configuration option opens the IP configuration menu.

1102-015

Figure 51 Network Interface Menu

The Network Interface menu also allows you to configure the


Communication Protocol, enable or disable the Web
configuration option, or Disconnect all users that are currently
accessing the LAN or WLAN interface.
5. In the IP configuration menu, select Automatic configuration
(DHCP), or enter the IP address, Netmask and Gateway
manually. If automatic configuration is enabled, manual
configuration cannot be done.

0709-004

Figure 52 IP Configuration Menu

To enter a value manually, use the arrow buttons to select the


parameter to change, and press CHANGE. A cursor will appear in
the first digit. Move the cursor using the arrow buttons, and
change the value under the cursor using the arrow buttons.
Confirm the selection by pressing OK.
6. After configuring the desired parameters, press EXIT to apply the
changes and return to the basic display.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 85
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Using Serial Line


Use the serial line command NET to view or set the network settings for
the LAN and WLAN interfaces. You can also refresh the network
information or disconnect all active connections.

NET [REFRESH] [DISCONNECT] [DHCP WEB] [DHCP IP SUBNET


GATEWAY WEB]<cr>

where
REFRESH = Updates the network information and displays it.
DISCONNECT = Disconnects all current sessions.
DHCP = ON or OFF. Enables or disables the automatic IP
configuration.
WEB = ON or OFF. Enables or disables the Web
Configuration page.
IP = The four part network ID of the transmitter. Must
be set manually if automatic configuration is not
used.
SUBNET = Used together with the IP address to determine
which network the transmitter is a part of. Must be
set manually if automatic configuration is not used.
GATEWAY = IP address of the server that enables the transmitter
to access other networks. Must be set manually if
automatic configuration is not used.

Examples:
>net refresh
OK
DHCP : OFF
IP address : 192.168.0.101
Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0
Default gateway: 192.168.0.1
Web config. : OFF
MAC address : 00:40:9d:2c:d2:05
Status : Not connected
>

>net on off
DHCP : ON
IP address : 192.168.0.104
Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0
Default gateway: 192.168.0.1
Web config. : OFF
MAC address : 00:40:9d:2c:d2:05
Status : Connected
OK
>

86 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

>net off 192.168.0.101 255.255.255.0 192.168.0.1 off


DHCP : OFF
IP address : 192.168.0.101
Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0
Default gateway: 192.168.0.1
Web config. : OFF
MAC address : 00:40:9d:2c:d2:05
Status : Not connected
OK
>

Wireless LAN Configuration


The settings of the WLAN interface are described in Table 19. The
current settings can be viewed on the serial line or using the device
information display; see section Information Display on page 72.

- CCMP encryption is called AES in some networking products.


- The WLAN interface supports both WPA and WPA2 (also known as
802.11i) security when either WPA-PSK mode is selected.
- If your WLAN network is using some other security method than
listed below, you must set up a temporary WLAN network with any of
these settings and then use the web configuration to set WLAN
security settings for the actual network. See section Web
Configuration for LAN and WLAN on page 90.

Table 19 Wireless LAN Settings


Parameter Description
SSID The service set identifier (that is, network name) of the
wireless network to connect to. 1 32 characters.
Security type The security type of the wireless network. The options
are:

OPEN
OPEN/WEP
WPA-PSK/TKIP
WPA-PSK/CCMP

All other choices except OPEN require a security key;


see below.
Security key The encryption key or passphrase that is used with an
encrypted network.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 87
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Using Display/Keypad
You can configure the Wireless LAN settings using the display/keypad
as follows:

1. Press any of the arrow buttons to open the Main Menu.


2. Press the arrow button to select Interfaces.
3. Press the arrow button to select Network settings. There will be
a delay as the transmitter refreshes the network information.
4. Press the arrow button to select Wireless LAN settings.

0802-111

Figure 53 Wireless LAN Settings

5. The Name entry on the page shows the SSID of the currently
selected wireless network. To change the SSID, press the SET
button. Use the arrow buttons to change the character under
the cursor, and arrow buttons to more the cursor. Press the
OK button when done.

0802-110

Figure 54 Entering Network SSID

6. To change the currently selected Network type, select the Type


entry and press the CHANGE button. Select the new type from the
list and press the SELECT button.

0802-112

Figure 55 Selecting the Wireless Network Type

88 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

7. If you have selected an encrypted network type (WEP or WPA),


you must enter the security key to be used. Select the
Key/passphrase entry and press the SET button. Enter the key in
the same way as the SSID, and press the OK button. With the WEP
encryption you must enter the encryption key in hexadecimal
(10 hexdecimals for 64-bit encryption or 26 hexadecimals for
128-bit encryption). A WPA key must be 8 63 ASCII
characters.
8. After setting the wireless network parameters, press the EXIT
button in the Wireless LAN Settings menu. You will be asked to
confirm the new settings. Note that when new settings are saved,
all currently active WLAN connections are disconnected.

Using Serial Line


Use the serial line command WLAN to view or set the wireless network
settings. If you set an encrypted network type, you will be asked to enter
the security key. With the WEP encryption you must enter the encryption
key in hexadecimal (10 hexdecimals for 64-bit encryption or 26
hexadecimals for 128-bit encryption) or with plain ASCII characters (5
characters for 64-bit encryption or 13 characters for 128-bit encryption).
A WPA key must be 8 63 ASCII characters.

WLAN [SSID TYPE]<cr>

where
SSID = Network name in 1 32 characters
TYPE = Security type of the wireless network. The options
are:

OPEN
OPEN/WEP
WPA-PSK/TKIP
WPA-PSK/CCMP
Examples:
>wlan ?
Network SSID : WLAN-AP
Type : OPEN
>

>wlan accesspoint wpa-psk/tkip


Network SSID : accesspoint
Type : WPA-PSK/TKIP
WPA-PSK phrase ? thequickbrownfox
Save changes (Y/N) ? y
OK
>

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 89
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Communication Protocol
When a Telnet connection is established via the LAN or WLAN
interface, the session has the same communication mode, run interval,
poll address and echo settings as the serial port (user port) session would
have.

These settings can be changed using the display/keypad, using the serial
line (user port or service port), or on-the-fly during the Telnet session.

The display menu path to the Communication Protocol settings is:


Main Menu Interfaces Network Interface Communication
Protocol.

The commands for changing the settings are SMODE, INTV, ADDR,
and ECHO.

Web Configuration for LAN and WLAN


The LAN and WLAN interfaces both have a web configuration page that
is accessible using a browser. If you have not disabled the page from the
network settings, you can access it with a web browser at the IP address
of the interface. You can check the currently assigned IP address of the
interface from the device information screens (see Device Information on
page 115), or from the serial line by issuing the net ? command.

When accessing the web configuration page, you must first log in.

Username: user
Password: vaisala

The web configuration page provides similar network configuration


options as the serial line and the display/keypad. It also has additional
options for advanced users. For example, there are more options for
securing the wireless network.

If these additional options are used, they will appear as custom


configurations when viewed from the serial line or the display/keypad.

90 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

1102-017

Figure 56 Web Configuration Interface for WLAN

Terminal Program Settings


The instructions below describe how to connect to the PTU300 using the
PuTTY terminal application for Windows. Perform the necessary cabling
and configuration of the transmitter before following the instructions.

PuTTY is available for download at www.vaisala.com.

NOTE PuTTY cannot be used to access the transmitter through the User Port if
the transmitter is configured to use the Modbus protocol. However, you
can always use PuTTY to access the transmitter through the Service Port.

Opening a Serial/USB connection


1. Power up the PTU300 and start the PuTTY application.
2. Select the Serial & USB settings category, and check that the
correct COM port is selected in the Serial or USB line to connect
to field. Change the port if necessary.

If you are using a Vaisala USB cable, you can check the port that it
uses by clicking the USB Finder... button. This opens the Vaisala
USB Instrument Finder program that has been installed along with
the USB drivers.
3. Check that the other serial/USB line settings are correct for your
connection, and change if necessary. The default settings (shown in
Figure 57 on page 92) are used by the Service Port of the PTU300.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 91
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

0810-070

Figure 57 Opening a Serial Connection

4. Click the Open button to open the connection window and start
using the serial line.

If PuTTY is unable to open the serial port you selected, it will show
you an error message instead. If this happens, restart PuTTY and
check the settings.

Opening a Telnet Session (LAN/WLAN)

NOTE The instructions below assume that the LAN/WLAN interface on the
transmitter is correctly configured and the network connection is already
done.

1. Power up the instrument and start the PuTTY application. If your


transmitter acquires a network address using DHCP, wait for a
minute for this to complete, then verify the address from the
transmitter.
2. In the Session window, select the Telnet connection type.
3. Enter the IP address of your transmitter in the Host Name (or IP
address) field. Use the default Telnet port 23.

92 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

0810-071

Figure 58 Opening a Telnet Connection

4. Click the Open button to open the connection window and start
using the Telnet session.

If PuTTY is unable to connect the IP address you entered, it will


show you an error message instead. If this happens, check the
IP address and the connections, restart PuTTY, and try again.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 93
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

List of Serial Commands


All commands can be issued either in uppercase or lowercase. In the
command examples, the keyboard input by the user is in bold type.
The notation <cr> refers to pressing the carriage return (Enter) key on
your computer keyboard. Enter a <cr> to clear the command buffer
before starting to enter commands.
In the tables below, the bold text in the brackets is the default setting.
Table 20 Measurement Commands
Command Description
R Start the continuous outputting
S Stop the continuous outputting
INTV [0 ... 255 S/MIN/H]
Set the continuous output interval
(for RUN mode)
SEND [0 ... 255] Output the reading once
DSEND Output the reading once from all connected
transmitters (in STOP or POLL mode)
SCOM Define a user-specific SEND command for one
message output
SMODE [STOP/SEND/RUN/ Set the serial interface mode
POLL/MODBUS]
SDELAY View or set user port (RS-232 or RS-485)
answer minimum delay
SERI [baud p d s] User Port settings (Default: 4800 E 7 1) baud:
300 ... 115200
ADDR [0 ... 255] Set the transmitter address (for POLL and
MODBUS modes)
NET View or set networking parameters for LAN and
WLAN interfaces
WLAN View or set wireless network parameters for
WLAN interface
OPEN [0 ... 255] Open a temporary connection to a POLL mode
device
CLOSE Close the temporary connection (back to POLL
mode)

Table 21 Formatting Commands


Command Description
FORM Set the output format of SEND and R
commands
TIME Set the time
DATE Set the date
FTIME [ON/OFF] Add time to SEND and R outputs
FDATE [ON/OFF] Add date to SEND and R outputs
FST [ON/OFF] Add the state of probe heating and chemical
purge in connection with SEND and R
commands
SCOM Assign a new command name that works like
the SEND command
UNIT Select the metric or non-metric output units

94 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Table 22 Data Recording Commands


Command Description
DIR Display recorded files
PLAY [0 ... 28] [START END] Output recorded data file. Start and end times
can only be specified if the data logger module
is installed. The times must be given in the
following format:
yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss
DSEL Select data recording and display quantities
(1 ... 4).
DELETE Delete all data files, including the memory of
the optional data logger module
UNDELETE Recover the deleted files that have not been
overwritten

Table 23 Chemical Purge Commands


Command Description
PUR Set the automatic chemical purge
PURGE Start the manual chemical purge
RGLIMIT [ON/OFF] Prevent chemical purge if sensor temperature
is below 0 C

Table 24 Calibration and Adjustment Commands


Command Description
CRH Relative humidity calibration
CT Temperature calibration
CTA Additional temperature probe calibration
FCRH Relative humidity calibration after sensor
change
CTEXT Give the text to calibration information field
CDATE Set the calibration date
ACAL Analog output calibration
LC Output the linear corrections in use
LCI [ON/OFF] Activate or deactivate the linear offset or
offset/gain pressure corrections
LCI Enter new linear offset and offset/gain pressure
corrections to the transmitter
MPC Output the multipoint corrections in use for
pressure measurement
MPCI [ON/OFF] Activate or deactivate the multipoint corrections
for pressure measurement
MPCI Enter new multipoint corrections for pressure
measurement
MPC RH Multipoint correction for relative humidity
[ON/OFF/LIST/INIT/CLEAR]
OFFSET Pressure one-point offset correction

Table 25 Setting and Testing the Analog Outputs


Command Description
AMODE View the analog output modes
ASEL Select the parameters for the analog outputs
ITEST Test the analog outputs

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 95
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Command Description
AERR Change the analog error output values
AOVER [ON/OFF] Extend analog output range by 10%

Table 26 Setting and Testing the Relays


Command Description
RSEL Set and view the relays
RTEST Test the relays

Table 27 Pressure Commands


Command Description
PRES [hPa] Set the value for pressure compensations
XPRES [hPa] Set the value for pressure compensations,
temporarily
PFIX Select pressure compensation using either a
fixed value or using measured value
AVRG Set pressure average period
HHCP Set height offset for HCP calculation
HQNH Set height offset for QNH calculation
HQFE Set height offset for QFE calculation
PSTAB Set the pressure stability indicator
PDMAX Set the pressure difference limit

Table 28 GPS Commands


Command Description
*0100P9 Data output query
*0200P9 Data output query
*9900P9 Data output query
*9900SN Serial number query

Table 29 Other Commands


Command Description
? Output information about the device
?? Output information about the device in POLL
mode
ALSEL Set display alarms
CON Set display contrast
ECHO [ON/OFF] Turn the serial interface echo ON/OFF
ERRS List present transmitter errors
FILT Set the result filtering
FIND All devices in POLL mode send their
addresses
HELP List the currently available commands
LIGHT Set the display backlight mode
LOCK Lock the menu or disable the keypad
MODBUS View Modbus diagnostic counters
MODS View information about connected modules
RHLIMIT [ON/OFF] Limit highest value of RH output to 100%
VERS Display the software version information
XHEAT Sensor heating

96 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Getting Measurement Message from


Serial Line
Starting Continuous Outputting
R
Enter the R command to start the continuous output of measurements.
The default output format depends on the quantities your transmitter
supports. You can change the output message format and interval with
the FORM and INTV commands. See sections FORM on page 101 and
INTV on page 122.

Example:
>r
P= 1021.6 hPa T= 23.2 'C RH= 5.8 %RH
>
If a value is too long to fit to the allocated space in the output, or if there
is an error in outputting the quantity, the value is displayed with stars '*'.

Example:
RH=***.* %RH T= 31.0 'C

Stopping Continuous Outputting


S
Use the S command to end the RUN mode. After this command all other
commands can be used. You can also press the Esc button or reset the
transmitter to stop the outputting.

See command SMODE to change the default (power-up) operation


mode.

Outputting Reading Once


SEND
Use the SEND command to output the reading once in STOP mode.

Example:
>send
P= 1021.6 hPa T= 23.3 'C RH= 5.7 %RH
>

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 97
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Assign an Alias for the SEND Command


Use the SCOM command to assign a new command that works like the
SEND command. The standard SEND command of the transmitter will
always function normally whatever the SCOM definition may be.
Command names are case-insensitive.

SCOM<cr>

Example (assigning the command P as an alias for the SEND command):


>scom
Send command : ? p
>p
P= 1021.4 hPa T= 23.2 'C RH= 5.7 %RH
>

You can remove the SCOM definition by pressing Esc when entering the
command name:
>scom
Send command : p ? <esc>
>

Outputting Reading Once From All Transmitters


Use the DSEND command to output the reading once from all connected
transmitters that are in STOP or POLL modes. In order to avoid data
collisions, the transmitters will send their response after a suitable delay.
The response includes the transmitterss address, followed by their
measurement message.

NOTE The total execution time of the DSEND command depends on the bit rate
of the serial port connection. At slow speeds, it will take a considerable
amount of time for devices with large address number to respond. The
delay will be the same even if there are no other devices at all.

DSEND<cr>

Example (transmitters with addresses 3 and 25 responding):


>dsend
3 P= 1021.4 hPa T= 23.2 'C RH= 5.7 %RH
25 P= 1021.3 hPa T= 21.2 'C RH= 8.2 %RH
>

98 ___________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G
Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Communicating with a Transmitter in POLL


Mode
OPEN
When all transmitters on the RS-485 bus are in POLL mode the OPEN
command sets one transmitter temporarily to STOP mode so that other
commands can be entered.

OPEN [aa]<cr>

where
aa = Address of the transmitter (0 ... 255)

CLOSE
The CLOSE command switches the transmitter back to the POLL mode.

Example:
>open 2 (opens the line to transmitter 2, other
transmitters stay in POLL mode)

>crh (for example, calibration performed)


...
>close (line closed)

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 99
User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Formatting Serial Line Message


NOTE Instead of using the FTIME, FDATE and FST commands described in
this section, you can use the FORM command with modifiers TIME,
DATE, and STAT. See section FORM on page 101.

FTIME and FDATE


FTIME and FDATE commands will enable/disable output of time and
date to the serial line. To add time to R and SEND outputs enter:

FTIME [x]<cr>

To add date to R and SEND outputs enter:

FDATE [x]<cr>
where
x = ON or OFF

Example:
>send
RH= 98.4 %RH T= 31.0 'C
>ftime on
Form. time : ON
>send
03:47:59 RH= 98.4 %RH T= 31.0 'C
>fdate on
Form. date : ON
>send
2004-07-05 03:48:03 RH= 98.4 %RH T= 31.0 'C
>

100 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

General Settings
Changing Quantities and Units
Use serial commands or the optional display/keypad to change quantities
and units. For more information on available quantities and units, see
Table 4 on page 22. For more information on optional quantities, see
Table 5 on page 22.

NOTE Only the quantities selected when ordering the device can be selected as
display output quantities.

Using Display/Keypad
To select the display output quantities.

1. Press any of the arrow buttons to open the Main Menu.


2. Select Display, press the right arrow button.
3. Select Quantities, press the right arrow button.
4. Select quantities by pressing the up/down arrow buttons. Confirm
the selection by pressing the SELECT key. You can select 1 ... 4
display quantities at a time.
5. Press the EXIT key to return to the basic display.

To select the display unit:

1. Press any of the arrow buttons to open the Main Menu.


2. Select Display, press the right arrow button.
3. Select Units and press the right arrow button.
4. Select the display unit by pressing the up/down arrow buttons.
Confirm the selection by pressing the CHANGE key. The unit
changes from metric to non-metric or the other way round.
5. Press the EXIT key to return to the basic display.

NOTE Changing the display quantities/units (by using the display/keypad) has
no effect on the serial output data.

Using Serial Line


FORM

Use the serial line command FORM to change the format or select a
certain quantities for the output commands SEND and R.
FORM [x]<cr>

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 101


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

where
x = Formatter string

The formatter string consists of quantities and modifiers. If no formatter


string is entered, the command will display the currently active formatter
string. Note that the hash symbol "#" is shown as a backslash "\" when
viewing the current formatter string.

When entering the command, use the abbreviations of the quantities. For
more information on quantities, see Table 4 on page 22, Table 5 on page
22, and Table 6 on page 22.

The modifiers are presented in Table 30 on page 102.

Table 30 FORM Command Modifiers


Modifier Description
x.y Length modifier (number of digits and decimal places)
#t Tabulator
#r Carriage-return
#n Line feed
String constant
#xxx Special character, code "xxx" (decimal), for example #027 for
ESC
U5 Unit field and length (length optional)
ADDR Transmitter address [00...255]
ERR Error flags for P, T, Ta, RH [0000 ... 1111], 0 = no error
STAT Transmitter status in 7 character field, for example:
N 0 no heating
h 115 probe heating active, power 115/255
H 159.0 purge heating active, temperature 159C
S 115.0 purge cooling active, temperature 115C
X 95.0 sensor heating active, temperature 95C
SN Transmitter serial number
TIME Time [hh:mm:ss]
DATE Date [yyyy-mm-dd]
OK Pressure stability indicator, two characters [OK or " "]
CS2 Modulus-256 checksum of message sent so far, ASCII encoded
hexadecimal notation
CS4 Modulus-65536 checksum of message sent so far, ASCII
encoded hexadecimal notation
CSX NMEA xor-checksum of message sent so far, ASCII encoded
hexadecimal notation
A3H Pressure tendency [* or 0...8]

102 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Command FORM / will return the default output format. The default
output format depends on the device configuration.
>form /
OK
>send
P= 1013.2 hPa T= 31.1 'C RH= 38.3 %RH
>

To output reading including pressure, temperature and relative humidity:


>form 6.1 "P=" P " " U6 3.1 "T=" T " " U3 3.1 "RH=" RH " "
U4 \r \n
OK
>send
P= 1033.7 hPa T= 22.2 'C RH= 38.3 %RH

The default output format includes the average value of the measured
pressure (quantity P). If your PTU300 is equipped with two pressure
transducers, you can add the individual pressure readings from the
transducers to the output format (quantities P1 and P2):
>form 6.1 "P1=" P1 " " U6 6.1 "P2=" P2 " " U6 6.1 "P=" P "
" U6 3.1 "T=" T " " U3 3.1 "RH=" RH " " U4 \r \n
OK
>send
P1= 1008.9 hPa P2= 1009.1 hPa P= 1009.0 hPa T= 23.9 'C RH=
34.5 %RH

Other examples:
>form "RH=" 4.2 rh U5 #t "T=" t U3 #r #n
OK
>send
>RH= 14.98%RH T= 74.68'F

>form "Tfrost=" tdf U3 #t "Temp=" t U3 #r#n


OK
>send
>Tfrost= 36.0'C Temp= 31.0'C

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 103


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

UNIT
Use this command to select metric or non-metric output units. With the
command you can also set P units.

UNIT [x] [y]<cr>

where
x = M or N or P
y = Pressure Units (see Table 6 on page 22)

where
M = Metric units
N = Non-metric units
P = Pressure

Examples of changing the units:


>unit n
Output units : non metric
>unit m
Output units : metric
>unit p torr
P units : torr
>unit p hpa
P units : hPa
>

NOTE This command changes both the serial output and display units to either
metric or non-metric units. When you want to output both metric and
non-metric units simultaneously on the display, select the display units
later by using the display/keypad.

104 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Limit RH Output Range


Use the serial line command RHLIMIT if you want to strictly limit the
allowed value of the relative humidity (RH) quantity to range 0 ... 100%.
The limit is implemented on all outputs and the display. Other quantities
are not affected, only RH. Note that seeing values above 100 %RH is
useful for detecting condensation on the sensor, and possible
measurement drift in very high humidities. For this reason, Vaisala
recommends leaving this feature at the default setting (off).

RHLIMIT [ON/OFF]<cr>

where
ON = Allowed range of RH output is 0 ... 100 %.
OFF = Allowed range of RH output is -5 ... 110 % (default).

Example (view current setting):


>rhlimit ?
RH limit 0...100: OFF
>

Example (enable RH limit):


>rhlimit on
RH limit 0...100: ON
>

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 105


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Date and Time


Using Display/Keypad
If the optional Data Logger Module is installed, you can change the time
and date using the display/keypad.

1. Press any of the arrow buttons to open the Main Menu.


2. Select System and press the arrow button to confirm your
selection.
3. Select Date and time and press the arrow button.
4. Press the SET button to enter the adjustment mode, and use the
arrow buttons to select and change the values.
5. You can also change the date and time formats that are shown in
the graphs. The selected formats are only used in graphical display,
they do not change the formats that are used in the serial
communication.
6. Press EXIT to return to the basic display.

Using Serial Line


To set time enter the TIME command. To set date enter the DATE
command.
TIME<cr>
DATE<cr>
These time and date settings are shown on the timestamps of PLAY
command. When you want to include time and date in the R and SEND
commands, use the FTIME and FDATE commands.

Example:
>time
Time : 13:42:49 ?

>date
Date : 2007-05-31 ?

NOTE If the optional Data Logger Module is not installed, time and date
available on the serial ports (only) are cleared to 2000-01-01 00:00:00 at
reset or at power failure.

106 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

NMEA Data Format


The PTU300 transmitter can be used in connection with a GPS receiver.
It responds to a GPS input command by outputting a single predefined
NMEA format message or the transmitter serial number.

NOTE The pressure unit has to be set as bar when the NMEA data output
format is used.
The maximum length of FORM is 128 characters.

NOTE Check that the serial bus settings of the transmitter and those of the GPS
receiver are the same. A baud rate less than 9600 is recommended.

Example:

"$PASHS,XDR,P,"1.5_P_",B,"_SN_",C,"_3.2_T_",C,"_SN_",H,"_RH_",P,"_S
N_#r #n

where

"$PASHS,XDR,P," Text field $PASHS,XDR,P, (P transducer type


= pressure)
1.5 Number field
P Pressure
",B," Text field (B transmitter unit = Bar)
SN Transmitter ID (serial number)
",C," Text field (C transducer type = temperature)
3.2 Number field
T Temperature
",C," Text field (C temperature unit = deg. Celcius)
SN Transmitter ID (serial number)
",H," Text field (H transducer type = humidity)
RH Humidity
",P," Text field (P humidity = % relative humidity)
SN Transmitter ID (serial number)
#r #n CR LF
_ space

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 107


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Output format:
>send
$PASHS,XDR,P,0.99710,B,S1630001,C,22.47,C.S1630001,H,20.84,
P,S1660001
>

Example:

"$PASHS,XDR,P," 1.5_P_",B,,C,"_3.2_T_",C,,H,"_RH_",P,"_#r_#n_

Output format:
>send
$PASHS,XDR,P,1.01148,B,,C, 27.11,C,,H, 54.29,P,
>

GPS Commands
The PTU300 transmitter responds to following GPS specific application
commands.

*0100P9<cr>

Example:
>*0100P9
$PASHS,XDR,P,1.03384,B,A2100012,C,22.28,C,A2100012,H,39.65,
P,A2100012
>

*0200P9<cr>

Example:
>*0200P9
$PASHS,XDR,P,1.01496,B,T5030004,C,24.42,C,T5030004,H,41.18,
P,T5030004
>

*9900P9<cr>

Example:
>*9900P9
$PASHS,XDR,P,1.01496,B,T5030004,C,24.42,C,T5030004,H,41.18,
P,T5030004
>

108 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

*9900SN<cr>

Example:
>*9900sn
A2100012
>

Pressure Compensation Settings


The pressure has an effect on humidity calculations and accuracy.
Therefore, accurate calculations can be achieved only when the process
pressure is taken into consideration.

Note that conversions from mmHg and inHg are defined at 0 C and for
mmH2O and inH2O at 4 C.

NOTE Pressure compensation is intended to be used in normal air only. When


measuring in other gases, please contact Vaisala for further information.

Using Display/Keypad
Use display/keypad to set the pressure compensation. To select the
pressure unit using display/keypad see section Changing Quantities and
Units on page 101.

1. Press any of the arrow buttons to open the Main Menu.


2. Select Measuring and press the right arrow button.
3. Select Pressure compensation and press the right arrow button.
4. Use the up/down arrow buttons to select either Fixed: 1013.25hPa
or Measured P for pressure compensation.
5. Selecting Measured P: Press the SELECT key and then exit the
menu.
6. Selecting Fixed: 1013.25hPa: Press the SELECT key, and then
SET. You can move from a digit to another one by pressing the
left/right arrow buttons. To change the unit, press the up/down
arrow buttons.
7. Press the OK key and then exit the menu.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 109


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Using Serial Line


PRES and XPRES
Command XPRES must be used if the value is changed frequently (for
example, by an automatic system that updates the value). Its value is not
retained at reset, and when set to 0, last value set with PRES is used
instead. Use the serial line and do the following:
PRES [aaaa.a]<cr>

XPRES [aaaa.a]<cr>

where
aaaa.a = Absolute process pressure (hPa)

Example:
>pres
Pressure : 1013.00 hPa ?
>pres 1010
Pressure : 1010.00 hPa
>

Table 31 Conversion Factors for Pressure Units


From To: hPa
mbar 1
Pa N/m2 0.01
mmHg torr 1.333224
inHg 33.86388
mmH2O 0.09806650
inH2O 2.490889
atm 1013.25
at 980.665
bar 1000
1)
psia 68.94757
1) psia = psi absolute.

Example:

29.9213 inHg = 29.9213 x 33.86388 = 1013.25 hPa

PFIX
Use the PFIX command to select either P inputted or P measured.

- When PFIX is On, fixed PRES value is used


- When PFIX is Off, measured PRES value is used

110 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

PSTAB
Use the PSTAB command to define the pressure stability indicator
reflecting maximum allowed pressure difference between two successive
averaged measurements. The user also has to define the FORM
command to include the "OK" stability indicator field. The factory
setting for the stability indicator level is 0.5 hPa.

Example:
>pstab
Stab. indicator: OFF ? on
Max P change : 0.5 ? 1.0

PDMAX [x]<cr>

where
x = Pressure reading

The PDMAX [x] command is used to define the maximum pressure


difference between the pressure readings from two pressure transducers
(P1 and P2). If the defined value is exceeded, the relevant digit in the
ERR field will change from 0 to 1.

Crucial conditions for an acceptable measurement are:

Two transducers: P high - P low = Pd max limit/less than Pd max limit

The factory setting for Pdmax is 1.0 hPa.

Example of setting the limit to 0.5 hPa:


>pdmax
Max P diff. : 1.00 ? 0.5

Pdmax limit works as follows:


>form 4.1 p1 " " p2 " " p " " u3 " " ERR #r#n
OK

Example: Maximum pressure difference is within the limit


>send
1034.2 1034.4 1034.3 hPa 0000

Example: Maximum pressure difference exceeds the limit


>send
1034.2 1035.4 ****** hPa 1000

Use the ERRS command to analyze problems.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 111


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Data Filtering for Pressure


Use the serial command AVRG to view and set the averaging time
during which the individual pressure measurement samples are integrated
to get an averaged reading. The averaging time is the total averaging time
of the transmitter.
AVRG [x]<cr>

where
X = 1 ... 60 s (default: 1 s)
.
Note that if the averaging time is defined to be long, the settling time at
power-up will be long, too.
A minimum of one-second averaging time is recommended per each
pressure transducer. These selections are used as the factory setting
averaging times.

Example of setting the averaging time to 60 seconds (WMO averaging


time for barometric pressure measurement):
>avrg
P1 average : 1 s ? 60
>

112 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Data Filtering for Humidity and


Temperature
The data averaging filter setting for humidity and temperature is separate
from the pressure filtering setting. You can change it using the
display/keypad or on the serial line. There are three levels of filtering
available. The lowest measurement noise is achieved with the extended
filtering.

Table 32 Filtering Levels for Humidity Temperature


Setting Filtering Level
OFF No filtering (default setting).
STANDARD Standard filtering. Approximately 13 s moving average.
EXTENDED Extended filtering. Approximately 1 min average by
default, but configurable on the serial line.

Using Display/Keypad
1. Press any of the arrow buttons to open the Main Menu.
2. Select Measuring by pressing the arrow button.
3. Select Filtering and press CHANGE to confirm your selection.
4. Select Off/Standard/Extended and press SELECT to confirm
your selection.
5. Press EXIT to return to the basic display.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 113


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Using Serial Line


Use the serial line command FILT to set the RH and T filtering level.

FILT [level] [extfactor]<cr>

where
level = Filtering level. The options are:

OFF (no filtering, default setting)


ON (standard filtering, approximately 13 s moving
average)
EXT (extended filtering, approximately 1 min average by
default but configurable by changing the extfactor)
extfactor = Weighted average factor for extended filtering level.
Range 0 ... 1, default 0.030.

In extended filtering mode, the output is calculated based


on the following formula:
[(new result * extfactor) + (old result * (1.0 - extfactor))]
This means that with extfactor value 1 the transmitter
will take only the latest measurement into account, but
with extfactor value 0.1 a new output is a combination of
the previous output (90%) and the latest measurement
(10%).

Example (enable standard filtering):


>filt on
Filter : ON
>

114 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Device Information
The device information contains current configuration; status and settings
of the device. The information is available through the display/menu, as
well. For more information, see Information Display on page 72.

When requesting the device information, the following information will


be shown:

- Current sensor operation (for example, chemical purge), if any, in


progress
- Present or past unacknowledged errors, if any
- Device identification; product name, version and serial number
- Current date and time (only shown if data logger module installed)
- Adjustment information (the latest date, user made adjustments)
- Measuring settings
- Information on chemical purge settings (when applicable)
- Display Alarm settings
- Serial interface information
- Network settings and status of the LAN and WLAN interfaces
- Analog output information
- Relay output information (when applicable)

Using Serial Line

?
Use the serial line command ? to check the current transmitter
configuration. Command ?? is similar but can also be used if the
transmitter is in POLL mode.

Example:
>?
PTU300 / 3.01
Serial number : A2150004
Batch number : A1450004
Adjust. date : 2006-01-22
Adjust. info : (not set)
Date : 2006-02-27
Time : 14:00:57
Serial mode : RUN
Baud P D S : 4800 E 7 1
Output interval: 150 s
Address : 0
Echo : OFF
Pressure : 1013.25 hPa
Filter : ON

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 115


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Ch1 output : 4...20mA


Ch2 output : 4...20mA
Ch1 P low : 500.00 hPa
Ch1 P high : 1100.00 hPa
Ch2 T low : -40.00 'C
Ch2 T high : 60.00 'C
Module 1 : RELAY-1
Module 2 : BARO-1
>

LIGHT
Use the LIGHT command to view or set the backlight mode of the
display (optional). Issuing the command without specifying a mode
shows the current backlight mode.

LIGHT [mode]<cr>

where
mode = Operating mode of the display backlight. The options are:

ON (backlight always on)


OFF (backlight always off)
AUTO (backlight automatically turns on and off when
keypad is used)

Example:
>light
Backlight : OFF
>light auto
Backlight : AUTO
>

116 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

HELP
Use the HELP command to list the commands.

Example:
>help
? ACAL ADDR AERR ALSEL
ASEL AVRG CDATE CLOSE CON
CRH CT CTEXT DATE DELETE
DIR DSEL DSEND ECHO ERRS
FCRH FILT FORM HELP HHCP
HQFE HQNH INTV ITEST LIGHT
LOCK MODBUS MODS MPC MPCI
OFFSET PDMAX PFIX PLAY PRES
PSTAB PUR PURGE R RESET
SCOM SDELAY SEND SERI SMODE
SWARM SYSTEM TEST TIME UNDELETE
UNIT VERS XHEAT XPRES
>

ERRS
Use the ERRS command to display transmitter error messages, see Error
States on page 157 and Table 36 on page 158.

Example:
>errs
No errors
>

Example:
>errs
Error: E2 Humidity sensor open circuit.
>

MODS
Use the MODS command to display information about the optional
modules that are connected to the transmitter.
Example:
>mods
Module 1 : WLAN-1 (POST: release_82000941_J; FW:
Version 82000977_K1 10/16/2008)
Module 2 : LOGGER-1 (1024 MB; HW: B; SW: 5)
>

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 117


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

VERS
Use the VERS command to display software version information.
Example:
>vers
PTU300 / 5.10
>

Resetting Transmitter using Serial Line


RESET
Resets the device. The user port switches to start-up output mode
selected with command SMODE.

Locking Menu/Keypad using Serial Line


LOCK
Use the LOCK command to prevent the user from entering the menu
using the keypad, or to lock the keypad completely. You can optionally
set a 4-digit PIN code, for example 4444.

If a PIN code has been set, the user will be prompted to enter the code
when trying to access the menu. Entering the code correctly will disable
the lock until the user returns back to the basic view.

LOCK [x] [yyyy]<cr>

where
x = Keypad locking level, range 0...2. The options are:
0 - No lock (enables full access)
1 - Menu locked, but graphs are accessible
2 - Keypad completely disabled
yyyy = 4-digit PIN code. The code can only be set when keypad
locking level is 1.

Examples:
>lock 1 4444
Keyboard lock : 1 [4444]
>

>lock 1
Keyboard lock : 1
>

118 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Serial Output Settings


The communication settings for the user port can be changed via the
serial line or by using the optional display/keypad. The communication
settings for the service port are fixed and not changeable.

NOTE If a communication module (LAN, WLAN, or RS-422/RS-485 interface)


has been installed, the user port is not accessible. Any changes to the
settings are applied to the interface provided by the module, if applicable.

Using Display/Keypad
1. Press any of the arrow buttons to open the Main Menu.
2. Select Interfaces and press the arrow button to confirm your
selection.
3. Select Serial interface and press the arrow button to confirm
your selection.
4. Select Bit rate and Serial format by pressing the CHANGE
button. Use the arrow buttons to select and press SELECT to
confirm your selection.
5. Select the Protocol to be used by the serial output by pressing the
CHANGE button. Select the option using the arrow buttons
and press SELECT. This is the same serial mode setting that is
changed by the SMODE serial command.
- RUN mode continuously outputs the measurement message at
the set interval. If you select the RUN mode, set the desired
RUN interval also.
- POLL mode enables multiple transmitters to share the same RS-
485 line. If you select the POLL mode, select the Device
address also, as each transmitter on the line must have an
unique address.
- In STOP mode, transmitter outputs the transmitter software
version at reset or power-up and remains silent, waiting for
commands.
- The SEND mode is almost identical to the STOP mode. The
only difference is that the transmitter outputs a measurement
message at start-up, instead of software version.
- In MODBUS mode, only Modbus protocol communication is
available. See Chapter 5, Modbus, on page 147.
6. Select the RUN interval and the unit. Press OK to confirm.
7. Select the Device address and press SET to confirm.
8. Select ECHO, and press ON to turn to it on, OFF to turn it off.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 119


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

9. Press EXIT to return to the basic display.

The new user port settings set using the display/keypad are effective
immediately.

Using Serial Line


NOTE You can use the serial commands to change/view the user port settings
even if you are currently connected to the service port.

SERI
Use the SERI command to set the communication settings for the user
port. Changed settings will be activated at next reset or power up.

SERI [b p d s]<cr>
where
b = Bit rate (110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,19200,
38400, 57600, 115200)
p = Parity (n = none, e = even, o = odd)
d = Data bits (7 or 8)
s = Stop bits (1 or 2)

The settings can be changed one parameter at a time or all parameters at


once.

Example (changing all parameters):


>SERI 600 N 8 1
600 N 8 1
>

Example (changing parity only):


>SERI O
4800 O 7 1

120 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

SMODE
Use the SMODE command to set the user port start-up operating mode.

SMODE [xxxx]<cr>

where
xxx = STOP, SEND, RUN, POLL, or MODBUS.
Table 33 Selection of Output Modes
Mode Measurement Output Available Commands
STOP Only with the SEND command. All (default mode).
SEND One measurement message All.
automatically at start-up, then
only with the SEND command.
RUN Automatic output. Only command S.
POLL Only with the SEND [addr] SEND [addr] and OPEN [addr].
command. Other commands available after
opening a line to the transmitter
using the OPEN command.

Use with RS-485 buses where


multiple transmitters can share
the same line.
MODBUS Must be read from the Modbus protocol only; see
transmitter using Modbus Chapter 5, Modbus, on page 147.
protocol.

Selected output mode will be activated at next reset or power up.

ADDR
Use the ADDR command to set the device address of the transmitter.
Addresses are required for POLL mode and MODBUS mode (serial
Modbus).

ADDR [aa]<cr>

where
aa = Device address of the transmitter, range 0 ... 255 (default = 0)

Example (changing the transmitter address from 0 to 52):


>addr
Address : 0 ? 52
>

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 121


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

INTV
Use the INTV command to set the RUN mode output interval. The time
interval is used only when the RUN mode is active. Setting the interval to
zero enables the fastest possible output rate.

INTV [xxx yyy]<cr>

where
xxx = Delay, range 0 ... 255.
yyy = Unit: S, MIN or H.

Example (setting the output interval to 10 minutes):


>intv 10 min
Output interval: 10 min
>

SDELAY
With the SDELAY command you can set delay (response time) for user
port, or view currently set delay value. Adjusting the delay may be
needed when half-duplex communication (typically two-wire RS-485) is
used.

The delay value corresponds to tens of milliseconds (for example, 5 =


0.050s minimum answer delay). The value can be set between 0 ... 254.

Example:
>sdelay
Serial delay : 0 ? 10

>sdelay
Serial delay : 10 ?

ECHO
Use the ECHO command to set the user port echo. The command either
enables or disables echo of characters received.

ECHO [x]<cr>

where
x = ON (enabled, default) or OFF (disabled)

NOTE When using the RS-485 interface with a 2-wire connection, always
disable echo. When using a RS-232, RS-422/485 4-wire connection,
LAN, or WLAN, you can enable or disable it as you wish.

122 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Data Recording
Data recording function is always on and collects data automatically into
the memory of the device. If the optional data logger module is installed,
the transmitter uses it automatically. Recorded data do not disappear
from the memory when the power is switched off. Collected data can be
observed in a form of a graph in the graphical view of the display or it
can be listed out by using the serial line or MI70 Link program.

Selecting Data Recording Quantities


If the device is provided with the optional display, the recorded quantities
are always those selected for the display. Up to four quantities can be
recorded at a time. For instructions on how to select the display quantities
with the keypad, see section Changing Quantities and Units on page 101.

DSEL
Use the serial line command DSEL to select the quantities to be recorded
if the transmitter is not equipped with display/keypad.

DSEL [xxx]<cr>

where
xxx = Data recording quantity. For more information on available
quantities and units, see Table 4 on page 22. For more
information on optional quantities, see Table 5 on page 22.

Example:
>dsel rh t tdf
RH T Tdf
>
Enter the command without parameters and press ENTER to display the
current recording parameters.

View Recorded Data


If the device is provided with the optional display, the graphical display
shows the data of the selected quantities, one at a time. For details about
graphical display, see section Graphic History on page 70.

You may also dump the logged data to the serial line in numeric form
with the following commands.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 123


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

DIR
Use the serial line and enter the DIR command to check the available
files.
Without the data logger module, the device records six files (six
observation periods) for each selected quantity. The data logger raises the
number of recorded files to seven for each quantity. Thus, the total
amount of the files varies between 6 and 28. See Table 13 on page 70.

Select, for example, two quantities (P and T). The last column illustrates
the number of data points that has been stored in the file.
Example (data logger module installed):
>dir
File description Oldest data available No. of points
1 P (10 s intervals) 2007-05-30 08:26:50 13996800
2 P (90 s intervals) 2007-05-30 05:25:30 1555200
3 P (12 min intervals) 2007-05-29 05:48:00 194400
4 P (2 h intervals) 2007-05-19 02:00:00 19440
5 P (12 h intervals) 2007-03-23 12:00:00 3240
6 P (3 d intervals) 2006-04-20 00:00:00 540
7 P (12 d intervals) 2002-12-16 00:00:00 135
8 T (10 s intervals) 2007-05-30 08:26:50 13996800
9 T (90 s intervals) 2007-05-30 05:25:30 1555200
10 T (12 min intervals) 2007-05-29 05:48:00 194400
11 T (2 h intervals) 2007-05-19 02:00:00 19440
12 T (12 h intervals) 2007-03-23 12:00:00 3240
13 T (3 d intervals) 2006-04-20 00:00:00 540
14 T (12 d intervals) 2002-12-16 00:00:00 135

Example (without data logger module):


>dir
File description Oldest data available No. of points
1 P (10 s intervals) 2008-04-11 23:41:10 135
2 P (90 s intervals) 2008-04-11 20:41:11 135
3 P (12 min intervals) 2008-04-10 21:03:41 135
4 P (2 h intervals) 2008-03-31 18:03:41 135
5 P (12 h intervals) 2008-02-04 12:03:41 135
6 P (3 d intervals) 2007-03-04 00:03:41 135
7 T (10 s intervals) 2008-04-11 23:41:11 135
8 T (90 s intervals) 2008-04-11 20:41:11 135
9 T (12 min intervals) 2008-04-10 21:03:41 135
10 T (2 h intervals) 2008-03-31 18:03:41 135
11 T (12 h intervals) 2008-02-04 12:03:41 135
12 T (3 d intervals) 2007-03-04 00:03:41 135
>

124 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

PLAY
Use the PLAY command to output the selected file to the serial line. If
the data logger module is installed, you can specify an interval to be
outputted.

Data in the output is <TAB> delimited. This is compatible with most


spreadsheet programs. Before giving the command, set the local date and
time with TIME and DATE commands, if needed.

PLAY [x] [start_date start_time end_date end_time]<cr>

where
x = Number of the data file that will be outputted, range 0 ... 21.
The numbers correspond to the output of the DIR command;
refer to the example on page 124.
Selecting number 0 will output all data files.
start_date = Starting date of the interval to be outputted. Must be given in
the following format: yyyy-mm-dd.
start_time = Starting time of the interval to be outputted. Must be given in
the format hh:mm:ss or h:mm.
end_date = Ending date of the interval to be outputted. Must be given in
the following format: yyyy-mm-dd.
end_time = Ending time of the interval to be outputted. Must be given in
the format hh:mm:ss or h:mm.

Example:
>play 3 2007-05-05 00:00:00 2007-05-06 00:00:00
RH (12 min intervals) 2007-05-05 00:00:00 121
Date Time trend min max
yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss %RH %RH %RH
2007-05-05 00:00:00 19.16 18.99 19.33
2007-05-05 00:12:00 19.30 19.09 19.55
2007-05-05 00:24:00 20.01 19.28 21.17
2007-05-05 00:36:00 21.21 20.98 21.44
2007-05-05 00:48:00 19.57 17.72 21.11
2007-05-05 01:00:00 19.09 18.62 19.84
...

You can use the <ESC> key to interrupt the output listing.

NOTE Output of large amounts of recorded data can result in huge data files and
take a long time, up to several days for the entire memory of the data
logger at 10 second resolution. To make it easier to process the data it is
recommended to select the largest suitable data interval, and to specify
the start and end times carefully.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 125


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Deleting the Recorded Files


You can delete the recorded data files using the keypad/display, or the
DELETE command on the serial line. The deletion is always done for all
data; you cannot delete individual files.

Note that the transmitter automatically overwrites the old data when the
memory is full, so manual deletion of the recorded files is not necessary
in normal use.

To delete the data files using the keypad/display:

1. Press any of the arrow buttons to open the Main Menu.


2. Select System and press the right arrow button.
3. Select Clear graph memories by using the down arrow button.
Press the CLEAR key. Confirm by pressing the YES key.

CAUTION This function clears the entire data history of the transmitter, including
all graphs and the content of the optional data logger module.

UNDELETE
Similarly to the DELETE command, the UNDELETE command is used
without any arguments. It will recover all deleted data that has not been
overwritten yet.

126 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Analog Output Settings


The analog outputs are set in the factory according to the order form. In
case you want to change the settings, follow these instructions. See
section Third Analog Output on page 53.

Changing Output Mode and Range


Both output channels have their own DIP switch module with 8 switches,
see the position in Figure 2 on page 25 (DIP switches for analog output
settings.)

1. Select the current/voltage output, switch ON either of the switches,


1 or 2.
2. Select the range, switch ON one of the switches from 3 to 7.

0503-045

Figure 59 Current/Voltage Switches of Output Modules

The following numbers refer to Figure 59 above:


1 = Current/voltage selection output switches (from 1 to 2)
2 = Current/voltage range selection switches (from 3 to 7) in analog
output 1 and 2
3 = Switches for service use only. Keep in OFF position always.

NOTE Only set one mode and one range switch to ON for one output channel.
The rest of the switches must remain OFF.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 127


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Example: 0 ... 5 V voltage output selected for channel 1 and 4...20 mA


selected for channel 2.

OFF ON Selection

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Voltage output selected



0 ... 5 V selected

Current output selected


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8



4 ... 20 mA selected



NOTE If you have customized the error output setting (AERR), check that the
set error values are still valid after changing the output mode/range. See
section Analog Output Fault Indication Setting on page 131.

Analog Output Quantities


NOTE For best accuracy, pressure must always be output using Ch3, if
available.

Use the display/keypad to change and scale the analog output quantities.

1. Press any of the arrow buttons to open the Main Menu.


2. Select Interfaces and press the right arrow button.
3. Select Analog outputs and press the right arrow button.
4. Select Output 1/2/3 and press the right arrow button.
5. Select Quantity and press the CHANGE key.
6. Select the quantity by using the up/down arrow buttons. Press the
SELECT key to confirm your selection.
7. Select Scale, lower limit, by pressing the up/down arrow buttons.
Press the SET key. Adjust the lower limit value by pressing the
arrow buttons up/down/left/right. Press the OK key to confirm your
setting.

128 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

8. Select Scale, upper limit by pressing the up/down arrow buttons.


Press the SET key. Adjust the upper limit value by pressing the
arrow buttons up/down/left/right. Press the OK key to confirm your
setting.
9. Press the EXIT key to return to the basic display.

AMODE/ASEL
Use the serial line to select and scale the analog output quantities. Check
the analog output modes with the AMODE command.

AMODE<cr>

Example:
>amode
Ch1 output : 0...1V
Ch2 output : 0...1V
>

Select and scale the quantities for the analog outputs with the command
ASEL. Note that the optional quantities can be selected only if they have
been selected when ordering the device.

ASEL [xxx yyy zzz]<cr>

where
xxx = Quantity of channel 1
yyy = Quantity of channel 2
zzz = Quantity of the optional analog output channel 3

Always enter the quantities for all outputs. For quantities and their
abbreviations see Table 4, Table 5 and Table 6 on page 22.

Use the ASEL [xxx yyy] command as shown in the example below when
using a device with two analog outputs.

Example:
>asel rh t p
Ch1 RH low : 0.00 %RH ?
Ch1 RH high : 100.00 %RH ?
Ch2 T low : -40.00 'C ?
Ch2 T high : 60.00 'C ?
Ch3 P low : 500.00 hPa ?
Ch3 P high : 1100.00 hPa ?
>

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 129


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Analog Output Tests


Use the display/keypad to test the operation of the analog outputs by
forcing the outputs to known values. Measure then the outputs with a
current/voltage meter.

1. Press any of the arrow buttons to open the Main Menu.


2. Select System and press the right arrow button.
3. Select Diagnostics and press the right arrow button.
4. Select Analog output tests and press the right arrow button.
5. Select one of the testing options Force 0%/50%/100% of scale.
Press the TEST key. All outputs are tested simultaneously. The
actual output value depends on the selected range.
6. Press the OK key to stop testing. Then press the EXIT key to
return to the basic display.

ITEST
Use the serial line to test the operation of the analog outputs. Use the
ITEST command to force the analog outputs to entered values. The set
values remain valid until you enter the command ITEST without
parameters or RESET the transmitter.

ITEST [aa.aaa bb.bbb cc.ccc]<cr>

where
aa.aaa = Current or voltage value to be set for channel 1 (mA or V)
bb.bbb = Current or voltage value to be set for channel 2 (mA or V)
cc.ccc = Current or voltage value to be set for channel 3 (optional)
(mA or V)

Example:
>itest 20 5
Ch1 (Td ) : * 20.000 mA H'672A
Ch2 (T ) : * 5.000 mA H'34F9
>itest
Ch1 (Td ) : -23.204 'C 16.238 mA H'FFFE
Ch2 (T ) : 22.889 'C 8.573 mA H'5950
>

130 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Analog Output Fault Indication Setting


Factory default state for analog outputs during error condition is
0 V/ 0 mA. Please be careful when selecting the new error value. The
error state of the transmitter should not cause unexpected problems in
process monitoring.

Use the display/keypad to set the analog output fault indication.

1. Press any of the arrow buttons to open the Main Menu.


2. Select Interfaces and press the right arrow button.
3. Select Analog Outputs and press the right arrow button.
4. Select Output 1/2/3 and press the right arrow button.
5. Select Fault indication. Press the SET key. Enter the fault
indication value by using the arrow buttons. Press the OK key to
confirm your setting. This value is outputted if a transmitter error
occurs.
6. Press the EXIT key to return to the basic display.

AERR
Use the serial line AERR command to change the error output.

AERR<cr>

Example:
>aerr
Ch1 error out : 0.000V ? 5.0
Ch2 error out : 0.000V ? 5.0
>

NOTE The error output value must be within a valid range of the output mode.

NOTE The error output value is displayed only when there are minor electrical
faults such as a humidity sensor damage. When there is a severe device
malfunction, the error output value is not necessarily outputted.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 131


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Extend Analog Output Range


Use the AOVER command to allow the analog output channels to
exceed their specified range by 10%. The scaling of the parameter
remains as before; the extra range is used for additional measurement
range in the high end of the scale.

AOVER [ON/OFF]<cr>

Example:
>aover on
Extended output: ON
>

The following example illustrates how the analog output is affected.


Channel 1 outputs RH with voltage output 0 5 V (0 100 %RH).
After giving the AOVER ON command, the range is 0 5.5 V
(0 110 %RH). Note that the 100 %RH point is still at 5 V.

Operation of Relays
Quantity for Relay Output
A relay monitors the quantity chosen for the relay output. Any of the
quantities available can be chosen.

Measurement-Based Relay Output


Modes
Relay Setpoints
When the measured value is in between the "above" and "below" values,
the relay is passive. When choosing lower value as "above" value and
higher value as "below" value, the relay is passive when the measured
value is not between the setpoints. You can also set only one setpoint.

See Figure 60 on page 133 for illustrative examples of the different


measurement-based relay output modes.

132 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

1102-007

Figure 60 Relay Output Modes

Mode 4 is usually used if an alarm needs to be triggered when the


measured value exceeds a safe range. The relay is active when
measurement is in range, and is released if the value goes out of range or
the measurement fails.

NOTE If the measurement of the selected quantity fails or the transmitter loses
its power, the relay is released.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 133


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Hysteresis
Hysteresis function is to prevent the relay switching back and forth when
the measured value is near to the setpoint values.

Relay is activated when the measured value passes the exact value of the
setpoint. When returning and passing the setpoint again relay is not
released before the value reaches the setpoint increased/decreased by the
hysteresis value.

Hysteresis should be smaller than difference of the setpoints.

Example:

When the 'active above' value is 60 %RH and the hysteresis value is 5
%RH, relay activates when the relative humidity reaches 60 %RH. As the
humidity decreases, relay releases at 55 %RH.

NOTE If both setpoints are specified and "above" setpoint is lower than
"below" setpoint, the hysteresis works in the opposite direction, that is,
relay is released when the measured value passes the exact value of the
setpoint.

Relay Indicating Transmitter Error Status


You can set a relay to follow the operation status of the device. By
selecting FAULT/ONLINE STATUS for output quantity a relay changes
state on the basis of the operation status as follows:

FAULT STATUS

Normal operation: relay active (C and NO outputs are closed)

Not measuring state (error state or power off): relay released (C and NC
outputs are closed)

ONLINE STATUS
Live measurement (data available): relay active (C and NO outputs are
closed)

No live data (for example: error state, chemical purge or adjustment


mode): relay released (C and NC outputs are closed)

See Figure 61 on page 135 for illustrative examples of the


FAULT/ONLINE STATUSrelay output modes.

134 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

1102-040

Figure 61 FAULT/ONLINE STATUS Relay Output Modes

FAULT/ONLINE STATUS relays are usually used in conjunction with


an analog output to obtain validity information for the output value.

NOTE If transmitter loses its power, all status-based relays are released
similarly to the case of an instrument failure.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 135


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Table 34 Relay State Examples


Criterion for Transmitter NC-C NO-C
Relay Activation Operation Status Connected Connected
Not chosen

Power off

Measured RH
above 50 %
RH below 50 %*
Measured RH
below 50 %
Measured RH
above 50 %
RH above 50 %*
Measured RH
below 50 %
Measurement OK
Fault status
Error active

Measurement live
Online status Purge or sensor
heating active
* Hysteresis has an effect when relay switching is based on live measurement.
See section Hysteresis on page 134.

136 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Enabling/Disabling Relays
You can deactivate the relay outputs for example for service purposes of
your system.

Setting Relay Outputs


NOTE When you have only one relay module installed, its relays are called
relay 1 and relay 2.
When you have two relay modules, the relays of the module connected
to slot MODULE 1 are called relay 1 and relay 2 and relays
connected to slot MODULE 2 are called relay 3 and relay 4.

0706-055

Figure 62 Relay Indicators on Display


Number refers to Figure 62 above:
1 = Lists enabled relays. Activation state shown in black. Disabled
relays are not shown.

Use the display/keypad to set the relay outputs.


1. Press any of the arrow buttons to open the Main Menu.
2. Select Interfaces and press the right arrow button.
3. Select Relay outputs and press the right arrow button.
4. Select Relay 1/2/3/4, press the right arrow button.
5. Select Quantity, press the CHANGE button. Select quantity by
using the up/down arrow buttons. Confirm your selection by
pressing the SELECT button.
6. Select Act. above/Act. below. Press the SET button. You may be
asked, whether you want to modify the value or remove the
setpoint. In this case, select MODIFY to adjust the value or
REMOVE to clear the setpoint. Adjust numeric values by pressing
the up/down/left/right arrow buttons. Confirm your selection by
pressing the OK button.
7. Select Hysteresis. Press the SET key and adjust the value. Finally
press the OK button.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 137


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

8. Select Relay enable. Press the ON/OFF key to enable/disable the


relay.

RSEL
Use the serial line to select the quantity, setpoints and hysteresis or
enable/disable the relay outputs. Enter the RSEL command.

RSEL [q1 q2]<cr>

where
q1 = Quantity for the relay 1 or Fault/Online
q2 = Quantity for the relay 2 or Fault/Online

Factory setting: All relays disabled.

Use the quantity abbreviations presented above. For quantities and their
abbreviations and pressure units, see Table 4, Table 5, and Table 6 on
page 22.

Example of window limit switch:

Selecting relay 1 to follow relative humidity measurement and relay 2 to


follow temperature measurement. Two relay setpoints are set for both
relays.
>rsel rh t
Rel1 RH above: 0.00 %RH ? 30
Rel1 RH below: 0.00 %RH ? 40
Rel1 RH hyst : 0.00 %RH ? 2
Rel1 RH enabl: OFF ? ON
Rel2 T above: 0.00 'C ? 30
Rel2 T below: 0.00 'C ? 40
Rel2 T hyst : 0.00 'C ? 3
Rel2 T enabl: OFF ? ON
>

138 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Example of normal limit switch:

Selecting relay 1 to follow relative humidity, relay 2 to follow


temperature, relay 3 to follow dewpoint, and relay 4 to follow dewpoint.
One setpoint is chosen for all the outputs.
>rsel rh t td td
Rel1 RH above: 60.00 %RH ? 70
Rel1 RH below: 70.00 %RH ? -
Rel1 RH hyst : 2.00 %RH ? 2
Rel1 RH enabl: ON ? on
Rel2 T above: 50.00 'C ? 60
Rel2 T below: 40.00 'C ? -
Rel2 T hyst : 2.00 'C ? 2
Rel2 T enabl: ON ? on
Rel3 Td above: 5.00 'C ? 10
Rel3 Td below: 0.00 'C ? -
Rel3 Td hyst : 1.00 'C ? 1
Rel3 Td enabl: OFF ? on
Rel4 Td above: 0.00 'C ? 20
Rel4 Td below: 0.00 'C ? -
Rel4 Td hyst : 0.00 'C ? 2
Rel4 Td enabl: OFF ? on
>

Example of using relay 1 as fault alarm: selecting relay 1 to follow the


fault status and relay 2 to follow the temperature measurement.
>rsel fault t
Rel1 FAUL above: -
Rel1 FAUL below: -
Rel1 FAUL hyst : -
Rel1 FAUL enabl: ON ?
Rel2 T above: 0.00 'C ? 30
Rel2 T below: 0.00 'C ? -
Rel2 T hyst : 0.00 'C ? 2
Rel2 T enabl: OFF ? ON
>

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 139


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Testing Operation Of Relays


Testing activates relays even if they are disabled.

Use the module push buttons to activate the relays. Press the REL 1 or
REL 2 key to activate the corresponding relay.

Relay is activated: led is lit


Relay is not activated: led is not lit

Use the display/keypad to test the operation of relays.

1. Open the Main Menu by pressing any of the arrow buttons.


2. Select System, press the right arrow button.
3. Select Diagnostics, press the right arrow button.
4. Select Relay tests, press the right arrow button.
5. Select Invert relay 1... , press the TEST key. Now the selected
relay output is forced to opposite state. Press the OK key to return
to normal operation.
6. Press the EXIT key to return to the basic display.

RTEST
Use the serial line command RTEST to test the operation of the relays.

RTEST [x1 x2 x3 x4]<cr>

where
x = ON/OFF

Example: Activate and then release all four relays.


>rtest on on on on
ON ON ON ON
>
>rtest off off off off
OFF OFF OFF OFF
>

Enter the command RTEST without parameters to stop testing.

140 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Sensor Functions
Chemical Purge (Optional)
In some specific applications the sensor gain may decrease gradually due
to an interference caused by a particular chemical present in the
measured gas, for example. The decrease of sensor gain due to an
interfering chemical and the effect of the chemical purge process are
illustrated below, see Figure 63 on page 141. The sensor polymer absorbs
the interfering chemical, and this reduces the ability of the polymer to
absorb water molecules. Consequently, the sensor gain decreases. In
chemical purge, heating the humidity sensor to a temperature level of
approximately +160 C for several minutes evaporates the interfering
chemical.
The purge function starts with heating stage, continues with settling and
when the temperature of the sensor is decreased the transmitter returns to
normal mode. The whole cycle takes about 6 minutes.

NOTE Chemical purge function locks the output values for about 6 minutes.

0508-035

Figure 63 Decrease of Sensor Gain

Before starting the chemical purge, note the following:

- the sensor is protected with a PPS grid with stainless steel netting, a
stainless steel sintered filter or with membrane SST filter

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 141


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

- the sensor temperature must be below 100 C. At higher temperatures


the chemicals evaporate spontaneously from the sensor and the
chemical purge is not necessary.

Automatic Chemical Purge (Interval Purge)


When PTU300 leaves the factory the automatic chemical purge (if
chosen) takes place repeatedly with the time intervals set in the factory.
User can change the interval in which the purge takes place by using
serial commands or with the optional display/keypad. This can be needed
if the measuring environment contains high concentrations of interfering
chemicals. The automatic chemical purge can also be turned off if
necessary.

Manual Chemical Purge


The chemical purge should be performed always before calibration (see
section Calibration and adjustment on page 161) or when there is a
reason to believe that a sensor has become exposed to an interfering
chemical. Make sure that the temperature of the sensor has come down to
normal temperature before starting a calibration.

Chemical Purge in Power Up


Chemical purge (start-up purge) can be set to start within 10 seconds
from the power-up of the device.

Starting and Configuring Chemical Purge


Using Buttons On Motherboard
Start manual chemical purge by pressing simultaneously two PURGE
buttons on the motherboard inside the transmitter for a few seconds.
Indicator LED flashes until purge is complete (up to 6 minutes).

0508-011

Figure 64 Purge Buttons on Motherboard

142 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Using Display/Keypad (Optional)


Set the automatic and manual chemical purge by using the
display/keypad.

1. Open the Main Menu by pressing any of the arrow buttons.


2. Select Measuring, press the right arrow button.
3. Select Chemical purge, press the right arrow button.

1102-016

Figure 65 Chemical Purge Settings

- Start the chemical purge manually by selecting Start purge now


and pressing START.
- Select Purge on power-up by using the arrow buttons. Press
On/Off to turn the start-up purge on/off.
- Select Automatic purge and turn it on or off by pressing the
ON/OFF key.
- Select Interval and press the SET key. Set the purge interval
and the unit (hour/day) by using the arrow buttons. The interval
must be set between 1 hour...10 days. Press the OK key.
- If you have the data logger module installed, you can also
specify the Date and Time when the purge is performed next.
4. Press the EXIT key to return to the basic display.

0706-004

Figure 66 Performing Chemical Purge

Using Serial Line


PURGE
Use the PURGE command to start chemical purge immediately.
>purge
Purge started, press any key to abort.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 143


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

The prompt '>' appears when the heating period is over. However, the
transmitter outputs are locked to the values measured before performing
chemical purge until the settling time is over.

PUR
With PUR command you can enable or disable automatic and power-up
chemical purge and set the interval for automatic purge. If the sensor is
exposed to chemicals it is recommended to have the chemical purge done
at least once in 720 min (=12 hours). In applications where the chemical
exposure is not likely, the interval can be longer.

If the transmitter has a data logger module installed, you can also set the
starting date and time for the interval purge. After the set time has been
reached, the interval purge will be performed at the set interval. This
functionality can be used to make sure the chemical purge starts at a
specific time of the day.

Do not change the settings for duration, settling, temperature or


temperature difference unless instructed by Vaisala personnel.

Type PUR and press ENTER to proceed. Skip unchanged values by


pressing ENTER. Input changed values in the format shown by the
current value (for example, date and time). The maximum interval is
14400 minutes (=10 days).

Example (no data logger module installed):


>pur
Interval Purge : OFF ?
Interval : 600 min ?
Power-up Purge : OFF ?
Duration : 60 s ?
Settling : 240 s ?
Temperature : 180 'C ?
Temp. diff. : 0.5 'C ?
>

Example (with data logger module installed):


>pur
Interval Purge : OFF ?
Interval : 600 min ?
Next Purge date: 2011-02-09 ?
Next Purge time: 12:00:00 ?
Power-up Purge : OFF ?
Duration : 60 s ?
Settling : 240 s ?
Temperature : 180 'C ?
Temp. diff. : 0.5 'C ?
>

144 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

NOTE To activate the new interval settings immediately, reset the transmitter.

NOTE When chemical purge in power-up is enabled, wait about 6 min after
power-up before taking measurements. The output channels are locked
for the first operation minutes to the initial measured values

RGLIMIT
Use the RGLIMIT command to prevent the chemical purge in subzero
temperatures.

RGLIMIT [ON/OFF]<cr>

where
ON = Chemical purge disabled in < 0 C temperatures.
OFF = Chemical purge allowed in < 0 C temperatures.

Example (turn on the limiter and prevent purge in subzero temperatures):


>rglimit on
No purge if <0'C: ON
>

Setting Sensor Heating


This function is optionally available only in transmitters with
HUMICAP180 C sensor. It should be used only with the warmed probe.

The sensor heating is recommended for the high humidity environments


where even small temperature differences can cause water to condense
on the sensor. The sensor heating speeds up the recovery of the humidity
sensor from condensation.

Sensor heating starts-up when the relative humidity of the measuring


environment reaches the RH-value set by a user (RH-limit). The user can
define the RH-sensor heating temperature as well as the duration of the
heating.

After the heating cycle the humidity conditions are checked and new
sensor heating is performed if the predefined conditions are reached
again.

NOTE During the sensor heating the outputs are locked to the values measured
before the heating cycle.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 145


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Setting Humidity Sensor Heating using


Display/Keypad
When the PTU300 leaves the factory the sensor heating follows the
factory default values. You can enable/disable the function, change the
RH-limit and define the heating temperature and duration of this
function.

1. Open the Main Menu by pressing any of the arrow buttons.


2. Select Measuring, press the right arrow button.
3. Select Sensor heating, press the ON key.

Using Serial Line


XHEAT
Enables/disables the sensor heating.

XHEAT [xx]

where:
xx = ON / OFF

Example:
>xheat on
Extra heat : ON
>xheat off
Extra heat : OFF
>

To configure the sensor heating use the XHEAT command without


parameters. Enter the values after question mark. The available ranges
include the following:

Extra heat RH -limit (heating function 0...100 %RH (default: 95 %RH)


starts-up above the setpoint)
Extra heating temperature 0...200 C (default: 100 C)
Extra heating time 0...255 s (default: 30 s)

Example:
>xheat
Extra heat : OFF
Extra heat RH : 95 ? 90
Extra heat temp: 100 ? 85
Extra heat time: 30 ? 10
>xheat on
Extra heat : ON
>

146 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 5 ___________________________________________________________________ Modbus

CHAPTER 5
MODBUS

This chapter contains information that is needed when operating the


transmitter using the Modbus protocol.

Overview of Modbus Protocol Support


The PTU300 transmitter can be accessed using the Modbus serial
communication protocol. Support for Modbus protocol is available on all
PTU300 transmitters as a standard feature from software version 5.10
onward. The supported Modbus variants and the connections they use are
listed in Table 35 below.

Table 35 Supported Modbus Variants


Supported Modbus Variant Connections
Modbus RTU (Serial Modbus) RS-232 (standard User Port)
RS-422/485 interface (optional module)
Modbus TCP (Ethernet Modbus) LAN interface (optional module)
WLAN interface (optional module)

The supported Modbus functions, registers, configuration options, and


diagnostics are described in Appendix C, Modbus Reference, on page
207.

Note the following limitations of the Modbus implementation:

- Modbus TCP mode accepts only one TCP connection at a time.


Design the system so that only one Modbus TCP client accesses the
transmitter.
- Modbus TCP can process reliably only one Modbus transaction at a
time. Reduce the polling rate of the client to avoid nested transactions.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 147


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Taking Modbus into Use


To take the Modbus protocol into use on the PTU300, you must perform
some configuration tasks using the built-in display and keypad (optional)
or a PC connected to the serial line. For example, you can connect to the
service port using the USB service cable (Vaisala order code: 219685).
The transmitter must be powered from a suitable power supply during
configuration.

Instructions for performing the configuration are provided in the


following sections:

- Enabling Serial Modbus on page 149


- Enabling Ethernet Modbus on page 150

After configuring the transmitter, perform the transmitter installation and


wiring according to the instructions in Chapter 3, Installation, on page
29.

The configuration instructions assume you are familiar with the use of
the transmitter. Additional details on the display/keypad, service port use,
and serial commands are available in other sections of this manual:

- The use of the display/keypad option is described in section


Display/Keypad (Optional) on page 66.
- If this is the first time you are using the USB service cable, you can
find detailed instructions in section Service Port Connection on page
82. You must install the required driver before using the service cable.
- Configuration of the LAN and WLAN interfaces is decribed in section
LAN Communication on page 84.
- The serial commands available through the service port are described
beginning from section List of Serial Commands on page 94.

148 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 5 ___________________________________________________________________ Modbus

Enabling Serial Modbus


In addition to enabling the Modbus protocol in the device, Modbus over
RS-232 or RS-485 needs the following software settings: serial bit rate,
parity, number of stop bits, and Modbus device address.

Using Display/Keypad (Optional)


1. Open the Main Menu by pressing any of the arrow
buttons.
2. Navigate to Interfaces Serial Interface.
3. On the Serial Interface settings screen:
- Enable the Modbus protocol.
- Change the baud rate and parity if necessary.
- Set the Modbus device address.

1101-033

Figure 67 Serial Interface Settings

4. After changing the settings, press the EXIT button. Modbus


configuration is now complete, as configuration changes made with
the display and keypad are effective immediately.

Using Serial Line


1. Open the transmitter cover.
2. Connect power supply wiring (if not using the power supply
module) and power up the transmitter.
3. Connect the USB service cable between a computer and the service
port of the transmitter.
4. Start the Vaisala USB Instrument Finder program (which has been
installed on the computer along with the USB service cable driver),
and check the COM port that the cable is using.
5. Open a terminal program, and connect to the service port. The
fixed serial line settings of the service port are 19200, 8, 1, N.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 149


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

6. Use the SMODE command to enable the Modbus mode:

>smode modbus
Serial mode : MODBUS
>
7. If necessary, use the SERI command to check and/or change the
serial interface settings for the User Port. For example, to set the
User Port serial settings to 19200 N 8 1, issue the following
command:

>seri 19200 N 8 1

NOTE The number of data bits must always be 8 for Modbus RTU.
Serial Modbus interface of the PTU300 does not work with baud rates
115, 150, and 300 b/s.

8. Use the ADDR command to set the Modbus address of the


transmitter. For example, to set the Modbus address to 52, issue the
following command:

>addr 52

You must set a non-zero address or Modbus RTU will not work.
9. Modbus configuration is now complete. Reset or power cycle the
transmitter to enable the Modbus mode, and proceed with the
installation of the transmitter and the wiring of the serial interface.

Enabling Ethernet Modbus


In addition to enabling the Modbus protocol in the device, Modbus TCP
needs the following software settings: IP address, subnet mask, and
default gateway address. Also network name (SSID) and security settings
must be configured if wireless network is used.

Using Display/Keypad (Optional)


1. Open the Main Menu by pressing any of the arrow
buttons.
2. Navigate to Interfaces Network Settings IP Configuration.
3. On the IP Configuration screen, set the network configuration
settings, and exit to save the changes.

150 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 5 ___________________________________________________________________ Modbus

1101-034

Figure 68 IP Configuration

4. Navigate back to the Network Settings menu. If you are using the
WLAN interface, select Wireless LAN Settings.
5. On the Wireless LAN Settings screen, set the network name
(SSID) and security options, and exit to save the changes.

1101-036

Figure 69 Wireless LAN Settings

6. Navigate back to the Network Settings menu. Select


Communication Protocol.
7. On the Communication Protocol screen, enable the Modbus
protocol. Press the EXIT button to save the changes.

Note that the device address setting is not relevant for Modbus
TCP. In the Modbus mode, the transmitter will respond to all valid
Modbus messages with any unit identifier value.

1101-034

Figure 70 Communication Protocol

8. Modbus configuration is now complete, as configuration changes


made with the display and keypad are effective immediately.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 151


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Using Serial Line


1. Open the transmitter cover.
2. Connect power supply wiring (if not using the power supply
module) and power up the transmitter.
3. Connect the USB service cable between a computer and the service
port of the transmitter.
4. Start the Vaisala USB Instrument Finder program (which has been
installed on the computer along with the USB service cable driver),
and check the COM port that the cable is using.
5. Open a terminal program, and connect to the service port. The
fixed serial line settings of the service port are 19200, 8, 1, N.
6. Use the SMODE command to enable the Modbus mode:

>smode modbus
serial mode : MODBUS
>
7. Configure the networking parameters of the interface you are
using:

NOTE After transmitter startup, it may take a few minutes for the network
interface to become available for configuration.

a. Use the NET command to configure the networking


parameters of both LAN and WLAN interface. You can, for
example, enter the command without parameters and enter
the settings as prompted:

>net
DHCP : ON ? OFF
IP address : 0.0.0.0 ? 143.154.142.102
Subnet mask : 0.0.0.0 ? 255.255.0.0
Default gateway: 0.0.0.0 ?
Web config. : ON ? OFF
Save changes (Y/N) ? y
OK
>
b. If you are using the WLAN interface, use the WLAN
command to configure the network name (SSID) and security
settings. For example:

>wlan
Network SSID : NAME ? NETWORKID
Type : OPEN ? WPA-PSK/TKIP
WPA-PSK phrase ? thequickbrownfox
Save changes (Y/N) ? y
OK
>

152 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 5 ___________________________________________________________________ Modbus

For a description of the available settings, see section


Wireless LAN Configuration on page 87.

8. Modbus configuration is now complete. Reset or power cycle the


transmitter to enable the Modbus mode, and proceed with the
installation of the transmitter.

Diagnostic Modbus Counters


PTU300 has diagnostic counters that can be used to pinpoint Modbus
problems. The counters are always active when the Modbus protocol is
enabled.

Viewing Counters using Display/Keypad


You can use the display/keypad option to view and clear the counters.
Enter the Main Menu and navigate to System Diagnostics
MODBUS Counters.

1101-037

Figure 71 Modbus Counters

Viewing Counters using Service Port


Use the MODBUS command to view the counters:

MODBUS<cr>

Example:
>modbus
Bus messages : 0
Bus comm. error: 0
Bus exceptions : 0
Slave messages : 0
Slave no resp. : 0
Last message :
>

In addition to the diagnostic counters, the last message (received or


transmitted) is shown in hexadecimal format. If the last message was a
broadcast message, the suppressed response message is shown.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 153


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

The last message displayed may be incomplete if there is active Modbus


traffic while using the MODBUS command.

Modbus RTU only: If the last received message was rejected because of
bad CRC checksum, the MODBUS command displays the message with
corrected CRC (last two bytes updated).

To clear the counters, select again the Modbus mode with the SMODE
command:
>smode modbus

Disabling Modbus
If you stop using Modbus with the transmitter, set the transmitter to some
other operating mode using the display/keypad option or the SMODE
command.

For example, to return the transmitter to the RUN mode where the
measurements are output at regular intervals, issue the following
command through the service port:
>smode run

Alternatively, you can enter the Main Menu using the display/keypad
option, and change the mode from the Interfaces submenu.

The other communication settings of the output interface (User Port,


LAN interface, or WLAN interface) will remain as configured, but the
Modbus protocol will be disabled.

154 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 6 _______________________________________________________________ Maintenance

CHAPTER 6
MAINTENANCE

This chapter contains information that is needed in basic maintenance of


the product

Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning
Clean the transmitter enclosure with a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with
mild detergent.

Changing the Probe Filter


1. Turn the filter counter-clockwise to loosen it.
2. Remove the filter from the probe. Be careful not to touch the sensor
with the filter. Without the filter in place, the sensor is easily
damaged handle the probe carefully.
3. Install a new filter on the probe. When using the stainless steel
filter, take care to tighten the filter properly (recommended force
5 Nm).
New filters can be ordered from Vaisala, see section Spare Parts and
Accessories on page 189.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 155


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Changing the Sensor


NOTE When replacing the sensor, the new sensor must be of the same type as
the old sensor (for example, HUMICAP180R). The sensor type can only
be changed at a Vaisala Service Center. Information on Vaisala sensors
is available online at www.vaisala.com/sensorinfo.

Changing HUMICAP180 and HUMICAP180R humidity sensors is


simple. If the transmitter has the chemical purge and/or warmed probe
option which utilize the HUMICAP180C or HUMICAP180RC sensor,
the change is more difficult as soldering is required to attach the pins of
the integrated temperature sensor element. Vaisala recommends that you
leave the replacement of HUMICAP180C and HUMICAP180RC sensors
to Vaisala Service Centers, but spare parts are available if you want do it
yourself. Soldering instructions are not provided.

Changing the sensor should be considered corrective maintenance, and it


is not necessary in normal operation. If the accuracy of the transmitter
does not seem to be within specification, it is more likely that the
transmitter is in need of calibration and adjustment, and not sensor
replacement. Refer to chapter Calibration and adjustment on page 161.

To replace the HUMICAP180 or HUMICAP180R sensor:


1. Remove the filter from the probe. See the instructions in section
Changing the Probe Filter on page 155.
2. Remove the damaged sensor and insert a new one. Handle the new
sensor by the plastic socket. DO NOT TOUCH THE SENSOR
PLATE.
3. Perform a calibration and adjustment as instructed in section
Relative Humidity Adjustment After Sensor Change on page 174.
4. Install a new filter on the probe. When using the stainless steel
filter, take care to tighten the filter properly (recommended force
5 Nm).

1 = Pull out the sensor


2 = Plastic socket
0508-079

Figure 72 Changing the Sensor

156 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 6 _______________________________________________________________ Maintenance

Error States
In error state the affected quantities are not measured and the output is
shown as follows:

- Analog channel outputs 0 mA or 0 V (you can use the serial line


command AERR or display/keypad to change this fault indication
value, see section Analog Output Fault Indication Setting on page
131.)
- Serial port outputs stars "***" instead of measurement data.
- Display shows "----" instead of measurement data.
- Cover LED is blinking.
- Error indicator is shown on the display.

1103-068

Figure 73 Error Indicator and Error Message

Number refers to Figure 73 above:


1 = Error indicator

The error indicator disappears when the error state is over and you have
checked the error message. Press the INFO button to display the error
message.

You can also check the error message via the serial interface by using the
command ERRS. In case of constant error, please contact Vaisala, see
section Technical Support on page 159.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 157


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Table 36 Error Messages


Error Code Error Message Action
E0 Humidity sensor measurement Check the integrity of the humidity probe
malfunction. and the probe cable. Clean the probe from
E1 Humidity sensor short circuit dirt, water, ice or other contaminants.
E2 Humidity sensor open circuit Check the integrity of the humidity probe
E3 Temperature sensor open circuit. and the probe cable.
E4 Temperature sensor short circuit. Check the integrity of the humidity probe
E5 Temperature measurement and the probe cable. Clean the probe from
malfunction dirt water, ice or other contaminants.
E6 Temperature sensor current leak. Check the integrity of the humidity probe
and the probe cables. Clean the probes
from dirt, water, ice or other contaminants.
E7 Internal ADC read error Internal transmitter failure. Remove the
transmitter and return the faulty unit to
Vaisala Service.
E8 Additional temperature sensor Check the integrity of the temperature
short circuit probe and the probe cable. Clean the
probe cable from dirt, water, ice or other
contaminants.
E9 Checksum error in the internal Internal transmitter failure. Remove the
configuration memory transmitter and return the faulty unit to
E10 Internal EEPROM read error Vaisala Service.
E11 Internal EEPROM write error
E12 E13 Add-on module 1 (or 2) Turn off the power and check the module
connection failure connection. Turn on the power.
E14 Device internal temperature out of Ensure that the operating temperature is
range within the valid range.
E15 Internal RAM memory or software Internal transmitter failure. Remove the
checksum error transmitter and return the faulty unit to
Vaisala Service.
E16 E17 Pressure measurement failure in Disconnect power and check pressure
add-on module slot 1or 2 module connection.
E18 Internal ADC reference voltage Internal transmitter failure. Remove the
out of range transmitter and return the faulty unit to
E19 Internal analog output reference Vaisala Service.
voltage out of range
E20 E22 Configuration switches for analog Check and re-set the switches, see page
output 1/2/3 set incorrectly 55.
E24 E25 Internal error in add-on module Disconnect the power and check the
1 (or 2) module connection.
E26 Communication module installed Disconnect the power and change the
in incorrect add-on module slot communication module to another module
slot.
E27 Pressure out of valid range Check that assumed pressure is within
measurement range for the transmitter.
E28 E29 Unknown/incompatible module Ensure that the module is compatible with
installed in add-on module slot 1 the PTU300.
(or 2)
E30 Internal analog voltage out of Internal transmitter failure. Remove the
range transmitter and return the faulty unit to
Vaisala Service.
E31 Internal system voltage out of Check that the supply voltage is correct
range and the power supply can provide enough
power for the instrument.

158 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 6 _______________________________________________________________ Maintenance

Technical Support
For technical questions, contact the Vaisala technical support by e-mail at
helpdesk@vaisala.com. Provide at least the following supporting
information:

- Name and model of the product in question


- Serial number of the product
- Name and location of the installation site
- Name and contact information of a technically competent person who
can provide further information on the problem

Product Returns
If the product must be returned for service, see www.vaisala.com/returns.

For contact information of Vaisala Service Centers, see


www.vaisala.com/servicecenters.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 159


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

This page intentionally left blank.

160 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 7 ____________________________________________________ Calibration and adjustment

CHAPTER 7
CALIBRATION AND ADJUSTMENT

The PTU300 is fully calibrated and adjusted as shipped from factory.


Typical calibration interval is two years. Depending on the application it
may be good to make more frequent checks. Calibration must be done
always when there is a reason to believe that the device is not within the
accuracy specifications.

When defining the calibration interval the long term specifications and
the requirements of the customer must be taken into consideration.
Contact Vaisala Service Centers for details.

It is recommended that calibration and adjustment should be carried out


by Vaisala. For contact information of Vaisala Service Centers, see
www.vaisala.com/servicecenters.

Calibration and adjustment is carried out either by using the push buttons
on the motherboard, through the serial port or with the optional
display/keypad.

Vaisala portable instruments HM70 and HMI41 can also be used.

Pressure
The user can select a simple offset or a two-point offset and gain
adjustment and use the LCI command for adjustment of pressure
transducer. The MPCI command is used for the more sophisticated
multipoint correction capability at up to eight pressure levels.

Check first what linear corrections the transmitter is currently using


before attempt to readjust the transducer. As the previous linear
corrections will disappear when new linear corrections are input, the user
has to take into account the previous linear corrections when deciding
about the new ones.

NOTE Entering new linear or multipoint corrections will always cancel the
previous corrections. It is advisable to write down the previous linear
and multipoint corrections so that they will not be lost by mistake.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 161


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Table 37 Adjustment and Calibration Commands


Function Command
Linear corrections on/off LCI ON/OFF
Entering linear corrections LCI
Multipoint corrections on/off MPCI ON/OFF
Entering multipoint corrections MPCI
Calibration date CDATE

Opening and Closing the Adjustment Mode


1. Open the transmitter cover. The buttons needed in adjustment are
on the left-hand side of the motherboard.
2. If the chemical purge option is available, it should be carried out
always before RH calibration. To start chemical purge press
simultaneously two PURGE push buttons (on the motherboard) for
a few seconds. Red indicator LED flashes with short pulses until
purge is complete (up to 6 minutes).
3. Press the ADJ button to open the adjustment mode.
4. Press the ADJ button again to close the adjustment mode.

0508-013

Figure 74 Adjustment and Purge Buttons


The following numbers refer to Figure 74 above:
1 = Indicator LED
2 = Adjustment button
3 = Press the purge buttons simultaneously to start chemical purge
(if available)

Adjustment menu is displayed only when ADJ button (on the


motherboard inside the transmitter) is pressed.

162 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 7 ____________________________________________________ Calibration and adjustment

0706-054

Figure 75 Adjustment Menu


Table 38 Indicator Led Functions
Indicator Led Function Description
LED off Adjustment locked
LED on Adjustment available
LED blinking evenly Measurement not stabilized
LED blinking with short pulses Performing chemical purge

NOTE If using a warmed probe (PTU307 option), probe heating will be


interrupted when ADJ button is pressed. Allow sufficient time for the
probe to reach ambient temperature before starting the adjustment
procedure.

NOTE Fixed pressure compensation value of 1013.25 hPa is used when in


adjustment mode

Pressure Adjustment
One-Point Adjustment Using
Display/Keypad
1. Carry out the chemical purge (if available).
2. Press the ADJ button to open the ADJUSTMENT MENU.
3. Select Adjust P measurement, press the right arrow button.
4. Select P1 adjustment. Press the START key.
5. Let the readings stabilize. Press the READY key when stabilized.
6. Enter the actual pressure of the reference used using the up/down
arrow buttons. Press the OK key.
7. Press the YES key to perform the adjustment. Press the OK to
return to the adjustment menu.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 163


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

One-Point Adjustment using Serial Line


NOTE Making adjustments is possible only after adjustments are unlocked. To
unlock the adjustment menu, press the ADJ button on the motherboard
of the transmitter.

LCI
Use the LCI command

- to activate or deactivate the linear adjustment function


- to enter new linear offset and offset/gain pressure corrections to the
transmitter
- to edit existing linear offset and offset/gain pressure corrections.
Key in the linear corrections for each pressure transducer separately.

NOTE The new linear corrections will always cancel the previous corrections as
well as the valid date of calibration of the transmitter.

Example:
>lci
P1 linear adj. : OFF ? on
P1 1.reading : 0.000 ? 950
P1 1.correction: 0.000 ? 0.22
P1 2.reading : 0.000 ? 1120
P1 2.correction: 0.000 ? 0.15

LC
Use the LC command to view current status of the linear offset and
offset/gain pressure corrections.

Example:
>lc
P1 linear adj. : ON
P1 1.reading : 950.000
P1 1.correction: 0.220
P1 2.reading : 1120.000
P1 2.correction: 0.150

164 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 7 ____________________________________________________ Calibration and adjustment

MPCI
Use the MPCI command

- to activate or deactivate multipoint pressure adjustment function


- to enter new multipoint pressure measurement corrections
- to edit existing multipoint pressure measurement corrections.
First deactivate the previous pressure corrections by using the LCI OFF
and/or MPC1 OFF commands. Precalibration of the transmitter then
gives the required corrections.

When entering new multipoint corrections for pressure, always start at


the low-pressure end and then go up the pressure range. Key in the
multipoint corrections for each pressure transducer separately.

NOTE The new multipoint corrections for pressure measurement will always
cancel the previous corrections as well as the valid date of calibration of
the transmitter.

Example:
>mpci
P1 multi adj. : OFF ? on
P1 1.reading : 0.000 ? 900
P1 1.correction: 0.000 ? 0.2
P1 2.reading : 0.000 ? 950
P1 2.correction: 0.000 ? 0.22
P1 3.reading : 0.000 ? 1000
P1 3.correction: 0.000 ? 0.27
P1 4.reading : 0.000 ? 1050
P1 4.correction: 0.000 ? 0.31
P1 5.reading : 0.000 ? 1100
P1 5.correction: 0.000 ? 0.32
P1 6.reading : 0.000 ? 1150
P1 6.correction: 0.000 ? 0.33
P1 7.reading : 0.000 ? 1200
P1 7.correction: 0.000 ? 0.34
P1 8.reading : 0.000 ?
P1 8.correction: 0.000 ?

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 165


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

MPC
Use the MPC command to view current status of the multipoint pressure
measurement corrections.

Example:
>mpc
P1 multi adj. : ON
P1 1.reading : 900.000
P1 1.correction: 0.200
P1 2.reading : 950.000
P1 2.correction: 0.220
P1 3.reading : 1000.000
P1 3.correction: 0.270
P1 4.reading : 1050.000
P1 4.correction: 0.310
P1 5.reading : 1100.000
P1 5.correction: 0.320
P1 6.reading : 1150.000
P1 6.correction: 0.330
P1 7.reading : 1200.000
P1 7.correction: 0.340
P1 8.reading : 0.000
P1 8.correction: 0.000
>

166 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 7 ____________________________________________________ Calibration and adjustment

Relative Humidity Adjustment


Using Push Buttons
A simple push-button adjustment is carried out by using two relative
humidity references: 11 %RH (LiCl) and 75 %RH (NaCl). The three
buttons needed for the adjustment are located on the motherboard, at the
upper left corner of the transmitter.

1. Carry out the chemical purge (if available).

LiCl reference

2. Press the ADJ button (see Figure 74 on page 162) to open the
adjustment mode. The indicator LED starts flashing.
3. Remove the filter from the probe and insert the probe into a
measurement hole of the 11 %RH (LiCl) in the humidity calibrator
HMK15. Use the adapter fitting for the PTU307 probe.
4. Wait at least 30 minutes for the sensor to stabilize (the indicator
LED is lit continuously). Adjustment cannot be done if the
conditions are not stabilized (indicator LED is flashing).
5. When the indicator LED is lit continuously press the LiCl~11% button
to adjust the 11 %RH condition. After adjustment transmitter
returns to normal operation mode (indicator LED is unlit).

NaCl reference

6. When adjusting in the second reference 75 %RH, press the ADJ


button to open the adjustment mode. The indicator LED starts
flashing.
7. Insert the probe into a measurement hole of the 75 %RH (NaCl)
reference chamber of the humidity calibrator HMK15. Use the
adapter fitting for the PTU307 probe.
8. Wait at least 30 minutes for the sensor to stabilize (the indicator
LED is lit continuously). Adjustment cannot be done if the
conditions are not stabilized (indicator LED is flashing).
9. Press the NaCl~75% button to adjust the 75 %RH condition. After
adjustment transmitter returns to normal operation mode (indicator
LED is unlit).

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 167


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Using Display/Keypad
Note that the difference between the two humidity references must be at
least 50 %RH.

1. Carry out the chemical purge (if available).


2. Press the ADJ button (opens the ADJUSTMENT MENU).
3. Select Adjust RH measurement, press the right arrow button.
4. Select 1-point/ 2-point adjustment. Press the START key.
5. Select the reference as guided by the display, press the SELECT
key.

0706-005

Figure 76 Selecting Point 1 Reference Type

6. Remove the filter from the probe and insert the probe into a
measurement hole of the dry end reference chamber (for example,
LiCl: 11 %RH in the humidity calibrator HMK15.) Use the adapter
fitting for the PTU307 probe.
7. Wait at least 30 minutes for the sensor to stabilize. Follow the
stabilization from the GRAPH display.
8. Press the READY key when stabilized. If you have chosen the
Other reference value, enter now the reference value by using the
arrow buttons.
When carrying out the 2-point adjustment proceed to the next
adjustment point and carry out the procedure as described in the
previous steps.
9. Press YES to confirm the adjustment. Press the OK key to return to
the adjustment menu.
10. Press the EXIT key to close the adjustment mode and return to the
basic display. Before closing the adjustment mode, feed the
adjustment information into the device, see section Feeding
Adjustment Information on page 178.

168 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 7 ____________________________________________________ Calibration and adjustment

Using Serial Line


Note that the difference between the two humidity references must be at
least 50 %RH.

1. Connect the PTU300 to a PC. See section Serial Line


Communication on page 81. Open a terminal program.
2. Carry out the chemical purge (if available).
3. Press the ADJ button.
4. Remove the filter from the probe and insert the probe into a
measurement hole of the dry end reference chamber (for example,
LiCl: 11 %RH in the humidity calibrator HMK15). Use the adapter
fitting for the PTU307 probe.
5. Enter the CRH command and press ENTER.

>crh
6. Wait at least 30 minutes for the sensor to stabilize.
7. Type C and press ENTER a few times to check if the reading is
stabilized.
8. When the reading is stabilized, give the reference humidity after
the question mark and press ENTER.
>crh

RH : 11.25 Ref1 ? c
RH : 11.25 Ref1 ? c
RH : 11.25 Ref1 ? c
RH : 11.24 Ref1 ? c
RH : 11.24 Ref1 ? 11.3
Press any key when ready ...

9. Now the device is waiting for the high end reference. Insert the
probe into a measurement hole of the high end reference chamber
(for example,. NaCl: 75 %RH chamber in the humidity calibrator
HMK15). Use the adapter fitting for the PTU307 probe. Press any
key when ready.
10. Let the probe stabilize for about 30 minutes. You can follow the
stabilization by typing C and pressing ENTER.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 169


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

11. When stabilized, type the high end reference value after the
question mark and press ENTER.
>crh

RH : 11.25 Ref1 ? c
RH : 11.24 Ref1 ? c
RH : 11.24 Ref1 ? 11.3
Press any key when ready ...

RH : 75.45 Ref2 ? c
RH : 75.57 Ref2 ? c
RH : 75.55 Ref2 ? c
RH : 75.59 Ref2 ? 75.5
OK
>

12. OK indicates that the adjustment has succeeded and the new
calibration coefficients are calculated and stored. Enter the
adjustment information (date and text) to the memory of the
transmitter, see the commands CTEXT and CDATE.
13. Press the ADJ button on the motherboard to close the adjustment
mode.
14. Take the probe out of the reference conditions and replace the
filter.

170 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 7 ____________________________________________________ Calibration and adjustment

Multipoint Relative Humidity Adjustment


Using Serial Line
You can use the MPC RH command (introduced in software version
5.14) to perform a multipoint adjustment to the relative humidity
measurement. Due to the linear response of the HUMICAP sensor, the
standard two point humidity adjustments are recommended for all users.
Use multipoint correction only if:

- You have a requirement to adjust the relative humidity measurement


in 3 ... 6 adjustment points.
- You are interested in a narrow range of measurement and want to
optimize the RH measurement performance for that range.

Multipoint humidity adjustment works by means of a correction table


that holds 2 ... 6 adjustment points. The idea is that for every point, you
enter the RH reading that the transmitter shows, and the correct humidity
reference value. You can select any references points in range 0 ... 100
%RH, but Vaisala recommends that the difference between the lowest
and highest reference point is at least 50 %RH.

NOTE Multipoint adjustment is applied on top of the standard user-made two


point relative humidity adjustment (done with CRH command, push-
buttons, or display). It is recommended that before you start using the
MPC RH command, you clear the existing humidity adjustment. This is
done as part of the example multipoint adjustment procedure provided
here.

MPC RH Command Syntax


MPC RH [function]<cr>

where
function = Desired function. The options are:

ON Enable multipoint correction.


OFF Disable multipoint correction.
LIST Show correction table.
INIT Start entering values in correction table.
CLEAR Remove all values from correction table and
disable multipoint correction.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 171


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Example Multipoint Adjustment Procedure


1. Connect the PTU300 to a PC. See section Serial Line
Communication on page 81. Open a terminal program.
2. Issue the PURGE command to carry out the chemical purge, and
wait for six minutes for it to complete. Transmitters without the
chemical purge feature will not respond to the command.

>purge
Purge started, press any key to abort...

3. Press the ADJ button on the component board.


4. View the currently applied standard user adjustment offset and gain
using the L command. If offset is zero and gain is one (example
shown below), no user correction is applied:

>l
RH offset : 0.00000000E+00
RH gain : 1.00000000E+00
T offset : 0.00000000E+00
T gain : 1.00000000E+00

5. If some RH offset or gain is applied, write down the adjustment


and then clear it by writing zero to RH offset and one to RH gain
using the LI command:

>li
RH offset : 0.001300000E+00 ? 0
RH gain : 1.040000000E+00 ? 1
T offset : 0.00000000E+00 ?
T gain : 1.00000000E+00 ?

6. You must now prepare a list of 3 ... 6 correction points using a


humidity generator or salt solutions (for example, using the
HMK15 Humidity Calibrator). You must measure the transmitters
RH reading at each point, and make a note of the reference RH
reading. Here is an example list for a four-point correction:
Table 39 Example List for Multipoint Correction
Point Number Transmitters Reading Reference
1 12.2 %RH 11 %RH
2 34 %RH 33 %RH
3 75.5 %RH 75 %RH
4 97.3 %RH 97 %RH

172 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 7 ____________________________________________________ Calibration and adjustment

To start, remove the filter from the probe and insert the probe into a
measurement hole of the driest reference chamber you intend to
use. Proceed from low to high humidity. Remember to allow at
least 30 minutes for the sensor to stabilize at each point.
7. When done preparing the list, remove the probe from the last
measurement chamber and re-attach the filter.
8. On the serial line, issue the MPC RH INIT command and start
entering the readings and reference points from the list you
prepared in step 6. When you have no more points to enter, press
enter to save the points.
>mpc rh init
1 Reading : ? 12.2
1 Reference: ? 11
2 Reading : ? 34
2 Reference: ? 33
3 Reading : ? 75.5
3 Reference: ? 75
4 Reading : ? 97.3
4 Reference: ? 97
5 Reading : ?

Mpc points saved.

9. Issue the MPC RH LIST command to verify the list you entered:
>mpc rh list
MPC : OFF
# Reading Reference Correction
1 12.20 11.00 -1.20
2 34.00 33.00 -1.00
3 75.50 75.00 -0.50
4 97.30 97.00 -0.30

10. If you are satisfied with the correction list, enable multipoint
correction by issuing the command MPC RH ON.

>mpc rh on

11. Multipoint adjustment of relative humidity is now complete.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 173


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Relative Humidity Adjustment After Sensor


Change
Using Display/Keypad
When using the optional display/keypad, follow the instructions in
section Using Display/Keypad on page 168 on page but select Adj. for
new RH sensor (instead of 1-point/ 2-point adjustment).

Using Serial Line


After sensor change, carry out the procedure as described in previous
sections. Just replace the CRH command with the FCRH command.

FCRH
Example:
>fcrh
RH : 1.82 1. ref ? 0
Press any key when ready...
RH : 74.22 2. ref ? 75
OK
>

The OK indicates that the calibration has succeeded.

174 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 7 ____________________________________________________ Calibration and adjustment

Temperature Adjustment
Using Display/Keypad
1. Press the ADJ button on the motherboard to open the
ADJUSTMENT MENU. If using a warmed probe for measuring,
probe heating will be interrupted when ADJ button is pressed. Wait
some time for the probe to reach ambient temperature.
2. Select Adjust T measurement (or TA measurement for
additional probe) press the right arrow button.
3. Select 1-point/ 2-point adjustment. Press the START key.
4. Remove the filter from the probe and insert the probe into the
reference temperature.
5. Wait at least 30 minutes for the sensor to stabilize. Follow the
stabilization from the GRAPH display.
6. Press the READY key when stabilized. Give the reference
temperature using the arrow buttons.
When carrying out the 2-point adjustment, proceed to the next
adjustment point and carry out the procedure as described in the
previous items. Please note that the difference between the two
temperature references must be at least 30 C.

7. Press the OK key. Then press YES to confirm the adjustment.


8. Press the OK key to return to the adjustment menu.
9. Press the EXIT key to close the adjustment mode and return to the
basic display

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 175


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Using Serial Line


1. Press the ADJ button on the motherboard to open the adjustment
mode. If using a warmed probe for measuring, probe heating will
be interrupted when ADJ button is pressed. Wait some time for the
probe to reach ambient temperature.
2. Remove the probe filter and insert the probe into the reference
temperature.
3. Enter the command CT or (CTA for additional T probe) and press
ENTER.
4. Type C and press ENTER a few times to check if the reading is
stabilized. Let the reading stabilize, give the reference temperature
after the question mark and press ENTER three times.
When having another reference temperature (2-point calibration)
press ENTER only twice and insert the probe to the second
reference. When the reading is stabilized, give the second reference
temperature after the question mark and press ENTER. Note that
the difference between the two temperature references must be at
least 30 C.

Example (1-point adjustment):


>ct
T : 16.06 Ref1 ? c
T : 16.06 Ref1 ? c
T : 16.06 Ref1 ? c
T : 16.06 Ref1 ? c
T : 16.06 Ref1 ? c
T : 16.06 Ref1 ? 16.0
Press any key when ready ...
T : 16.06 Ref2 ?
OK
>

5. OK indicates that the calibration has succeeded. Give the


calibration information (date and text) to the transmitter's memory;
see the serial commands CTEXT and CDATE.
6. Press the ADJ button on the motherboard to close the adjustment
mode.
7. Take the probe out of the reference conditions and replace the
filter.

176 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 7 ____________________________________________________ Calibration and adjustment

Analog Output Adjustment (Ch1 and Ch2)


In the analog output calibration the analog output is forced to the
following values:
- Current output: 2 mA and 18 mA
- Voltage output: 10 % and 90 % of the range
Connect PTU300 to a calibrated current/voltage meter in order to
measure either current or voltage depending on the selected output type.

NOTE Normally, analog output Ch3 does not need to be adjusted once it has
left from the factory. However, if accuracy of the unit is suspected, it is
advisable to return the unit to Vaisala for re-adjustment/calibration.

Using Display/Keypad
1. Press the ADJ button to open the ADJUSTMENT MENU.
2. Select Adjust analog outputs, press the right arrow button.
3. Select the output to be adjusted Adjust analog output 1/2, press
the START key.
4. Measure the first analog output value with a multimeter. Give the
measured value by using the arrow buttons. Press the OK key.
5. Measure the second analog output value with a multimeter. Give
the measured value by using the arrow buttons. Press the OK key.
6. Press the OK key to return to the adjustment menu.
7. Press the EXIT key to close the adjustment mode and to return to
the basic display.

Using Serial Line


Enter the ACAL command and type the multimeter reading for each
case. Continue by pressing ENTER.

ACAL
Example (current outputs):
>acal
Ch1 I1 (mA) ? 2.046
Ch1 I2 (mA) ? 18.087
Ch2 I1 (mA) ? 2.036
Ch2 I2 (mA) ? 18.071
>

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 177


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Feeding Adjustment Information


This information is shown on the device information fields. Ssee section
Device Information on page 115.

Using Display/Keypad
1. If you are not in the adjustment menu, press the ADJ button on the
motherboard (opens the ADJUSTMENT MENU).
2. Select Adjustment info, press the right arrow button.
3. Select Date, press the SET key. Enter date by using the arrow
buttons. Press the OK key.
4. Select i, press the SET key. Enter information text including 17
characters at maximum. Use the arrow buttons. Press the OK key.
5. Press the EXIT key to return to the basic display.

Using Serial Line


CTEXT
Use the CTEXT command to enter text to the adjustment information
field.

Example:
>ctext
Adjust. info : (not set) ? HMK15
>

CDATE
Use the CDATE command to enter date to adjustment information field.
Set the adjustment date in format YYYY-MM-DD.

Example:
>cdate
Adjust. date : (not set) ? 2006-01-22
>

178 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 8 _____________________________________________________________ Technical data

CHAPTER 8
TECHNICAL DATA

This chapter provides the technical data of the product.

Specifications
Performance
Barometric Pressure
Pressure range 500 ... 1100 hPa, 50 ... 1100 hPa
Accuracy 500 ... 1100 hPa, 500 ... 1100 hPa 50 ... 1100 hPa
Class A Class B
Linearity 0.05 hPa 0.10 hPa 0.20 hPa
Hysteresis* 0.03 hPa 0.03 hPa 0.08 hPa
Repeatability* 0.03 hPa 0.03 hPa 0.08 hPa
Calibration
uncertainty** 0.07 hPa 0.15 hPa 0.20 hPa
Accuracy
at +20 C*** 0.10 hPa 0.20 hPa 0.30 hPa
Temperature
dependence**** 0.1 hPa 0.1 hPa 0.3 hPa
Total accuracy
(-40 ... +60 C/
-40 ... +140 F) 0.15 hPa 0.25 hPa 0.45 hPa
Long-term
stability/year 0.1 hPa 0.1 hPa 0.2 hPa
Response time
(100 % response)
one sensor 2 s 1 s 1 s
Pressure units hPa, mbar, kPa, Pa, inHg, mmH20, mmHg, torr, psia

* Defined as 2 standard deviation limits of endpoint non-linearity,


hysteresis error or repeatability error and calibration.
** Defined as 2 standard deviation limits of accuracy of the working
standard including traceability to NIST.
*** Defined as the root sum of the squares (RSS) of endpoint non-linearity,
hysteresis error, repeatability error and calibration uncertainty at
room temperature.
**** Defined as 2 standard deviation limits of temperature dependence
over the operating temperature range.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 179


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Relative Humidity
Measurement range 0...100 %RH
Accuracy (including non-linearity,
hysteresis and repeatability)

with HUMICAP180 for typical applications


HUMICAP180C for applications with chemical purge and/or
warmed probe
at +15... 25 C 1 %RH (0...90 %RH)
1.7 %RH (90...100 %RH)
at -20...+40 C (1.0 + 0.008 x reading) %RH
at -40...+ 60 C (1.5 + 0.015 x reading) %RH

with HUMICAP180R for applications with demanding chemical


environment
at -10...+40 C (1.0 + 0.01 x reading) %RH
at -40...+60 C (1.5 + 0.02 x reading) %RH
Factory calibration uncertainty (+20 C)
0.6 %RH (0...40 %RH)
1.0 %RH (40...97 %RH)
(Defined as 2 standard deviation limits.
Small variations possible, see also calibration
certificate.)
Response time (90 %) at 20 C in still air
8 s with grid filter
20 s with grid + steel netting filter
40 s with sintered filter

180 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 8 _____________________________________________________________ Technical data

Temperature (+ Operating Pressure Ranges)


PTU301/303/307 -40...+60 C (-40...+140 F)

Accuracy at +20 C (+68 F) 0.2 C ( 0.4 F)


Temperature units C, F

Accuracy over temperature range (see graph below):

0911-065

Figure 77 Accuracy over Temperature Range


Temperature sensor Pt 100 RTD 1/3 Class B IEC 751

Optional Temperature Probe


Temperature measurement
range: -70...+ 180 C (-94...+356 F)
Typical accuracy: 0.1 C (0.18 F)
Sensor: Pt100 PRT DIN IEC 751 class 1/4 B
Cable length: 2 m, 5 m, and 10 m
Pressure tight: up to 7 bar
Probe material: stainless steel

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 181


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Calculated Variables
Table 40 Calculated Variables (Typical Ranges)
Variable PTU 301 PTU303 PTU 307
Dewpoint -20...+60 C -20...+80 C -20...+100 C
temperature
Mixing ratio 0...160 g/kg dry air 0...500 g/kg dry air 0...500 g/kg dry air
3 3 3
Absolute 0...160 g/m 0...500 g/m 0...500 g/m
humidity
Wet bulb 0...60 C 0...+100 C 0...+100 C
temperature
Enthalpy -40...+1500 kJ/kg -40...+1500 kJ/kg -40...+1500 kJ/kg
Water vapor 0... 1000 hPa 0... 1000 hPa 0... 1000 hPa
pressure

Accuracies of Calculated Variables


Accuracies of the calculated variables depend on the calibration accuracy
of the humidity and temperature sensors; here the accuracies are given
for 2 %RH and 0.2 C.

Accuracy of Dewpoint Temperature C


Relative humidity
Temp. 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
-40 1.86 1.03 0.76 0.63 0.55 0.50 0.46 0.43
-20 2.18 1.19 0.88 0.72 0.62 0.56 0.51 0.48
0 2.51 1.37 1.00 0.81 0.70 0.63 0.57 0.53 0.50 0.48
20 2.87 1.56 1.13 0.92 0.79 0.70 0.64 0.59 0.55 0.53
40 3.24 1.76 1.27 1.03 0.88 0.78 0.71 0.65 0.61 0.58
60 3.60 1.96 1.42 1.14 0.97 0.86 0.78 0.72 0.67 0.64
80 4.01 2.18 1.58 1.27 1.08 0.95 0.86 0.79 0.74 0.70
100 4.42 2.41 1.74 1.40 1.19 1.05 0.95 0.87 0.81 0.76
120 4.86 2.66 1.92 1.54 1.31 1.16 1.04 0.96 0.89 0.84
140 5.31 2.91 2.10 1.69 1.44 1.26 1.14 1.05 0.97 0.91
160 5.80 3.18 2.30 1.85 1.57 1.38 1.24 1.14 1.06 0.99

182 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 8 _____________________________________________________________ Technical data

Accuracy of Mixing Ratio g/kg (Ambient Pressure


1013 mbar)
Relative humidity
Temp. 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
-40 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.004 0.004 0.004
-20 0.017 0.018 0.019 0.021 0.022 0.023 0.025 0.026
0 0.08 0.09 0.09 0.10 0.10 0.11 0.11 0.12 0.13 0.13
20 0.31 0.33 0.35 0.37 0.39 0.41 0.43 0.45 0.47 0.49
40 0.97 1.03 1.10 1.17 1.24 1.31 1.38 1.46 1.54 1.62
60 2.68 2.91 3.16 3.43 3.72 4.04 4.38 4.75 5.15 5.58
80 6.73 7.73 8.92 10.34 12.05 14.14 16.71 19.92 24.01 29.29
100 16.26 21.34 28.89 40.75 60.86 98.85 183.66 438.56
120 40.83 74.66 172.36

Accuracy of Wet Bulb Temperature C


Relative humidity
Temp. 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
-40 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20
-20 0.21 0.21 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.23 0.23
0 0.27 0.28 0.28 0.29 0.29 0.29 0.30 0.30 0.31 0.31
20 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.44 0.44 0.44 0.43 0.43 0.42 0.42
40 0.84 0.77 0.72 0.67 0.64 0.61 0.58 0.56 0.54 0.52
60 1.45 1.20 1.03 0.91 0.83 0.76 0.71 0.67 0.63 0.60
80 2.23 1.64 1.32 1.13 0.99 0.89 0.82 0.76 0.72 0.68
100 3.06 2.04 1.58 1.31 1.14 1.01 0.92 0.85 0.80 0.75
120 3.85 2.40 1.81 1.48 1.28 1.13 1.03 0.95 0.88 0.83
140 4.57 2.73 2.03 1.65 1.41 1.25 1.13 1.04 0.97 0.91
160 5.25 3.06 2.25 1.82 1.55 1.37 1.24 1.13 1.05 0.99

Accuracy of Absolute Humidity g/m


Relative humidity
Temp. 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
-40 0.004 0.004 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.006 0.006 0.006
-20 0.023 0.025 0.027 0.029 0.031 0.032 0.034 0.036
0 0.10 0.11 0.12 0.13 0.13 0.14 0.15 0.15 0.16 0.17
20 0.37 0.39 0.41 0.43 0.45 0.47 0.49 0.51 0.53 0.55
40 1.08 1.13 1.18 1.24 1.29 1.34 1.39 1.44 1.49 1.54
60 2.73 2.84 2.95 3.07 3.18 3.29 3.40 3.52 3.63 3.74
80 6.08 6.30 6.51 6.73 6.95 7.17 7.39 7.61 7.83 8.05
100 12.2 12.6 13.0 13.4 13.8 14.2 14.6 15.0 15.3 15.7
120 22.6 23.3 23.9 24.6 25.2 25.8 26.5 27.1 27.8 28.4
140 39.1 40.0 41.0 42.0 43.0 44.0 45.0 45.9 46.9 47.9
160 63.5 64.9 66.4 67.8 69.2 70.7 72.1 73.5 74.9 76.4

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 183


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Dewpoint Temperature (PTU307 Warmed


Probe Option)
Find the intersection of the dewpoint temperature curve and the dewpoint
difference reading (process temperature-dewpoint temperature) on the x-
axis and read the accuracy in dewpoint measurement on the y-axis.
Accuracy in dewpoint measurement (C)

Dewpoint temperature (C)


0 20
5 40
-40 -20 60

4
80
3

100
2

0
0 20 40 60 80 100
Dewpoint difference (C)
0508-017

Figure 78 Accuracy in Dewpoint Measurement

Operating Conditions
Operating temperature range
for humidity measurement -70 ... +180 C (-94 ... +356 F) see probe
specifications
for transmitter body electronics -40 ... +60 C (40 ... +140F)
with display 0 ... +60 C (+32 ... +140F)

Storage temperature
without display -55 +80 C (-67 +176 F)
with display -40 +80 C (-40 +176 F)

Electromagnetic compatibility EN61326-1: Electrical equipment for


measurement, control, and laboratory use
EMC requirements for use in industrial
locations

184 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 8 _____________________________________________________________ Technical data

Inputs and Outputs


Operating voltage 10 ... 35 VDC, 24 VAC
with optional power supply module 100 ... 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Start-up time after power-up 3s

Power consumption at 20 C (Uin 24VDC)


RS-232 max 28 mA
Uout 3 x 0...1V / 0...5V / 0...10V max 33 mA
Iout 3 x 0...20 mA max 63 mA
display and backlight + 20 mA
during chemical purge + 110 mA max
during probe heating (PTU307) + 120 mA max
Settling time at power-up (one sensor)
class A 4s
class B 3s
Analog outputs
current output 0 ... 20 mA, 4 ... 20 mA
voltage output 0 ... 1 V, 0 ... 5 V, 0 ... 10 V
Humidity and temperature
Accuracy of analog outputs at 20 C 0.05 % full scale
Temperature dependency of the
analog outputs 0.005 %/C full scale
Pressure
500...1100 hPa 50...1100 hPa
Accuracy of analog outputs at 20 C 0.30 hPa 0.4 hPa
Temperature dependency of the
analog outputs 0.6 hPa 0.75 hPa
External loads
current ouputs RL < 500 ohm
0... 1V output RL > 2 kohm
0... 5V and 0... 10V outputs RL > 10 kohm
Wire size 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 (AWG 20 ... 14)
stranded wires recommended
Digital outputs RS-232
RS-422/485 (optional)
LAN (optional)
WLAN (optional)
Protocols ASCII commands
Modbus RTU
Modbus TCP
Relay outputs (optional) 0.5 A, 250 VAC, SPDT
Display (optional) LCD with backlight, graphic
trend display
Menu languages Chinese, English, Finnish,
French, German, Japanese,
Russian, Spanish, Swedish

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 185


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Mechanics
Cable bushing M20x1.5 For cable diameter
8 ... 11mm/0.31 ... 0.43"
Conduit fitting 1/2NPT
User cable connector (optional) M12 series 8- pin (male)
option 1 with plug (female) with 5 m /
16.4 ft black cable
option 2 with plug (female) with screw
terminals
Probe cable diameter
PTU303 80C 6.0 mm
Other probes 5.5 mm
Probe tube material
PTU301 Chromed ABS plastic
Other probes AISI 316L
Housing material G-AlSi 10 Mg (DIN 1725)
Housing classification
Without display IP 66 (NEMA 4X)
With display and keypad IP 65 (NEMA 4X)
Transmitter weight (with probe, cable, and modules) 1.0 ... 3.0 kg (2.2 ... 6.6 lb)

Table 41 Standard Probe Cable Lengths and Approximate


Transmitter Weight (in kg/lb)
Probe Type Probe Cable Length
2m 5m 10 m 20 m
PTU303 1.1/2.4 1.2/2.6 1.5/3.3 2.1/4.5
PTU307 1.2/2.6 1.3/2.9 1.5/3.3 2.1/4.5

186 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 8 _____________________________________________________________ Technical data

Technical Specifications of Optional


Modules
Power Supply Module
Operating voltage 100 ... 240 VAC 50/60 Hz
Connections screw terminals for 0.5 ... 2.5
mm2 wire (AWG 20 ... 14)
Bushing for 8 ... 11 mm diameter cable
Operating temperature -40 ... +60 C (-40 ... +140 F)
Storage temperature -40 ... +70C (-40 ... +158 F)

UL file number E249387

Analog Output Module


Outputs 0 ... 20 mA, 4 ... 20 mA,
0 ... 1 V, 0 ... 5 V, 0 ... 10 V
Operating temperature range -40 ... +60 C (-40 ... +140 F)
Power consumption
Uout 0...1 V max 30 mA
Uout 0...5V/0...10V max 30 mA
Iout 0... 20 mA max 60 mA

External loads
current outputs RL< 500 ohms
Max load + cable loop resistance 540 ohms
0....1 V RL> 2000 ohms
0...5 V and 0... 10 V RL> 10 000 ohms

Storage temperature range -55 ... +80 C (-67 ... +176 F)


3-pole screw terminal
max wire size 1.5 mm2 (AWG16)

Relay Module
Operating temperature range -40 ... +60 C (-40 ... +140 F)
Operating pressure range 500 ... 1300 mmHg
Power consumption at 24 V max 30 mA
Contacts SPDT (change over), for example,
Contact arrangement Form C
Imax 0.5 A 250 VAC
Imax 0.5 A 30 VDC
Safety standard for the relay component IEC60950 UL1950
Storage temperature range -55 ... +80 C (-67 ... +176 F)
3-pole screw terminal / relay
max wire size 2.5 mm2 (AWG14)

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 187


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

RS-485 Module
Operating temperature range -40 ... +60 C (-40 ... +140 F)
Operating modes 2-wire (1-pair) half duplex
4-wire (2-pair) full duplex
Operating speed max 115.2 kbaud
Bus isolation 300VDC
Power consumption at 24V max 50 mA
External loads
standard loads 32 RL> 10kohm
Storage temperature range -55 ... +80 C (-67 ... +176 F)
Max wire size 1.5 mm2 (AWG16)

LAN Interface Module


Operating temperature range -40 ... +60 C (-40 ... +140 F)
Storage temperature range -40 ... +85 C (-40 ... +185 F)
Operating humidity range 5 95 %RH
Power consumption at 24V max 60 mA
Ethernet type 10BASE-T 100BASE-TX
Connector 8P8C (RJ45)
IPv4 address assignment DHCP (automatic), static
Protocols Telnet, Modbus TCP
Max number of Telnet/Modbus clients 1

WLAN Interface Module


Operating temperature range -20 ... +60 C (-4 ... +140 F)
Storage temperature range -40 ... +85 C (-40 ... +185 F)
Operating humidity range 5 95 %RH
Power consumption at 24V max 80 mA
Supported standards 802.11b
Connector RP-SMA
IPv4 address assignment DHCP (automatic), static
Protocols Telnet, Modbus TCP
Max number of Telnet/Modbus clients 1
Security WEP 64/128, WPA2/802.11i

Data Logger Module


Operating temperature range -40 ... +60 C (-40 ... +140 F)
Storage temperature range -55 ... +80 C (-67 ... +176 F)
Power consumption at 24V max 10 mA
Logged parameters up to four with trend/min/max
values for each
Logging interval 10 s (fixed)
Maximum logging period 4 years 5 months
Logged points 13.7 million points / parameter
Accuracy of the clock better than 2 min/year
Battery lifetime
at -40 ... +30 C (-40 ... +86 F) 7 years
at +30 ... +60 C (+86 ... +140 F) 5 years

188 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 8 _____________________________________________________________ Technical data

Spare Parts and Accessories


Information on spare parts, accessories, and calibration products
is available online at www.vaisala.com and store.vaisala.com.

Table 42 Spare Parts and Accessories


Description Order Code
MODULES
Relay module RELAY-1
Analog Output Module AOUT-1
Isolated RS-485 Module RS485-1
Power Supply Module POWER-1
Galvanic Isolation Module DCDC-1
SENSORS
HUMICAP180 15778HM
HUMICAP180R HUMICAP180R
HUMICAP180C 229011SP
HUMICAP180RC HUMICAP180RC
PT100 Sensor 10429SP
FILTERS
PPS Plastic Grid with Stainless Steel Netting DRW010281SP
PPS Plastic Grid Filter DRW010276SP
Sintered Filter AISI 316L HM47280SP
Stainless Steel Filter HM47453SP
Stainless Steel Filter with Membrane 214848SP
TRANSMITTER MOUNTING ACCESSORIES
Wall Mounting Plate (plastic) 214829
Probe Holder Plate 226252
Installation Kit for Pole or Pipeline 215108
Rain Shield with Installation Kit 215109
DIN Rail Installation Kit 211477
DIN Rail Clips with 215094
Installation Plate
Panel Mounting Frame 216038
PROBE MOUNTING ACCESSORIES
Swagelok for 12mm Probe 3/8" ISO Thread SWG12ISO38
Swagelok for 12mm Probe 1/2" ISO Thread SWG12ISO12
Swagelok for 12mm Probe 1/2" NPT Thread SWG12NPT12
Swagelok for 6mm Probe 1/2" ISO Thread SWG6ISO12
Swagelok for 6mm Probe 1/8" ISO Thread SWG6ISO18
Swagelok for 6mm Probe 1/8" NPT Thread SWG6NPT18
Cable Gland and AGRO, for PTU303/307 HMP247CG
Duct Installation Kit for PTU303/307 210697
Duct Installation Kit for Temperature Probe 215003
CONNECTION CABLES
Serial Interface Cable 19446ZZ
USB-RJ45 Serial Interface Cable 219685
Connection Cable for HM70 211339
HMI41 Connection Cable with RJ45 Connector 25917ZZ

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 189


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Description Order Code


OUTPUT CABLES FOR 8-PIN CONNECTOR
Connection Cable 5m 8-pin M12 Female, Black 212142
Female Connector 8-pin M12 with Screw 212416
Terminals
Male Connector 8-pin M12 with Cable and 214806SP
Adapter
CABLE BUSHINGS
Cable Gland M20x1.5 for 8...11mm Cable 214728SP
Conduit Fitting M20x1.5 for NPT1/2 Conduit 214780SP
Dummy Plug M20x1.5 214672SP
WINDOWS SOFTWARE
PC Software and cable 215005
OTHER
HMK15 Calibration Adapter for 12 mm Probes 211302SP
with >7 mm Sensor Pins
HMK15 Calibration Adapter for 12 mm Probes 218377SP
with <3 mm Sensor Pins
Solar Radiation Shield for PTU303/307/30T DTR502B
Meteorological Installation Kit HMT330MIK
Enclosure spare kit: hexagonal cover screws (4x) 238509
and hinge with attachment screws

190 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 8 _____________________________________________________________ Technical data

Dimensions (mm/inch)

77 (3.03)
71 (2.80)

27.5 (1.08)
53.5 (2.10) 38 (1.50) 38 (1.50) 53.5 (2.10)

183 (7.20)
169 (6.65)
116 (4.57)

96 (3.78)
(0.28)
7

0601-043

Figure 79 Transmitter Body Dimensions

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 191


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

183 (7.20)

116 (4.57)
92 (3.62)

0804-033

Figure 80 WLAN Antenna Dimensions

PTU301
120 (4.72)

12 (0.47)

0508-030

Figure 81 PTU301 Fixed Probe Dimensions

192 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Chapter 8 _____________________________________________________________ Technical data

183 (7.20)

116 (4.57)
106 (4.17)

42 (1.65)

0911-064

Figure 82 PTU301 Short Cable Probe Dimensions

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 193


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

PTU303

0804-060

Figure 83 PTU303 Probe Dimensions

PTU307

0804-061

Figure 84 PTU307 Probe Dimensions

Temperature Probe

0804-062

Figure 85 Optional Temperature Probe Dimensions

194 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Appendix A __________________________________ Probe installation kits and installation examples

APPENDIX A
PROBE INSTALLATION KITS AND
INSTALLATION EXAMPLES

Duct installation kits (for PTU303/307)


Duct installation kit includes a flange, a sealing ring, a supporting bar
and probe attaching part for the probe and screws for attaching the flange
to the duct wall. Vaisala order codes: 210697 (for PTU303 and PTU307),
and 215003 for temperature probe.

0508-021

Figure 86 Duct Mounting Installation Kit

The following numbers refer to Figure 86 above:


1 = Duct wall
2 = Flange
3 = Sealing ring
4 = Supporting bar
5 = Probe attaching part (to be fixed with the supporting bar)
6 = Relative humidity probe

NOTE When the temperature difference between the duct and the air outside the
duct is remarkable, the supporting bar must be installed as deep in the
duct as possible. This prevents errors caused by the heat conduction in
the bar and cable.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 195


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Duct Installation Kit for Temperature Probe (for


PTU307)
Vaisala duct installation kit for the T-probe includes flange, supporting
bar, probe attaching part, sealing ring and the fixing screws (4 pcs).
Vaisala order code: 215003.

0507-019

Figure 87 Duct Mounting Installation Kit for T-Probe

The following numbers refer to Figure 87 above


1 = Duct wall
2 = Flange
3 = Sealing ring
4 = Supporting bar
5 = Probe support (to be fixed to the supporting bar)
6 = Retainer bushing (to be fixed to the probe support)
7 = Temperature probe (to be fixed to the retainer bushing)

Pressure Tight Swagelok Installation Kits (For


PTU307)
RH Probe Installation
Swagelok installation kit for the relative humidity probe includes
Swagelok connector with ISO3/8" or NPT1/2" thread. Vaisala order
codes: SWG12ISO38 or SWG12NPT12.

196 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Appendix A __________________________________ Probe installation kits and installation examples

0508-032

Figure 88 Swagelok Installation Kit for RH-probe

The following numbers refer to Figure 88 above:


1 = Relative humidity probe
2 = Duct connector
3 = ISO3/8" or NPT1/2" thread
4 = Swagelok connector
5 = Ferrules

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 197


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Temperature Probe Installation


Swagelok installation kit for T-probe includes Swagelok connector with
either ISO1/8" or NPT1/8" thread. Vaisala order codes: SWG6ISO18 or
SWG6NPT18.

135 mm

33 mm
18 mm min

P = max 10 bar
T = max 180 C max 30 mm
1 2 3 4

0508-016

Figure 89 Swagelok Installation Kit for T-Probe

The following numbers refer to Figure 89 above


1 = T-probe
2 = Duct connector
3 = Swagelok connector
4 = Ferrules

198 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Appendix A __________________________________ Probe installation kits and installation examples

Examples of Vapor Tight Installations with


Cable Gland
RH-Probe Installations (for PTU303/307)
Cable gland AGRO is available from Vaisala (order code: HMP247CG.)

1
2
3

0508-026

Figure 90 Cable Installation with Cable Gland


The following numbers refer to Figure 90 above
1 = Nut (to be tightened to the body)
2 = Seal
3 = Body and O-ring

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 199


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

0508-018

Figure 91 Probe Installation with Cable Gland


Probe installation with a cable gland is not available from Vaisala.
The following numbers refer to Figure 91 above
1 = AGRO 1160.20.145 (T= -40 ... +100 C) Not available from
Vaisala.
2 = In pressurized places, use a locking ring (example: 11x 1 DIN471).

200 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Appendix A __________________________________ Probe installation kits and installation examples

T- Probe Installations (PTU307)

0508-015

Figure 92 Vapor Tight Installation

Vapor Tight Installation is not available from Vaisala.

The following numbers refer to Figure 92 above:


1 = Cable gland. For example AGRO 1100.12.91.065
(T= -25 ... +200 C)
2 = In pressurized processes, use a locking ring
(example: 6x 0.7 DIN471)

0508-022

Figure 93 Wall Mounting Installation

Wall Mounting Installation is not available from Vaisala.

The following numbers refer to Figure 93 above:


1 = Cable gland. For example AGRO 1100.12.91.065
2 = Compacted PTFE sleeve
3 = Silicon glue between the PTFE sleeve and the cable
4 = Temperature probe
5 = Recommended support to keep the probe in horizontal position

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 201


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Meteorological Installation Kit (for PTU307)


The Vaisala Meteorological Installation Kit HMT330MIK with a static
pressure head enables the PTU307 to be installed outdoors to obtain
reliable measurements for meteorological purposes. For more
information, see HMT330MIK brochure and order form.

0601-044

Figure 94 Meteorological Installation Kit for Outdoor


Installation

The following numbers refer to Figure 94 above:


1 = Radiation shield for the additional T-probe or humidity probe
2 = T support bar
3 = Transmitter mounting plate
4 = Pole mounting plate for support bars
5 = Td support bar
6 = Radiation shield for the warmed humidity probe
7 = Static pressure head

202 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Appendix B _______________________________________________________ Calculation Formulas

APPENDIX B
CALCULATION FORMULAS

This Appendix contains the formulas used for the calculated output
quantities.

The PTU300 series transmitters measure relative humidity and


temperature. From these values dewpoint, mixing ratio, absolute
humidity and enthalpy in normal pressure are calculated using the
following equations:

Dewpoint:

Tn
Td =
m
1 (1)
Pw
log
A
Pw is the water vapor pressure. The parameters A, m, and Tn depend on
temperature according to the following table:

t A m Tn
1)
<0 C 6.1134 9.7911 273.47
0 ... 50 C 6.1078 7.5000 237.3
50 ... 100 C 5.9987 7.3313 229.1
100 ... 150 C 5.8493 7.2756 225.0
150 ... 180 C 6.2301 7.3033 230.0

1) Used for frostpoint calculation if the dewpoint is negative

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 203


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Mixing ratio:

P
x = 621.99 w
(2)
p-P w

Absolute humidity:

Pw
a = 216.68 (3)
T

Enthalpy:

h = (T 273.15) (1.01 + 0.00189 x) + 2.5 x (4)

The water vapor saturation pressure Pws is calculated by using two


equations (5 and 6):

3
= T CiT i (5)
i =o

where:
T = temperature in K
Ci = coefficients
C0 = 0.4931358
C1 = -0.46094296 * 10-2
C2 = 0.13746454 * 10-4
C3 = -0.12743214 * 10-7

204 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Appendix B _______________________________________________________ Calculation Formulas

3
ln Pws = bi i + b4 ln (6)
i = 1

where:
bi = coefficients
b-1 = -0.58002206 * 104
b0 = 0.13914993 * 101
b1 = -0.48640239 * 10-1
b2 = 0.41764768 * 10-4
b3 = -0.14452093 * 10-7
b4 = 6.5459673

The water vapor pressure is calculated using:

Pws
Pw = RH (7)
100

Parts per million by volume is calculated using:

Pw
ppmv = 106
( p Pw )
(8)

Symbols:
Td = dewpoint temperature (C)
Pw = water vapor pressure (hPa)
Pws = water vapor saturation pressure (Pa)
RH = relative humidity (%)
x = mixing ratio (g/kg)
p = atmospheric pressure (hPa)
A = absolute humidity (g/m3)
T = temperature (K)
h = enthalpy (kJ/kg)

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 205


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Height compensated pressure values (QFE, QNH, and HCP) are


calculated using the following equations:

(9)

where:
p = measured air pressure
hQFE = height difference between the barometer and the reference
level (m)
g = 9.81 (m/s2)
R = 287 (J/kg/K)
T = temperature (K)

(10)

where:
hQNH = station elevation (m)
g = 9.81 (m/s2)
R = 287 (J/kg/K)
T0 = 288.15 (K)
= -0.0065 (K/m)

(11)

where:
p = measured air pressure
HHCP = height difference between the barometer and the reference
level (m)

206 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Appendix C _________________________________________________________ Modbus Reference

APPENDIX C
MODBUS REFERENCE

This appendix describes the Modbus functions and data of the


transmitter.

Function Codes
PTU300 supports all Modbus conformance class 0 and class 1 function
codes defined in Open Modbus/TCP Specification, Release 1.0.

Table 43 Supported Function Codes


Function Code Name Notes
01 (0x01) Read Coils Class 1
02 (0x02) Read Discrete Inputs Class 1
03 (0x03) Read Holding Registers Class 0
04 (0x04) Read Input Registers Class 1
05 (0x05) Write Single Coil Class 1
06 (0x06) Write Single Register Class 1
07 (0x07) Read Exception Status Class 1
08 (0x08) Diagnostics
15 (0x0F) Write Multiple Coils Class 2
16 (0x10) Write Multiple Registers Class 0
22 (0x16) Mask Write Register Class 2
23 (0x17) Read/Write Multiple Registers Class 2
43 / 14 (0x2B / 0x0E) Read Device Identification

Class 0 function codes are enough to access all measurement data and
configuration settings of the PTU300 transmitter. In addition, all class 1
and some class 2 commands are also supported giving better
compatibility and allowing more efficient communication when needed.

Modbus diagnostic and device identification data can be read out only
with the function codes dedicated for those purposes (08 and 43 / 14).

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 207


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Register Map
All data available via the Modbus interface is grouped in six contiguous
blocks of registers as described in Table 44 below.

Table 44 PTU300 Modbus Register Blocks


Address Data Format Description
00010068 32-bit IEEE float Measurement data (read-only)
02570290 16-bit signed integer
05130517 Bit field Status registers (read-only)
07690790 32-bit IEEE float Configuration settings
10251035 16-bit signed integer
12811288 Bit field Configuration flags

The addresses are 1-based decimal Modbus data model addresses without
the first digit (e.g. 0xxxx, 1xxxx, 3xxxx, or 4xxxx). Subtract 1 to get
address field values used in Modbus Protocol Data Unit (PDU).

The register map is the same for all Modbus function codes. For
example, function codes 03 and 04 return exactly same result, as do
01 and 02.

Function codes 01 and 02 return 0 if the corresponding register has value


0x0000 and 1 if the register is non-zero. Writing with function codes 05
or 15 effectively writes value 0x0000 or 0x0001 in the register(s).

Data Encoding
All numeric values are available both in 32-bit IEEE floating point and
16-bit signed integer formats.

32-Bit Floating Point Format


Floating point values are represented in standard IEEE 32-bit floating
point format. Least-significant 16 bits of floating point numbers are
placed at the smaller Modbus address as specified in Open Modbus TCP
Specification, Release 1.0. This is also known as little-endian or
Modicon word order.

NOTE Despite the specification, some Modbus masters may expect


big-endian word order (most-significant word first). In such case, you
must select word-swapped floating point format in your Modbus
master for PTU300 Modbus registers.

A quiet NaN value is returned for unavailable values. Writing any NaN
or infinite value is silently ignored. A quiet NaN is, for example,
0x7FC00000; however, the master should understand any NaN value.

208 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Appendix C _________________________________________________________ Modbus Reference

NOTE A complete 32-bit floating point value should be read and written in a
single Modbus transaction (e.g. function codes 05, 06, and 22 do not
have an effect on floating point values).

16-Bit Integer Format


16-bit integer values are scaled to include the necessary decimals
(see corresponding register table for the scaling factor). Negative values
(when applicable) are represented in 2s complement (65535 = -1, 65534
= -2, etc.).

NOTE Measurement parameters with normally positive values (for example,


0 100 %RH) may occasionally return small negative values because of
measurement inaccuracy. These negative values are returned as large 16-
bit integer values (2s complement).

If the scaled value does not fit in the range 065535 (16-bit range), the
value is wrapped to the range by adding or subtracting 65536 as many
times as needed. For example, barometric pressure values are usually
around 1013.25 hPa, which is displayed in 16-bit format as 35789 (same
as -29747). You will need to add suitable offset to the 16-bit data in the
Modbus master to get valid value out:

35789 + 65536 = 101325

However, most of the measurement data values do not need any offset.

A zero 16-bit value is returned for unavailable values. There is no way to


distinguish missing values from actual zero values if the zero value is
included in the valid measurement range of the parameter.

NOTE If your Modbus master supports 32-bit floating point values, always use
them instead of 16-bit integer registers.
The use of 16-bit integer values is not recommended in critical
applications because you cannot distinguish true zero values from zero
values generated by measurement failures.
In addition to this, 2s complement makes negative values look like large
positive values, which must be taken into account when utilizing the
16-bit register values.

When writing 16-bit values in configuration registers, they are always


processed as signed integers in the range of -32768+32767. You shall
use the floating point registers to write values outside this 16-bit signed

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 209


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

integer range. Maximum writable value is 32767 also for configuration


registers that do not accept negative values.

Measurement Data (Read-Only)


Table 45 Measurement Data Registers
Name Float Integer Unit
RH 00010002 0257 (0.01) %
T 00030004 0258 (0.01) C
Ta 00050005 0259 (0.01) C
Td 00070008 0260 (0.01) C
Td/f 00090010 0261 (0.01) C
a 00150016 0264 (0.01) g/m
x 00170018 0265 (0.01) g/kg
Tw 00190020 0266 (0.01) C
H2O 00210022 0267 (1) ppmV
pw 00230024 0268 (0.1) hPa
pws 00250026 0269 (0.1) hPa
H 00270028 0270 (0.01) kJ/kg
T 00310032 0272 (0.01) C
P 00430044 0278 (0.01) hPa
QNH 00450046 0279 (0.01) hPa
QFE 00470048 0280 (0.01) hPa
HCP 00490050 0281 (0.01) hPa
P3h 00510052 0282 (0.01) hPa
P1 00530054 0283 (0.01) hPa
P2 00550056 0284 (0.01) hPa
H2O 00650066 0289 (1) ppmW
P3h 00670068 0290 (1)
WMO tendency code

Available measurements depend on the instrument configuration. Values


may be unavailable also in case of device failure. Read status registers or
exception status outputs to check for failures.

NOTE Only real-time data can be read from the instrument. Data that is
recorded in the transmitters memory (internal memory or data logger
module) cannot be read through Modbus.

210 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Appendix C _________________________________________________________ Modbus Reference

Status Registers (Read-Only)


Table 46 Status Registers
Name Address Description
Fault status 0513 1 = No errors
Online status 0514 1 = Online data available
Pressure stability 0515 1 = OK
Error code (bits 150) 0516 Bit field that represents the
Error code (bits 3116) 0517 error codes listed in Table 36
on page 158. Active errors are
set to 1. For example, if bit 14
is set to 1, error code E14 is
active.

Error information can retrieved also with function code 08, sub-function
02.

NOTE Basic status information of the PTU300 transmitter is also available with
the Read Exception Status function code 07. For details, see section
Exception Status Outputs on page 212.

Configuration Registers
Configuration parameter registers are used to configure the measurement.
Writing out-of-range values is silently ignored.

Table 47 Configuration Parameter Registers


Name Float Integer Valid Range
Pressure setting default 07690770 1025 (1) 09999 hPa
value
Pressure setting 07710772 1026 (1) 09999 hPa
temporary value
Chemical purge interval 07730774 1027 (1) 102880 min
Molecular weight for 07750776 1028 (0.001) 0999.999
ppmw calculation g/mol
QNH height 07810782 1031 (0.1) -303000 m
QFE height 07830784 1032 (0.1) 30 m
HCP height 07850786 1033 (0.1) 30 m
Maximum pressure 07870788 1034 (0.01) 010 hPa
change
Maximum pressure 07890790 1035 (0.01) 010 hPa
difference

If you modify the pressure setting repeatedly, modify the temporary


value at register 0771...0772 (1026) instead of the permanent setting at
register 07690770 (1025). Set the temporary value to zero to return to
the default pressure setting.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 211


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Non-metric units are not available on Modbus. If they are needed,


calculate the conversion outside the transmitter.

Configuration flags are used to select some basic options of the


instrument and to manually start the sensor operations.

Table 48 Configuration Flag Registers


Name Address Description
Standard filtering on/off 1281 1 = Filtering on
Extended filtering on/off 1282 1 = Extended filtering on
Automatic chemical purge on/off 1283 1 = Automatic purge on.
See configuration register
07730774 (1027).
Start-up chemical purge on/off 1284 1 = Start-up purge on
Chemical purge in progress 1285 1 = Purge in progress
(write 1 for manual start)
Sensor heating on/off 1287 1 = Sensor heating on
(optional feature)
Pressure compensation 1288 0 = Measured, 1 = Fixed

Flags 1281 and 1282 are mutually exclusive.

The pressure compensation value is set with configuration registers


07690770 (1025) or 07710772 (1026).

Some of the configuration registers might not have an effect depending


on the instrument model and configuration.

Other configuration settings are not usually needed and are not available
using the Modbus interface. The service cable must be used to change
other configuration settings if needed.

Exception Status Outputs


Exception status outputs (read with function code 07) tell the summary of
the PTU300 transmitter status as described in Table 49 below.

Table 49 PTU300 Exception Status Outputs


Output Name Description
0 (0x01) Fault status 1 = No errors
1 (0x02) Online status 1 = Online data available
2 (0x04) Pressure stability 1 = OK

Status information is available also with register access; see section


Status Registers (Read-Only) on page 211.

212 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


Appendix C _________________________________________________________ Modbus Reference

Diagnostic Sub-Functions
PTU300 supports some of the Modbus diagnostic functions described in
the Modbus Application Protocol Specification V1.1b. These diagnostic
functions are accessed with function code 08. See Table 50 below for
details.

Table 50 PTU300 Modbus Diagnostics


Code Sub-Function Name Notes
00 (0x00) Return Query Data
01 (0x01) Restart Communications Cancels the Listen Only mode.
Option
Data field must be set to 00 00
for Restart Communications
Option. Sub-Function 01 with
data field FF 00 is rejected.
02 (0x02) Return Diagnostic Register Non-zero if there are active
transmitter errors.

For same error information, see


status registers 0516 and 0517.
The value of the Diagnostic
Register is a logical OR of these
two status registers.
04 (0x04) Force Listen Only Mode Puts device off-line
10 (0x0A) Clear Counters and Diagnostic Register cannot be
Diagnostic Register cleared
11 (0x0B) Return Bus Message Count Total number of messages seen
on the bus/interface
12 (0x0C) Return Bus Communication Number of messages with bad
Error Count Modbus RTU CRC or Modbus
TCP frame
13 (0x0D) Return Bus Exception Error Number of Modbus exception
Count responses sent
14 (0x0E) Return Slave Message Count Number of Modbus messages
processed
15 (0x0F) Return Slave No Response Number of Modbus messages
Count received without sending a
response. This happens for
received broadcast messages
(Modbus RTU only) or when
PTU300 is in the Listen Only
mode.

Although Modbus Diagnostics are standardized only for serial line


devices, PTU300 supports the same diagnostic functions also on Modbus
TCP.

NOTE Resetting, powering up the transmitter, or reselecting the Modbus mode


(by serial command or with the user interface) resets all Modbus
diagnostic counters and cancels any Listen Only mode.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 213


User's Guide _______________________________________________________________________

Device Identification Objects


PTU300 Modbus conforms to the extended identification level defined in
the Modbus Application Protocol Specification V1.1b. Both stream
access and individual access to the objects is supported.

Table 51 PTU300 Modbus Device Identification


Object Id Object Name Description
0x00 VendorName Vaisala
0x01 ProductCode Product code (e.g. PTU300)
0x02 MajorMinorVersion Software version (e.g. 5.10)
0x03 VendorUrl http://www.vaisala.com/
0x04 ProductName Product name of the instrument
0x80 SerialNumber Serial number (e.g. D0920002)
0x81 CalibrationDate Date of the last calibration
(e.g. 2011-02-07, empty if not
available)
0x82 CalibrationText Information text of the last calibration
(empty if not available)

Exception Responses
Exception responses from the transmitter are according to the Modbus
Application Protocol Specification V1.1b.

Table 52 PTU300 Modbus Exception Responses


Code Name Reason
01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION Unsupported function code
02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS Address out of valid ranges
03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE Otherwise invalid request

Accessing unavailable (unsupported or temporarily missing) registers


inside ranges specified in Table 45 does not generate an exception.
Unavailable value (a quiet NaN for floating point data or 0x8000 for
integer data) is returned instead. An exception is generated only for any
access outside the register blocks defined in section Register Map on
page 208.

214 __________________________________________________________________ M210796EN-G


www.vaisala.com

*M210796EN*
USER'S GUIDE

Vaisala WINDCAP Ultrasonic


Wind Sensor Series
WMT700

M211095EN-E
Vaisala Oyj Phone (int.): +358 9 8949 1
P.O. Box 26 Fax: +358 9 8949 2227
FI-00421 Helsinki
Finland

Visit our Internet pages at www.vaisala.com.

Vaisala 2013

No part of this manual may be reproduced, published or publicly displayed in any form
or by any means, electronic or mechanical (including photocopying), nor may its
contents be modified, translated, adapted, sold or disclosed to a third party without prior
written permission of the copyright holder. Translated manuals and translated portions
of multilingual documents are based on the original English versions. In ambiguous
cases, the English versions are applicable, not the translations.

The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.

This manual does not create any legally binding obligations for Vaisala towards
customers or end users. All legally binding obligations and agreements are included
exclusively in the applicable supply contract or the General Conditions of Sale and
General Conditions of Service of Vaisala.
_________________________________________________________________________________

Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION .......................................................................... 11
About This Manual ................................................................. 11
Contents of This Manual ..................................................... 11
Version Information ............................................................. 12
Related Manuals ................................................................. 12
Documentation Conventions ............................................... 13
Safety ....................................................................................... 13
Recycling ................................................................................ 14
Regulatory Compliances ....................................................... 15
Trademarks ............................................................................. 16
Warranty .................................................................................. 16

CHAPTER 2
PRODUCT OVERVIEW ................................................................................ 17
Introduction to WMT700 ........................................................ 17
Ordering Options ................................................................. 23
Measurement Range...................................................... 23
Temperature Range ....................................................... 23
Heating ........................................................................... 24
Digital Communication Interface .................................... 24
Digital Communication Profile ........................................ 25
Digital Communication Units .......................................... 25
Analog Output Signal for Wind Speed Channel ............. 26
Analog Output Signal for Wind Direction Channel ......... 27
Connection Cables ......................................................... 27
Mounting Adapters ......................................................... 28
Accessories .................................................................... 28
Manual ........................................................................... 29
Example of WMT703 Configuration ............................... 29
Accessories ......................................................................... 30
Bird Cage ....................................................................... 31
WM Verifier .................................................................... 32
Cables ............................................................................ 33
Cable Tightening Tool .................................................... 34

CHAPTER 3
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ..................................................................... 35
Operating Principle ................................................................ 35
Coordinate Systems: Vector and Polar Calculations ......... 38
Wind Speed and Direction Averaging .................................. 40
Scalar Averaging ................................................................. 40
Wind Direction Coasting ................................................ 41
Vector Averaging ................................................................. 41
Measurement Methods .......................................................... 42
Continuous Measurement ................................................... 42

VAISALA _________________________________________________________________________ 1
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Wind Measurement on Request .......................................... 42


Host System Connections and Interfaces ............................ 43
Serial Communication and Analog Output .......................... 45
Serial Communication ............................................................ 45
Digital Communication Interface.......................................... 45
Profiles ................................................................................. 46
Protocols .............................................................................. 47
Measurement and Configuration Modes ............................. 47
Serial Interface Timing ......................................................... 49
Analog Output ......................................................................... 50
Analog Output Types ........................................................... 50
Analog Output Scaling ......................................................... 52
Limitations for Output Signals .............................................. 54
Missing Readings and Error Indication ................................ 55

CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION ............................................................................................ 57
Maritime Installations ............................................................. 57
Selecting Installation Location .............................................. 58
Installation Procedure ............................................................ 62
Unpacking ............................................................................ 62
Mounting .............................................................................. 63
Mounting on Vertical Pole Mast ...................................... 64
Mounting on Horizontal Cross Arm ................................ 68
Checklist for Connection Cables ......................................... 73
Alignment ............................................................................. 74
Alignment Tuning............................................................ 75
Installing Bird Cage ............................................................. 75
Wiring ....................................................................................... 77
Cables .................................................................................. 77
Cable 2 m, Cable 10 m, Cable 15 m, and Cable
26 m ..................................................................................... 78
RS485 for COM2 with Cable 2 m and 10 m ................... 79
RS485 Cable 2 m and RS485 Cable 10 m .......................... 80
Connector Signals ............................................................... 81
Heating ..................................................................................... 82
Heated Transducers ............................................................ 82
Heated Transducers and Arms............................................ 83
Heated Body, Transducers, and Arms ................................ 83
Powering .................................................................................. 84
Operating Power .................................................................. 84
Heating Power ..................................................................... 87
Power and Cable Recommendations for Fully
Heated WMT700 ............................................................ 87
Upgrading from WS425 to WMT700 ...................................... 89
Mounting with WS425 Mounting Kit..................................... 90
Before You Start .................................................................. 94
Mounting Procedure ............................................................ 96
Tightening Connector ..................................................... 97
Checklist for Connection Cables ......................................... 98
Wiring in Retrofit Installations............................................... 99
Using Standard WMT700 Cables ........................................ 99
ROSA Cable 10 m (Analog Outputs) ............................ 100
Using WS425 Cables with Adapters ................................. 101

2 ____________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
_________________________________________________________________________________

Adapter Cable for WS425 Serial Output ...................... 101


Adapter Cable for WS425 Analog Frequency
Output .......................................................................... 102
Adapter Cable for WS425 Analog Voltage Output....... 103
Differences between WMT700 and WS425 Analog
Output Signals ................................................................... 104
Powering in Retrofit Installations ....................................... 105

CHAPTER 5
OPERATION ............................................................................................... 107
Serial Connection to WMT700 ............................................. 107
Communicating with Terminal Software ........................... 107
Entering and Exiting Configuration Mode ......................... 109
OPEN Entering Configuration Mode ............................ 109
CLOSE Exiting Configuration Mode ............................. 109
Configuration ........................................................................ 110
Configuration Overview ..................................................... 110
Parameter Handling Commands ......................................... 111
S Set Parameter ........................................................... 112
G Get Parameter .......................................................... 113
Get All Parameters ....................................................... 113
Get Specified Parameters ............................................ 113
BAUD Display or Set Port Settings .............................. 114
Set Port Settings .......................................................... 114
Display Port Settings .................................................... 114
Wind Measurement Control Commands ............................ 115
MEAS Single Wind Measurement ................................ 115
START Start Continuous Measurement ....................... 115
STOP Stop Wind Measurement ................................... 115
Diagnostics and Support Commands ................................ 116
ERRORS Get Error Codes and Counts ....................... 116
CLEARERR Reset Error Codes and Counts................ 117
POLL Get Message ...................................................... 117
RESET Reset CPU ....................................................... 117
Information Commands ....................................................... 117
? Display Command Set ............................................... 117
H Display Help and Messages ..................................... 117
VERSION Show Firmware Version .............................. 118
WIND_GET Get Calibration Data ................................. 118
Configuration Parameters ................................................... 118
User-Configurable Data Messages ..................................... 119
Configuring Data Messages .............................................. 119
Items for Data Messages ............................................. 119
Status Flags ...................................................................... 123
Loading Settings from Configuration File .......................... 124
Operating WMT700 ............................................................... 126
Operating WMT700 with Terminal Program ..................... 126
Data Messages ................................................................. 127
WMT700 Data Message 21 ......................................... 129
WMT700 Data Message 22 ......................................... 129
WMT700 Data Message 23 ......................................... 130
WMT700 Data Message 24 ......................................... 131
WMT700 Data Message 25 ......................................... 132
ROSA - MES12 Data Message .................................... 133

VAISALA _________________________________________________________________________ 3
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Missing Readings .............................................................. 133


Error Indication .................................................................. 134
Measurement Mode Commands ......................................... 135
WMT700 Profile Commands ............................................. 135
MEAS Start Measurement ....................................... 136
OPEN Enter Configuration Mode ............................. 136
POLL Poll Data ........................................................ 137
SLEEP Enter Low-Power Mode ............................... 137
ROSA - MES12 Profile Commands ................................... 138
M 12 Poll MES12 Data Message ............................. 138
Operating WMT700 in WS425 Analog Output Mode ......... 139
Analog Output Settings ...................................................... 139
Wind Speed Output .............................................................. 141
Frequency .......................................................................... 141
Voltage ............................................................................... 142
Wind Direction Output .......................................................... 143
Limitations for Output Signals ............................................ 144
Missing Readings and Error Indication .............................. 144
Operating WMT700 with WS425 and SDI-12 Profiles ........ 145
Communication Profiles ...................................................... 145
Changing Communication Profile ...................................... 145
Operating WMT700 with Terminal Program ....................... 146
Entering Configuration Mode .............................................. 147
WS425 F/G ASOS Profile...................................................... 148
Configurable Parameters ................................................... 148
WS425 F/G ASOS Commands ......................................... 149
WA Fetch Averaged Wind Speed and
Direction ....................................................................... 150
WS Fetch Internal Diagnostics Information ............. 150
WS425 F/G ASOS Data Message..................................... 152
WS425 A/B NMEA Standard Profile .................................... 154
Configurable Parameters ................................................... 154
WS425 A/B NMEA Standard Data Message ..................... 155
Missing Readings ......................................................... 155
WS425 NMEA Extended Profile (v. 0183) ........................... 156
Configurable Parameters ................................................... 156
WS425 A/B NMEA Extended Commands ......................... 157
WS425 A/B NMEA Extended Data Message .................... 158
Missing Readings ......................................................... 158
WS425 A/B ASCII Profile ...................................................... 159
Configurable Parameters ................................................... 159
WS425 A/B ASCII Commands .......................................... 160
I Identify Sensor ....................................................... 160
Wx Start Measurement ............................................ 160
Missing Readings ......................................................... 162
WS425 A/B WAT11 Profile ................................................... 163
Configurable Parameters ................................................... 163
WS425 A/B WAT11 Commands ........................................ 163
Missing Readings ......................................................... 164
SDI-12 Profile (v 1.3) ............................................................. 165
Configurable Parameters ................................................... 166
SDI-12 Commands ............................................................ 167
?! Address Query ..................................................... 168
a! Acknowledge Active ............................................. 169

4 ____________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
_________________________________________________________________________________

aAb! Change Address ............................................. 170


aC! Start Concurrent Measurement ........................ 171
aD0! Send Data ....................................................... 172
aI! Send Identification .............................................. 172
aM! Start Measurement ........................................... 173
aV! Start Verification ................................................ 175
SDI-12 Data Messages ..................................................... 176
WS425 A/B SDI-12 Message for C and M
Command..................................................................... 176
Missing Readings .................................................... 176
WS425 A/B SDI-12 Message for V Command ............ 177
Requesting Cyclic Redundancy Check ........................ 177

CHAPTER 6
MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................... 179
Periodic Maintenance .......................................................... 180
Visual Inspection .................................................................. 180
Cleaning ................................................................................ 180
Testing Proper Operation .................................................... 181

CHAPTER 7
TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................... 183
Problem Situations ............................................................... 183
Error and Event Messages .................................................. 185
Restoring Serial Port Settings ............................................ 186
Technical Support ................................................................ 188
Product Returns ................................................................... 188

CHAPTER 8
TECHNICAL DATA .................................................................................... 189
Dimensions ........................................................................... 193

APPENDIX A
COMPLETE COMMAND SET FOR WMT700 ........................................... 195

APPENDIX B
TYPICAL SYSTEM ENVIRONMENTS....................................................... 197

APPENDIX C
DEFAULT SETTINGS FOR DIFFERENT COMMUNICATION
PROFILES .................................................................................................. 201

APPENDIX D
CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS ........................................................... 205

VAISALA _________________________________________________________________________ 5
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

APPENDIX E
WMT700 NMEA MWV PROFILE ................................................................ 209
Configurable Parameters ................................................... 210
WMT700 NMEA MWV Commands ................................... 211
WMT700 NMEA MWV Data Message .............................. 212
Missing Readings ......................................................... 212

APPENDIX F
ACCESSORIES .......................................................................................... 213

APPENDIX G
CERTIFICATES .......................................................................................... 217

6 ____________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
_________________________________________________________________________________

List of Figures
Figure 1 WMT700 Wind Sensor ............................................................. 18
Figure 2 WMT700 Wind Sensor from Below .......................................... 19
Figure 3 FIX70 Mounting Kit ................................................................... 20
Figure 4 WS425FIX60-POM................................................................... 21
Figure 5 WMT70FIX60-POM .................................................................. 21
Figure 6 WS425FIX60-RST and WS425FIX60 ...................................... 22
Figure 7 WMT70FIX60-RST ................................................................... 22
Figure 8 Bird Cage ................................................................................. 31
Figure 9 WM Verifier ............................................................................... 32
Figure 10 Cable Tightening Tool .............................................................. 34
Figure 11 Ultrasonic Measurement Principle ........................................... 36
Figure 12 Measurement Paths of WMT700 ............................................. 37
Figure 13 Different Wind Speed and Direction Presentations
(Direction Offset Is 0) ............................................................... 39
Figure 14 Example of Wind Direction Averaging ...................................... 41
Figure 15 External Interfaces of WMT700 ................................................ 44
Figure 16 Configuration and Measurement Modes .................................. 48
Figure 17 Timing for RS-232, RS-485, and RS-422 Interfaces ................ 49
Figure 18 Frequency Output ..................................................................... 51
Figure 19 Recommended Location in Open Area .................................... 59
Figure 20 Recommended Mast Length on Top of Building ...................... 60
Figure 21 Minimum Distance between Two WMT700 Devices
Installed at Same Height .......................................................... 61
Figure 22 Sensor Handling ....................................................................... 62
Figure 23 WMT700 and Transportation Damper ...................................... 63
Figure 24 Inserting Cable in Cable Tightening Tool ................................. 64
Figure 25 Attaching Connector to WMT700 ............................................. 65
Figure 26 WMT700 on Side of Pole Mast ................................................ 66
Figure 27 WMT700 on Top of Pole Mast ................................................. 67
Figure 28 WMT700 on Cross Arm with Array Facing Up ......................... 69
Figure 29 WMT700 on Cross Arm with Array Facing Down .................... 70
Figure 30 Tightening Connector with Cable Tightening Tool ................... 71
Figure 31 Tightening Connector without Cable Tightening Tool .............. 72
Figure 32 Correctly Aligned WMT700 ...................................................... 74
Figure 33 Incorrectly Aligned WMT700 and Resulting Offset Error ......... 75
Figure 34 Bird Cage and Bird Cage Straps .............................................. 76
Figure 35 COM2 RS485 Wiring ................................................................ 79
Figure 36 Pins for 17-Pin M23 Connector ................................................ 81
Figure 37 Wiring of Non-heated WMT700 Versions................................. 85
Figure 38 Operating Supply Current Consumption .................................. 86
Figure 39 Operating Supply Power Consumption .................................... 86
Figure 40 Wiring of Heated WMT700 Versions, Part 1 ............................ 88
Figure 41 Wiring of Heated WMT700 Versions, Part 2 ............................ 88
Figure 42 Retrofit Installation to Pole Mast .............................................. 91
Figure 43 Retrofit Installation to Cross Arm with Array Facing Up ........... 92
Figure 44 Retrofit Installation to Cross Arm with Array Facing
Down ........................................................................................ 93
Figure 45 FIX30, WS425FIX60-RST, and WS425FIX60-POM ................ 94
Figure 46 Mounting Adapter for FIX30, WS425FIX60 (Left), and
Mounting Adapter for FIX70 (Right) ......................................... 95
Figure 47 WS425 Adapter Cable.............................................................. 96
Figure 48 Wind Speed Frequency Analog Output with WS425
Cable and Adapter Cable for Analog Frequency Output ....... 141

VAISALA _________________________________________________________________________ 7
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 49 Wind Speed Voltage Analog Output with WS425 Cable


and Adapter Cable for Analog Voltage Output ....................... 142
Figure 50 Wind Direction Voltage Output with WS425 Cable and
Adapter Cable ......................................................................... 143
Figure 51 Testing WMT700 with WM Verifier ......................................... 182
Figure 52 WMT700 Dimensions in Millimeters ....................................... 193
Figure 53 FIX70 Mounting Kit Dimensions in Millimeters ....................... 194
Figure 54 System Environment with Serial Port COM1 Only ................. 197
Figure 55 System Environment with Analog Output Only....................... 198
Figure 56 System Environment with Serial Ports COM1 and
COM2...................................................................................... 199
Figure 57 System Environment with Backup Battery.............................. 200
Figure 58 Complete Set of Accessories.................................................. 214

8 ____________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
_________________________________________________________________________________

List of Tables
Table 1 Manual Revisions ..................................................................... 12
Table 2 Related Manuals ...................................................................... 12
Table 3 Environmental Tests................................................................. 15
Table 4 Electromagnetic Compatibility Tests ........................................ 16
Table 5 Measurement Ranges of Different Sensor Types .................... 23
Table 6 Temperature Ranges ............................................................... 23
Table 7 Heating ..................................................................................... 24
Table 8 Digital Communication Interface .............................................. 24
Table 9 Digital Communication Profile .................................................. 25
Table 10 Digital Communication Options ................................................ 25
Table 11 Output Configuration ................................................................ 26
Table 12 Analog Output Signal for Wind Direction.................................. 27
Table 13 Analog Output Configuration .................................................... 28
Table 14 Mounting Adapters ................................................................... 28
Table 15 Accessories .............................................................................. 28
Table 16 Manual ...................................................................................... 29
Table 17 Cables ...................................................................................... 33
Table 18 Factory Settings for Analog Wind Speed Output ..................... 52
Table 19 Factory Default Settings for Analog Wind Direction
Output ....................................................................................... 52
Table 20 Common Transfer Function Settings for AOUT1 (WS) ............ 53
Table 21 Common Transfer Function Settings for AOUT2 (WD) ............ 53
Table 22 Connecting Cable 2 m (227567SP),
Cable 10 m (227568SP), Cable 15 m (237890SP), and
Cable 26 m (237889SP) ........................................................... 78
Table 23 COM2 RS485 Wiring ................................................................ 79
Table 24 Connecting RS485 Cable 2 m (228259SP) and
RS485 Cable 10 m (228260SP) ............................................... 80
Table 25 Pin-Out for 17-Pin M23 Connector ........................................... 81
Table 26 Operating Power Supply Voltage Requirements ..................... 84
Table 27 Heating Power Supply Requirements ...................................... 87
Table 28 Heating Power and Extension Cable ....................................... 87
Table 29 Mounting Kits and Cable Codes ............................................... 95
Table 30 ROSA Cable 10 m (231425SP) ............................................. 100
Table 31 Pin-Outs for WS425 Serial Adapter Cable (227569SP) ......... 101
Table 32 Pin-Outs for WS425 Analog Frequency Output Adapter
Cable ...................................................................................... 102
Table 33 Pin-Outs for WS425 Analog Voltage Output Adapter
Cable ...................................................................................... 103
Table 34 Analog Output Connections ................................................... 104
Table 35 List of Configuration Mode Commands .................................. 111
Table 36 Wind Measurement Items for Data Messages ....................... 120
Table 37 Control Character and Checksum Items for Data
Messages ............................................................................... 120
Table 38 Monitoring Items for Data Messages ..................................... 121
Table 39 Status Flags ........................................................................... 123
Table 40 Data Messages ...................................................................... 128
Table 41 Measurement Mode Commands ............................................ 136
Table 42 Required Parameters for WS425 Analog Output
Operation Mode ...................................................................... 140
Table 43 Configurable Parameters for WS425 F/G ASOS Profile ........ 148
Table 44 WS425 F/G ASOS Commands .............................................. 149
Table 45 WS425 F/G ASOS Data Message ......................................... 152

VAISALA _________________________________________________________________________ 9
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Table 46 Configurable Parameters for WS425 A/B NMEA


Standard Profile ...................................................................... 154
Table 47 Configurable Parameters for WS425 A/B NMEA
Extended Profile ..................................................................... 156
Table 48 Checksum Table ..................................................................... 157
Table 49 Configurable Parameters for WS425 A/B ASCII Profile ......... 159
Table 50 WS425 A/B ASCII Commands ............................................... 160
Table 51 WS425 A/B ASCII Data Message .......................................... 161
Table 52 Configurable Parameters for WS425 A/B WAT11 Profile ...... 163
Table 53 Configurable Parameters for SDI-12 Profile ........................... 166
Table 54 SDI-12 Commands ................................................................. 167
Table 55 Some Problem Situations and Their Remedies...................... 183
Table 56 Error and Event Messages ..................................................... 185
Table 57 Restored Serial Port Settings ................................................. 187
Table 58 Wind Speed ............................................................................ 189
Table 59 Wind Direction ........................................................................ 189
Table 60 Outputs ................................................................................... 190
Table 61 General ................................................................................... 191
Table 62 Accessories............................................................................. 192
Table 63 Command Set for All Profiles.................................................. 195
Table 64 Default Settings for Different Digital Communication
Profiles .................................................................................... 202
Table 65 Parameters without Protocol-Specific Default Value .............. 203
Table 66 Parameter Descriptions .......................................................... 205
Table 67 Configurable Parameters for WMT700 NMEA
MWV Profile ............................................................................ 210

10 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 1 _________________________________________________________ General Information

CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION

This chapter provides general notes for the manual and the
WMT700 series.

About This Manual


This manual provides information for installing, operating, and
maintaining Vaisala WINDCAP Ultrasonic Wind Sensors
WMT701, WMT702, and WMT703, commonly referred to as
WMT700.

Contents of This Manual


This manual consists of the following chapters:

- Chapter 1, General Information, provides general notes for the


manual and the WMT700 series.
- Chapter 2, Product Overview, introduces the features,
advantages, and product nomenclature of WMT700.
- Chapter 3, Functional Description, describes the functionality
of WMT700.
- Chapter 4, Installation, contains information that is needed to
install WMT700.
- Chapter 5, Operation, contains information on WMT700
configuration, operating commands, protocols, and data
messages.
- Chapter 6, Maintenance, contains information on performing
visual inspection, cleaning, and verifying the operation of
WMT700.
- Chapter 7, Troubleshooting, describes common problems, their
probable causes and remedies, and provides contact
information for technical support.
- Chapter 8, Technical Data, provides the technical data of
WMT700.
- Appendix A, Complete Command Set for WMT700, lists all
the commands available for WMT700.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 11
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

- Appendix B, Typical System Environments, lists the most


typical WMT700 system environments.
- Appendix C, Default Settings for Different Communication
Profiles, lists the default settings for different digital
communication profiles.
- Appendix D, Configuration Parameters, lists the WMT700
configuration parameters.
- Appendix E, WMT700 NMEA MWV Profile, lists the
configurable parameters, commands, and data messages of the
WMT700 NMEA MWV profile.
- Appendix F, Accessories, lists all the accessories available for
WMT700.
- Appendix G, Certificates, contains copies of certificates issued
for WMT700.

Version Information
Table 1 Manual Revisions
Manual Code Description
M211095EN-E August 2013. This manual. Combined Users Guide
and Technical Reference. Updated Heating with
new fully heated WMT700. Updated Ordering
Options and Accessories.
M211095EN-D Previous version.
M211095EN-A First version of this manual.

Related Manuals
Table 2 Related Manuals
Manual Code Manual Name
M211218EN Vaisala WINDCAP Ultrasonic Wind Sensor Series
WMT700 Quick Reference Guide

12 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 1 _________________________________________________________ General Information

Documentation Conventions
Throughout the manual, important safety considerations are
highlighted as follows:

WARNING Warning alerts you to a serious hazard. If you do not read and follow
instructions very carefully at this point, there is a risk of injury or even
death.

CAUTION Caution warns you of a potential hazard. If you do not read and follow
instructions carefully at this point, the product could be damaged or
important data could be lost.

NOTE Note highlights important information on using the product.

Safety
Vaisala WINDCAP Ultrasonic Wind Sensor WMT701,
WMT702, or WMT703 delivered to you has been tested for safety
and approved as shipped from the factory. Note the following
precautions:

WARNING To protect personnel (and the wind sensor), a lightning rod must be
installed with the tip at least one meter above WMT700. The rod must be
properly grounded, compliant with all local applicable safety regulations.
Do not install the wind sensor above the top of the lightning protection
rod.

WARNING If ice or snow accumulates on WMT700 or the mast, it can fall and cause
injury to persons below.

WARNING Some WMT700 product versions provide heating for transducers and/or
array arms. To avoid injury, do not touch the heated parts of the wind
sensor when the heating is enabled.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 13
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

WARNING Make sure that you connect only de-energized wires.

WARNING Using a long cable between different units (sensors, transmitters, power
supplies, and displays) can cause a lethal surge voltage, if a lightning
strike occurs in the vicinity. Always apply proper grounding procedures
and follow the requirements of the local Electrical Code.

WARNING Do not install WMT700 when there is a risk of thunderstorm or lightning


activity in the area.

CAUTION Do not modify the unit. There are no user-serviceable parts inside.
Improper modification can damage the product or lead to malfunction.

CAUTION When handling WMT700, do not rotate, pull, strike, bend, scrape or
touch the transducers with sharp objects. Any impact on the wind sensor
array may damage the device.

CAUTION The heating power supply wires of WMT700 are internally connected to
each other. If the connection cable has two positive heating supply wires,
both must be connected to each other. Leaving one terminal unconnected
or connecting it to the ground may cause a WMT700 malfunction or a
short circuit in the power supply.

Recycling
Recycle all applicable material.

Dispose of batteries and the unit according to statutory regulations.


Do not dispose of with regular household refuse.

14 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 1 _________________________________________________________ General Information

Regulatory Compliances
Vaisala WINDCAP Ultrasonic Wind Sensor WMT701,
WMT702, and WMT703 comply with the performance and
environmental test standards listed in Table 3 below.

Wind tunnel tests have been performed according to Sonic


anemometers/thermometers - Acceptance test methods for mean
wind measurements ISO 16622:2002 and Measnet Anemometer
Calibration Procedure Version 2, October 2009.

Table 3 Environmental Tests


Test Setup According to
Wind driven rain MIL-STD 810G Method 506.5 and
Telcordia GR-487-Core
Salt fog VDA 621 - 415 / IEC 60068-2-52
Leak test (Ingression Protection) IEC 60529 class IP67
Vibration IEC 60068-2-6 / IEC 60945 /
Lloyd's test
Shock MIL-STD-202G, Method 213B, cond. J
Dry heat IEC 60068-2-2 / IEC 60068-2-48
Damp heat cyclic IEC 60068-2-30, Test Db
Damp heat IEC 60068-2-78
Low temperature IEC 60068-2-1 Test Ab/Ad
Free fall (rough handling) IEC 60068-2-31
Change of temperature IEC 60068-2-14

EMC tests are based on a European product family standard:


EN 61326-1:2006 (Electrical equipment for measurement, control
and laboratory use - EMC requirements for use in industrial
locations) and EN 60945:2002 (Maritime Navigation and
Radiocommunication Equipment and Systems - General
Requirements - Methods of Testing and Required Test Results).

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 15
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Table 4 Electromagnetic Compatibility Tests


Test Setup According to
Conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-6
EFT immunity IEC 61000-4-4
Surge immunity IEC 61000-4-5
ESD immunity IEC 61000-4-2
High voltage (Dielectric tests) IEC 60947-2
1)
Conducted emissions CISPR 22
Radiated emissions CISPR 22
RF field immunity IEC 61000-4-3
Insulation resistance IEC 60092-504
1)
Limits according to IEC 60945: Maritime navigation and radiocommunication
equipment and systems - General requirements - Methods of testing and
required test results. 4th edition, 2002-08. See Det Norske Veritas Certificate in
Appendix G on page 217.

Trademarks
The WMT700 series wind sensors are based on the advanced,
patented Vaisala WINDCAP wind measurement technology that
ensures accurate results in all wind directions. The effects of
temperature, humidity, and pressure are also fully compensated.

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in


the United States and/or other countries.

Warranty
Visit our Internet pages for our standard warranty terms and
conditions: www.vaisala.com/warranty.

Please observe that any such warranty may not be valid in case of
damage due to normal wear and tear, exceptional operating
conditions, negligent handling or installation, or unauthorized
modifications. Please see the applicable supply contract or
Conditions of Sale for details of the warranty for each product.

16 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 2 ___________________________________________________________ Product Overview

CHAPTER 2
PRODUCT OVERVIEW

This chapter introduces the features, advantages, and product


nomenclature of WMT700.

Introduction to WMT700
Vaisala WINDCAP Ultrasonic Wind Sensor WMT700 measures
wind speed and direction, and sends the measurement results to
data acquisition systems. WMT700 forms part of the Vaisala
weather measurement offering suitable for systems and stand-
alone installations.

The WMT700 series consists of three product types with different


measurement ranges: WMT701, WMT702, and WMT703.
Additionally, you can select heating functions that shield the array
and/or the transducers and the sensor body from ice and snow
buildups in cold climates.

The WMT700 series wind sensors are based on the advanced,


patented Vaisala WINDCAP wind measurement technology that
ensures accurate results in all wind directions. The effects of
temperature, humidity, and pressure are also fully compensated.

Since the WMT700 series wind sensors have no moving parts,


they are virtually maintenance-free. The performance of the
sensors does not degrade with wear nor is it affected by natural
contaminants such as salt, dust, or sand.

The WMT700 series wind sensors support a wide range of


communication options. You can connect the wind sensors
directly to a variety of data acquisition systems without additional
converters or adapters.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 17
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

WMT700 is configured at the factory according to the customer's


order, and it is ready for operation directly after the installation. If
required, the user also has a wide range of configuration options
for the wind sensor and the measurement settings.

WMT700 can be equipped with accessories to tailor the


instrument to match different user-specific needs. The accessories
include a bird deterrent solution and a field-usable calibration
verifier.

1003-005

Figure 1 WMT700 Wind Sensor

The following numbers refer to Figure 1 above:


The array consists of 1, 2, and 3:
1 = Transducers (3 pcs)
2 = Top of WMT700. There is a north arrow on top of WMT700.
3 = Transducer arms (3 pcs)
4 = Enclosure
5 = Mounting screw
6 = Mounting adapter
7 = Type label

18 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 2 ___________________________________________________________ Product Overview

1104-065

Figure 2 WMT700 Wind Sensor from Below

The following numbers refer to Figure 2 above:


1 = Waterproof vent
2 = Mounting adapter screw (3 pcs; use Allen key 4 mm)
3 = 17-pin M23 male connector

NOTE Do not open the sensor. There are no user-serviceable parts inside.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 19
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

1104-064

Figure 3 FIX70 Mounting Kit

The following numbers refer to Figure 3 above:


FIX70 consists of :
1 = Fix body
2 = Removable mast guide with mounting hardware
3 = Mounting hardware (M6 nuts, washers)
4 = U bolts for 30 mm mast (2 pcs)
5 = U bolts for 60 mm mast (2 pcs)

20 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 2 ___________________________________________________________ Product Overview

1305-001

Figure 4 WS425FIX60-POM

The following numbers refer to Figure 4 above:


1 = Clamp
2 = Label

1305-002

Figure 5 WMT70FIX60-POM

The following numbers refer to Figure 5 above:


1 = Clamp
2 = Label

VAISALA________________________________________________________________________ 21
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

1305-003

Figure 6 WS425FIX60-RST and WS425FIX60

The following numbers refer to Figure 6 above:


1 = Screw hole
2 = Label
3 = Clamp

1305-004

Figure 7 WMT70FIX60-RST

The following numbers refer to Figure 7 above:


1 = Screw holes
2 = Label
3 = Clamp

22 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 2 ___________________________________________________________ Product Overview

Ordering Options
A WMT700 unit can be configured by ordering options to suit
versatile customer needs. You can reconfigure the following
options:

- Digital communication interface


- Digital communication profile
- Digital communication units
- Analog output signals for wind speed channel
- Analog output signals for wind direction channel

Measurement Range
Ordering option 1, Measurement Range, defines the wind speed
operation range for the sensor. The maximum reported value of
wind speed 40, 65, or 75 m/s, depending on the selected option as
shown in Table 5 below.
Table 5 Measurement Ranges of Different Sensor Types
Sensor Type Measurement Range
1 WMT701 up to 40 m/s
2 WMT702 up to 65 m/s
3 WMT703 up to 75 m/s
A WMT701 up to 40 m/s + Accredited Wind Calibration
B WMT702 up to 65 m/s + Accredited Wind Calibration
C WMT703 up to 75 m/s + Accredited Wind Calibration

Temperature Range
Ordering option 2, Temperature Range, defines the operating
temperature range for the sensor as shown in Table 6 below.
Table 6 Temperature Ranges
Option Temperature Range
A -10 ... +60 C
B -40 ... +60 C
C -55 ... +70 C

Note that the temperature range is not connected to heating in any


way. If you operate in a demanding environmental climate where
ice accumulation is expected, Vaisala recommends that you use a
heated sensor; see Option 4 in Table 7 on page 24.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 23
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Heating
Ordering option 3, Heating, defines if the sensor is equipped with
extra heating for demanding environmental conditions. Option 4
providing full sensor heating is best suited for most demanding
environments. Note that power consumption requirement depends
on the selected heating option.
Table 7 Heating
Option Heating
1 Non-heated
2 Heated transducers (Min. 30 W power supply is needed)
3 Heated transducers and arms (Min. 200 W needed)
4 Heated transducers, arms, and body (Min. 350 W needed)

Digital Communication Interface


Ordering option 4, Digital Communication Interface, defines the
serial line physical interface. Four different standard
communication interfaces are available.

Table 8 Digital Communication Interface


Option Hardware Interface
A RS-485 isolated (1 pair)
B RS-422 isolated
C RS-232 isolated
D SDI-12 isolated

24 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 2 ___________________________________________________________ Product Overview

Digital Communication Profile


Ordering option 5, Digital Communication Profile, defines the
communication protocol used for the sensor. WS425 options are
usable and backwards compatible when replacing WS425 sensor
with a WMT700 unit. MARINE and WIND TURBINE options
are customer-specific profiles.

Table 9 Digital Communication Profile


Option Communication Profile
0 WMT70 - default mode 9600, 8, N, 1 Polled
1 WS425 - ASCII 2400, 8, N, 1 Polled
2 WS425 - NMEA Extended (v 0183) 9600, 8, N, 1 Auto send 1/s
3 WS425 - SDI-12 (v 1.3) 1200, 7, E, 1 Polled
4 WS425 - ASOS 2400, 8, N, 1 Polled
5 ROSA - MES12 9600, 8, N, 1 Polled
6 US AWOS - NMEA Standard 2400, 8, N, 1 Autosend 5/s
7 FAA - Federal 9600, 8, N, 1 Polled
8 AWS520 - NMEA Extended (v 0183) 4800, 8, N, 1 Auto send 1/s
A MARINE1 (v 0183) 4800, 8, N, 1 Auto send 1/s
B MARINE2 (v 0183) 9600, 8, N, 1 Auto send 1/s
C WIND TURBINE1 (default) 9600, 8, N, 1 Polled
D WIND TURBINE2 (v 0183) 9600, 8, N, 1 Auto send 1/s

Digital Communication Units


Ordering option 6, Unit Definition for Digital Communication,
offers four different digital communication options.

Table 10 Digital Communication Options


Option Unit Used
A Meters per second
B Knots
C Miles per hour
D Kilometers per hour

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 25
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Analog Output Signal for Wind Speed Channel


Ordering option 7, Analog Output for Wind Speed, can be
disabled or factory-configured for 8 different modes. WS425
options are usable and backwards compatible when replacing
WS425 sensor with a WMT700 unit.
Table 11 Output Configuration
Option Output Configuration
0 Disabled
1 Voltage output 100 mV/m/s
0 mV = 0 m/s
4000 mV = 40 m/s (WMT701 maximum wind speed)
6500 mV = 65 m/s (WMT702 maximum wind speed)
7500 mV = 75 m/s (WMT703 maximum wind speed)
2 Reserved for future use
3 Current output 420 mA, offset 4 mA
4 mA = 0 m/s
20 mA = 40 m/s (WMT701, 0.4 mA/m/s)
20 mA = 65 m/s (WMT702, 0.24615 mA/m/s)
20 mA = 75 m/s (WMT703, 0.21333 mA/m/s)
Error indication sets output to 2 mA
4 Current output 0.2 mA/m/s
0 mA = 0 m/s
8 mA = 40 m/s (WMT701 maximum wind speed)
13 mA = 65 m/s (WMT702 maximum wind speed)
15 mA = 75 m/s (WMT703 maximum wind speed)
5 Reserved for future use
6 Frequency output 10 Hz/m/s
0 Hz = 0 m/s
400 Hz = 40 m/s (WMT701 maximum wind speed)
650 Hz = 65 m/s (WMT702 maximum wind speed)
750 Hz = 75 m/s (WMT703 maximum wind speed)
7 WS425 voltage output 8 mV/mph
0 mV = 0 m/s
716 mV = 89.5 mph (WMT701 maximum wind speed)
1116 mV = 145 mph (WMT702 maximum wind speed)
1344 mV = 168 mph (WMT703 maximum wind speed)
8 WS425 frequency output 5 Hz/mph
0 Hz = 0 m/s
447.5 Hz = 89.5 mph (WMT701 maximum wind speed)
725 Hz = 145 mph (WMT702 maximum wind speed)
840 Hz = 168 mph (WMT703 maximum wind speed)
9 Reserved for future use
A Push up output, 10 Hz/m/s
0 Hz = 0 m/s
400 Hz = 40 m/s (WMT701 maximum wind speed)
650 Hz = 65 m/s (WMT702 maximum wind speed)
750 Hz = 75 m/s (WMT703 maximum wind speed)
B Pull down output 10 Hz/m/s
0 Hz = 0 m/s
400 Hz = 40 m/s (WMT701 maximum wind speed)
650 Hz = 65 m/s (WMT702 maximum wind speed)
750 Hz = 75 m/s (WMT703 maximum wind speed)

26 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 2 ___________________________________________________________ Product Overview

Analog Output Signal for Wind Direction


Channel
Ordering option 8 defines Analog Output Signal for Wind
Direction.WS425 Potentiometer output is backward compatible
when replacing WS425 with a WMT700 unit. For different wind
speed and direction representations, see Figure 13 on page 39.
Note that the wind direction offset must be 0 for the for the
readings to correspond with Figure 13.
Table 12 Analog Output Signal for Wind Direction
Selection Output Configuration
0 Disabled
A Voltage output 20 mV/degree
0 mV = 0 degree
7200 mV = 360 degree
B Reserved for future use
C Reserved for future use
D Current output 50 uA/degree
0 uA = 0 degree
18 mA = 360 degree
E Current output 420 mA (44.444 uA/degree)
4 mA = 0 degree
20 mA = 360 degree km/h
F WS425 Potentiometer output
0% of Vref = 0 degree
100% of Vref = 360 degree

Connection Cables
Ordering option 9 defines connection cables. There are several
different cables of different lengths for different purposes, as
shown in Table 13 on page 28.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 27
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Table 13 Analog Output Configuration


Selection Cable type
1 No cables
2 Cable 2 m, cable connector, open leads on one end
3 Cable 10 m, cable connector, open leads on one end
4 MAWS cable 10 m
5 AWS520 cable 10 m. Shield connected to PE pin
6 Adapter cable for WS425 serial
7 Adapter cable for WS425 analog frequency output
8 RS485 cable 2 m, cable connector, open leads on one
end
9 RS485 Cable 10 m, cable connector, open leads on one
end
A Adapter cable for WS425 analog voltage output
B AWS520 cable 10 m. Shield not connected to PE pin.
C ROSA analog cable 10 m, cable connector, open leads on
one end
D Junction Box with Cable 2 m
E Cable 15 m, cable connector, open leads on one end
F Cable 26 m, cable connector, open leads on one end

Mounting Adapters
Ordering option 10 defines mounting adapters. There are several
different mounting adapters for different purposes, as shown in
Table 14 below.

Table 14 Mounting Adapters


Option Adapter Type
A Adapter 228869 only. Standard adapter, no fix
B Adapter 228869 with WMT70FIX70 fixing mechanics. Also
suitable for inverted mounting. Standard adapter for
general purpose
C Adapter 228869 with WMT700FIX60-POM. Standard
adapter with plastic fix for 60 mm pole
D Adapter 228869 with WMT700FIX60-RST Standard
adapter with stainless steel fix for 60 mm pole
E Adapter 22877 only (used for old WS425
FIX30/WS425FIX60), WS425-compatible adapter, no fix

NOTE Ordering option 11 is reserved for future use.

Accessories
Ordering option 12 defines WMT700 accessories.

Table 15 Accessories
Option Accessories
A No accessories
B Bird cage WMT70BirdKit

28 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 2 ___________________________________________________________ Product Overview

Manual
Ordering option 13, Manual, defines available manual version and
possible special package design.

Table 16 Manual
Option Manual
1 No manual
2 English manual
3 Japanese manual
4 Chinese manual
5 Russian manual
6 Deif manual and packing

Example of WMT703 Configuration


WMT703 C4A2A003B1A2
| | | | | | | | | | | | |_English manual included
| | | | | | | | | | | |__No accessories
| | | | | | | | | | |___Option 11 not in use
| | | | | | | | | | ____FIX70 mounting adapter included
| | | | | | | | |_____Cable 10m included
| | | | | | | |______Analog signal for wind direction disabled
| | | | | | |_______ Analog signal for wind speed disabled
| | | | | |________ Used unit: m/s
| | | | |__________WS425 NMEA Extended messaging in use
| | | |___________Physical serial line interface is RS-485
| | |____________Transducers, arms, and body are heated
| |______________-55 to +70 temperature range model
|________________WMT703 measurement range up to 75 m/s

NOTE Vaisala recommends using heated versions of WMT700 in


environmental conditions where snow and ice build-up is possible.
For more information on the heating functionality, see section Heating on
page 82.

NOTE If required, you can change the digital communication interface, digital
communication profile, digital communication units, analog output
signals for wind speed channel, and analog output signals for wind
direction channel. To change the product version characteristics listed in
Table 9 on page 25, contact Vaisala Service Center.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 29
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Accessories
WMT700 can be tailored to your needs with several accessories.
The accessories include, for example, mounting adapters for
different mast diameters, cables for different host systems and
preferred communication types, a bird prevention kit, and a field
calibration kit.

When specifying your WMT700, you can order the optional


FIX70 universal mounting adapter, a bird cage, WM Verifier, and
cables as accessories for WMT700.

For the codes of the accessories that you need to order separately,
see Table 62 on page 192. For a complete list of accessories, see
Appendix F, Accessories, on page 213.

30 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 2 ___________________________________________________________ Product Overview

Bird Cage
Vaisala recommends using the optional bird cage in areas with
large bird populations. The cage is designed to prevent large birds
from disturbing the measurement. It has been tested in a wind
tunnel with wind speeds of up to 40 m/s without noticeable effects
on the wind speed and direction measurement.

You can install the bird cage on a mounted WMT700 series wind
sensor without dismounting the wind sensor itself. In cold
climates, take into account that accumulated snow or ice on the
bird cage can disturb the measurement. In such conditions,
consider performing frequent visual inspections of WMT700 to
avoid ice or snow build-ups.

1005-028

Figure 8 Bird Cage

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 31
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

WM Verifier
The optional WM Verifier is a small echo-free chamber for
testing the mechanical integrity of WMT700 and performing one-
point calibration. The verifier ensures that the array is undamaged
and the transducers are parallel to each other. You can perform
the verifier test in a laboratory or in the field.

For instructions on performing the verifier test, see section


Testing Proper Operation on page 181.

1004-119

Figure 9 WM Verifier

32 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 2 ___________________________________________________________ Product Overview

Cables
Select the required cables according to your operating
environment.

Table 17 Cables
Order Code Description Purpose
WMT70Conn Cable connector Cable
227567SP Cable 2 m, cable connector, open leads Used for analog output or serial
on one end communication with two serial ports.
227568SP Cable 10 m, cable connector, open Used for analog output or serial
leads on one end communication with two serial ports.
237890SP Cable 15 m, cable connector, open Used for analog output or serial
leads on one end communication with two serial ports.
237889SP Cable 26 m, cable connector, open Used for analog output or serial
leads on one end communication with two serial ports.
228259SP RS485 cable 2 m, cable connector, Used for serial communication with RS-
open leads on one end 485 interface.
228260SP RS485 Cable 10 m, cable connector, Used for serial communication with RS-
open leads on one end 485 interface.
227565SP MAWS cable 10 m Used for connecting WMT700 to
Vaisala Automatic Weather Station
MAWS.
229807SP AWS520 cable 10 m, shield connected Used for connecting WMT700 to
to PE pin Vaisala Fixed Site Observation System
AWS520.
227566SP AWS520 cable 10 m, shield not Used for connecting WMT700 to
connected to PE pin Vaisala Fixed Site Observation System
AWS520.
231425SP ROSA analog cable 10 m, cable Used for connecting WMT700 to
connector, open leads on one end Vaisala Road Weather System ROSA.
227569SP Adapter cable for WS425 serial Used for connecting the WS425 cable
to WMT700. Only applicable for retrofit
installations.
227570SP Adapter cable for WS425 analog Used for connecting the WS425 cable
frequency output to WMT700. Only applicable for retrofit
installations.
227571SP Adapter cable for WS425 analog Used for connecting the WS425 cable
voltage output to WMT700. Only applicable for retrofit
installations.
ASM210719SP Junction Box with Cable 2 meters Used when a cable longer than 10
meters is needed. Junction Box
contains terminal blocks that extend the
2-meter cable to a needed length.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 33
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Cable Tightening Tool


WMT700 is shipped with a cable tightening tool (237888SP).
When a cable is inserted in the cable tightening tool, it is easier to
grip and rotate the cable when connecting it to WMT700. After
tightening, the cable tightening tool can be left in place.

1306-028

Figure 10 Cable Tightening Tool

34 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 3 _______________________________________________________ Functional Description

CHAPTER 3
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

This chapter describes the functionality of WMT700.

Operating Principle
WMT700 uses the Vaisala WINDCAP ultrasonic sensor
technology in wind measurement. The sensor has an onboard
microcontroller that captures and processes data and
communicates over serial interfaces.

The wind sensor has an array of three equally spaced ultrasonic


transducers on a horizontal plane. Wind speed (WS) and wind
direction (WD) are determined by measuring the time it takes the
ultrasound to travel from each transducer to the other two.

The wind sensor measures the transit time (in both directions)
along the three paths established by the array of transducers. This
transit time depends on wind speed along the ultrasonic path. For
zero wind speed, both the forward and reverse transit times are
the same. With wind along the sound path, the upwind direction
transit time increases and the downwind transit time decreases.

Figure 11 on page 36 shows how the time shift of the ultrasonic


signals is measured and how tail wind and forward wind affect the
measurement.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 35
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

1005-007

Figure 11 Ultrasonic Measurement Principle

The following numbers refer to Figure 11 above:


1 = Ultrasonic measurement with zero wind
2 = Impact of tail wind on ultrasonic measurement
3 = Impact of head wind on ultrasonic measurement

36 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 3 _______________________________________________________ Functional Description

The microcontroller calculates WS from the measured transit


times using the following formula:

VW = 0.5 L (1/t f 1 / t r )

where
Vw = Wind velocity
L = Distance between two transducers
tf = Transit time in the forward direction
tr = Transit time in the reverse direction

Measuring the six transit times allows Vw to be computed for each


of the three ultrasonic paths. Using Vw values of two array paths
is enough to compute WS and WD.

Figure 12 below shows the different paths of WMT700 and the


vectors provided by the wind sensor:

1104-066

Figure 12 Measurement Paths of WMT700

where
16 = Measurement paths 1 to 6 of WMT700
La, Lb, Lc = Distance between two transducers

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 37
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

The vectors are calculated as follows:

Va = 0.5 La (1/A 1 1 / A 2 )

Vb = 0.5 Lb (1/A 3 1 / A 4 )

Vc = 0.5 Lc (1/A 5 1 / A 6 )

The equation depends on the accurate distance of the


measurement path (L). The computed wind speeds are
independent of altitude, temperature, and humidity, which are
canceled out when the transit times are measured in both
directions, although the individual transit times depend on these
parameters.

Coordinate Systems: Vector and Polar


Calculations
The triangular geometry of the sensor is converted to orthogonal
coordinates to achieve the x and y components. Then the sensor
converts the wind vectors into polar coordinates.

The measurement results are reported as follows:

- WMT700 reports WS (x, y) as two scalar speeds, one parallel


to the N-S direction (x) and the other (y) parallel to the W-E
direction. The speed unit may be m/s, kt, mph, or km/h.
x = WS cos (WD)
y = WS sin (WD)

- WMT700 reports polar wind speed as a scalar speed in


selected units (m/s, kt, mph, km/h).
Polar wind direction is expressed in degrees (). WMT700
indicates the direction that the wind comes from. North is
represented as 0, east as 90, south as 180, and west as 270.

38 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 3 _______________________________________________________ Functional Description

Figure 13 below shows examples of wind speed and direction


presentations.

0212-044

Figure 13 Different Wind Speed and Direction


Presentations (Direction Offset Is 0)

VAISALA________________________________________________________________________ 39
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Wind Speed and Direction Averaging


WMT700 provides average values for wind speed and direction
using either scalar or vector averaging. With both methods, the
average is determined according to the user-configurable
averaging time. The averaging time affects serial communication
and analog output similarly.

You can also configure the gust averaging time for calculating
wind extreme values. The default gust averaging interval is 3
seconds, as recommended by World Meteorological Organization
(WMO).

If scalar averaging is selected, you can also enable wind direction


coasting to ensure consistent direction measurement results at low
wind speeds.

Scalar Averaging
When scalar averaging is selected, WMT700 calculates wind
speed and direction averages by adding up each wind
measurement from the averaging time and dividing the sum by
the number of measurements. The time between each consecutive
wind speed and wind direction measurement is 0.25 seconds.

Wind direction is a circular function with a discontinuity at the


north, where 360 degrees is equal to zero degrees. For example:

359 + 5 = + 4

0 - 5 = 355

WMT700 translates wind direction to a linear function to


determine the wind direction average. For instance:

359 + 5 is translated to 364, which is then further converted to


+4 for output.

0 - 5 is translated to 355.

This ensures that the wind direction average stays representative


of the true situation even if individual samples occur on both sides
of the zero direction.

If the data acquisition system requests data before the initial


averaging time completes, the sensor returns the most recent
complete measurement data.

40 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 3 _______________________________________________________ Functional Description

Figure 14 below shows an example of averaging wind direction


when the measured wind values are 355 and 10. The resulting
average is 2.5.

1005-024

Figure 14 Example of Wind Direction Averaging

Wind Direction Coasting


Accurate wind direction measurement requires that the wind
speed is sufficient. If you enable wind direction coasting,
WMT700 does not calculate wind direction when the wind speed
drops below the selected wind direction coasting threshold. The
last calculated direction output remains until the wind speed
increases enough to reach the threshold and WMT700 returns to
normal operation.

Vector Averaging
When vector averaging is selected, WMT700 calculates wind
speed and direction averages by adding up each x velocity and y
velocity measurement from the averaging time and then dividing
the sum by the number of measurements. WMT700 converts the
resultant average x velocity and average y velocity to polar
direction and magnitude, which returns the wind direction average
in degrees and wind speed average in the chosen units.

If the data acquisition system requests data before the initial


averaging time completes, the sensor returns the most recent
complete measurement data.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 41
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Measurement Methods
WMT700 measures wind speed and direction either continuously
or for the duration of the user-configurable averaging time. You
can select the measurement mode over the serial interface.

Continuous Measurement
You can set WMT700 to measure wind data continuously until
the sensor receives the STOP command.

The following data communication methods are available:

- Poll Mode: You can fetch the most recent data from WMT700
with the POLL command. You must specify the data message
identification number in the command.
- Automatic Messaging Mode: If the automatic message interval
is configured, WMT700 sends automatic data messages at
selected intervals. The data message is user-configurable.

For information on response delay and timing, see section Serial


Interface Timing on page 49.

Wind Measurement on Request


You can set WMT700 to measure wind speed and direction for a
specified period of time. The duration of the measurement can
range from 0.25 seconds to 60 minutes, depending on the
configured averaging interval.

You can fetch the required data message from WMT700 in


measurement mode with the polling command. You must specify
the data message in the command.

For information on response delay and timing, see section Serial


Interface Timing on page 49.

42 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 3 _______________________________________________________ Functional Description

Host System Connections and Interfaces


WMT700 always needs a host device for measurement data
collection and presentation. The host device is usually an
automatic weather station, but other host devices such as data
loggers or personal computers can also be used.

WMT700 performs calculation, quality control, and data format


procedures on the measurement data. The processed data is sent to
weather stations using serial ports and/or analog output channels.
The most commonly used communications interface is RS-485,
but WMT700 has a flexible set of interfaces ranging from RS-232
to voltage and current mode analog signals.

You can set WMT700 to send measurement data as either analog


output or data messages via a serial port, or you can use both
outputs simultaneously. Operating and configuring commands are
sent to WMT700 through the serial interface.

Operation and heating power is usually provided from one power


supply. You can also use separate power supplies for the heating
and operation to prevent the heating function from consuming the
operation power. In a split-supply system there can be a separate
backup power supply for the operating power supply.

Figure 15 on page 44 shows the main software components and


external interfaces of WMT700.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 43
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 15 External Interfaces of WMT700

NOTE For examples of typical system environments for WMT700, see


Appendix B, Typical System Environments, on page 197.

44 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 3 _______________________________________________________ Functional Description

Serial Communication and Analog Output


The following functionality is preconfigured at the factory
according to your order:
- Digital communication interface for COM2
- Digital communication profile for COM2
- Digital communication units
- Analog output signals for wind speed channel (AOUT1)
- Analog output signals for wind direction channel (AOUT2)

For descriptions of serial commands and data messages, see


section Operation on page 107.

Serial Communication
In WMT700, there are two serial communication ports:

- COM1: Service port (RS485)


- COM2: Configurable digital communication interface

Both ports support the same commands, protocols, operations,


and data messages. Any computer or data logger that has a serial
port can be used to send commands to WMT700 and to receive
measurement data.

Digital Communication Interface


COM1 is a fixed RS-485 communication interface intended to be
used as a service port.

COM2 is a flexible digital communication interface that is


preconfigured according to your order. The available options are:

- RS-232 (recommended up to 15 meter distance)


- RS-485 (recommended up to 1200 meter distance when used
in point-to-point connection)
- RS-422 (recommended up to 1200 meter distance)
- SDI-12 (recommended up to 60 meter)

Note that the recommendations depend on communication speed


and cable type. In optimized environments even longer distances
can be considered.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 45
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Regardless of the factory configuration, COM2 interface type can


be changed by using terminal software. For more information, see
section com2_interf in Appendix D, Configuration Parameters, on
page 205.

For information on wiring, see section Wiring on page 77.

Profiles
The digital communication profile is used to preconfigure
WMT700 according to your order at the factory. Depending on
the preconfigured communication profile, the default settings of
the following parameters may vary:

- Communication protocols
- Communication parameters

See Appendix C, Default Settings for Different Communication


Profiles, on page 201 for the factory defaults for all
communication profiles. The preconfigured communication
profiles are:

- WMT700
- ROSA - MES12
- WS425 - ASCII
- WS425 - NMEA Extended (version 0183)
- WS425 - SDI-12 (version 1.3)
- WS425 ASOS

The WMT700 profile is recommended for normal operation. The


profile offers a wide range of predefined and user-configurable
data message formats, and it is specifically developed for
WMT700. For information on user-configurable data messages,
see section Parameter Handling Commands on page 111. For
information on predefined data messages, see section Data
Messages on page 127.

The ROSA - MES12 profile is intended for connecting WMT700


to the Vaisala ROSA system.

The WS425 profiles can be used when upgrading from the


WS425 wind sensor to WMT700.

For a list of the serial commands available for all communication


profiles supported by WMT700, see Appendix A, Complete
Command Set for WMT700, on page 195.

46 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 3 _______________________________________________________ Functional Description

Protocols
In addition to the protocols preconfigured under standard profiles,
there are additional protocols available in WMT700. The protocol
used is defined by related parameters. For more information, see
Parameter Handling Commands on page 111. The full list of
supported protocols is:

- WMT700
- WMT700 NMEA MWV
- SDI12
- WS425 - ASOS
- WS425 - ASCII
- WS425 - NMEA Standard
- WS425 - WAT11
- MES12

Measurement and Configuration


Modes
The serial ports have the following operation modes:

- The configuration mode is used for configuring the WMT700


settings over a serial connection. The selected communication
profile does not affect the available configuration commands.
- The measurement mode is used for operating WMT700. In the
measurement mode, the available commands depend on the
selected profile. The port that is in the measurement mode can
receive polling commands and respond to them with data
messages.

For a list of all serial commands supported by WMT700 in the


configuration and measurement modes, see Appendix A,
Complete Command Set for WMT700, on page 195.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 47
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 16 below shows the configuration and measurement modes


of both serial ports provided by WMT700.

1001-111

Figure 16 Configuration and Measurement Modes

After power-up, WMT700 is in the measurement mode. To


change settings, use the OPEN command to enter the
configuration mode. When you have changed the settings, use the
CLOSE command to exit the configuration mode. WMT700
serial ports also exit the configuration mode automatically if they
do not receive commands within 2 minutes.

For information on the OPEN and CLOSE commands, see


section Entering and Exiting Configuration Mode on page 109.

48 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 3 _______________________________________________________ Functional Description

Serial Interface Timing


Depending on the selected interface, the serial data interface
timing is as follows:

- Interfaces RS-232, RS-485, RS-422: Figure 17 below shows


timing when WMT700 is polled in the measurement mode.

1002-050

Figure 17 Timing for RS-232, RS-485, and RS-422


Interfaces

The response delay t2 is user-configurable. In the


configuration mode, some commands have a longer response
delay.

- SDI-12 interface: The timing is compliant with the SDI-12


standard. For the complete SDI-12 standard text, see the
SDI-12 website at www.sdi-12.org.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 49
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Analog Output
Analog outputs are either enabled or disabled, and the output
settings are preconfigured at the factory according to your order.
In analog output operation WMT700 takes measurements
according to the configured averaging time and synthesizes the
analog outputs of wind speed and wind direction with an update
interval of 0.25 seconds.

You can change the analog output type and scaling of WMT700
according to your needs. You may also need to disable the analog
output functionality to save power. For instructions, see
Configuration Parameters on page 118.

WMT700 provides the following analog outputs:

- AOUT1 for wind speed data


- AOUT2 for wind direction data

NOTE To emulate the WS425 analog output, choose voltage output, frequency
output, and potentiometer. For more detailed instructions, see section
Operating WMT700 in WS425 Analog Output Mode on page 139.

For information on wiring, see section Wiring on page 77.

Analog Output Types


Analog output for Wind Speed (AOUT1) can be configured as:

- Voltage output
- Current output
- Frequency output
- Push-pull output
- Pull-down output
- Pull-up output

For an illustration on frequency output, refer to Figure 18 on page


51.

Analog output for Wind Direction (AOUT2) can be configured


as:

- Voltage output
- Current output
- Potentiometer output

50 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 3 _______________________________________________________ Functional Description

1307-019

Figure 18 Frequency Output

VAISALA________________________________________________________________________ 51
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Analog Output Scaling


You can specify the transfer function between measured values
and output analog values. You can select the analog output type
as well as the gain and offset used in the transfer function. For
information on the parameters, see Appendix D, Configuration
Parameters, on page 205.

Table 19 below shows the factory default settings for the different
analog output modes.

Table 18 Factory Settings for Analog Wind Speed Output


AOUT1 Scaling/Gain Offset Error Example
Selected Option Indication
Voltage 0.1 V / m/s 0V 10 V 0 V = 0 m/s
7.5 V = 75 m/s
Current 0 ... 20 mA 0.0002 A / m/s 0A 0.022 A 0 mA = 0 m/s
15 mA = 75 m/s
Current WMT701 0.00040000 A / m/s 0.004 A 0.002 A 4 mA = 0 m/s
4 ... 20 mA 20 mA = 40 m/s
WMT702 0.00024615 A / m/s 0.004 A 0.002 A 4 mA = 0 m/s
20 mA = 65 m/s
WMT703 0.00021333 A / m/s 0.004 A 0.002 A 4 mA = 0 m/s
20 mA = 75 m/s
Frequency Push-Pull 10 Hz / m/s 0 Hz 1000 Hz 0 Hz = 0 m/s
750 Hz = 75 m/s
WS425 - voltage 8 mV / mph 0 mph 2V 0 mV = 0 mph
(0.017895 V / m/s) 1.344 V=168 mph
WS425 - frequency 5 Hz / mph 0 mph 1000 Hz 0 Hz = 0 mph
(11.185 Hz / m/s) 840 Hz =168 mph
Frequency Push 10 Hz / m/s 0 Hz 1000 Hz 0 Hz = 0 m/s
(PNP) 750 Hz = 75 m/s
Frequency Pull (NPN) 10 Hz / m/s 0 Hz 1000 Hz 0 Hz = 0 m/s
750 Hz = 75 m/s

Table 19 Factory Default Settings for Analog Wind


Direction Output
AOUT2 Selected Scaling/Gain Offset Error Example
Option Indication
Voltage 0.02 V / 0V 10 V 0 V = 0
7.2 V = 360
Current 0 20 mA 0.00005 A / 0A 0.022 A 0 mA = 0
18 mA = 360
Current 4 20 mA 000044444 A / 0.004 A 0.002 A 4 mA = 0
20 mA = 360
Potentiometer 1/359*Vref / 0 Vref 0 V = 0
(WS425) (0.0027855) (1) Vref = 359

For a different scaling, change the gain and offset settings, see
Configuration Parameters on page 118.

52 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 3 _______________________________________________________ Functional Description

NOTE The scaling of the current output 420 mA depends on the sensor
measurement range (WMT701, WMT702, or WMT703), while the
020 mA output has 0.2 mA / m/s scaling for all the measurement
ranges.

Table 20 and Table 21 below list the most common settings for
different units.

Table 20 Common Transfer Function Settings for


AOUT1 (WS)
Output Signal Scaling/Units Setting for Gain Setting for Offset
Voltage 8 mV / mph 0.017895 0
100 mV / m/s 0.1 0
Current 0.2 mA / m/s 0.0002 0
Frequency 5 Hz / mph 11.185 0
10 Hz / m/s 10
WS425 - voltage 8 mV / mph 0.017895 0
WS425 - frequency 5 Hz / mph 11.185 0

Table 21 Common Transfer Function Settings for


AOUT2 (WD)
Output Signal Scaling/Units Setting for Gain Setting for Offset
Voltage 4 mV / 0.004 0
20 mV / 0.02 0
Current 50 uA / degree 0.00005 0
Potentiometer 359 = Aout ref 0.0027855 0

You can configure output scaling or transfer function settings in a


variety of ways by changing the custom gain and offset. The basic
measurement units are m/s and degrees. The physical output units
are V, A, and Hz. For the potentiometer, an output of 1 means
100% of the Aout ref voltage.

The following formula illustrates the impact of gain and offset


values on the produced output:

o = y0 + ks

where
o = Produced analog output (V, A, Hz, 100%)
s = Measured wind speed or direction (in m/s or )
k = Selected gain value
y0 = Selected offset value

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 53
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Example 1

- Output mode: voltage


- Offset: 0.0
- Gain: 0.1

With the above settings, the analog output voltage range is from
0 V (0 m/s) to 7.5 V (75 m/s). When the measured wind speed is
10 m/s, the output voltage is 1.0 V. See the formula below:

Output = 0.0 + 10 0.1 = 1.0 V

Example 2

- Output mode: current


- Offset: 0.004
- Gain: 0.0002

With the above settings, the analog output current range is from
4 mA (0 m/s) to 19 mA (75 m/s). When the measured wind speed
is 10 m/s, the output current is 6 mA. See the formula below:

Output = 0.004 + 10 0.0002 = 6.0 mA

Limitations for Output Signals


You can specify the minimum and maximum values for analog
output with the configuration parameters. The output is fixed to
the specified values, and the unit depends on the selected analog
output mode.

Example

To limit analog output 1 in voltage mode to a range of 0.1 5 V,


set the analog output minimum value to 0.1 and the analog output
maximum value to 5. Enter the following commands:
S aout1minv,0.1
S aout1maxv,5

For more information on the parameters, see Appendix D,


Configuration Parameters, on page 205.

54 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 3 _______________________________________________________ Functional Description

Missing Readings and Error


Indication
If WMT700 is not able to measure the wind, it indicates a missing
reading in the output. Most common reasons for measurement
problems are foreign objects (such as ice, birds, or other foreign
objects) on the line of measurement or sound reflections from
nearby objects (such as wind tunnel walls).

The default error indication is an out-of-range signal, which is


more than 10 V or 20 mA, but other error settings can also be
configured.

Example

To set analog output 1 error indication in current mode to 2 mA,


set the analog output error value to 0.002. Enter the following
command:
S aout1err,0.002

For more information, see section Appendix D, Configuration


Parameters, on page 205.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 55
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

This page intentionally left blank.

56 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 4 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION

This chapter contains information that is needed to install


WMT700.

NOTE If you are upgrading from WS425 to WMT700 and using a WS425
mounting kit, see section Mounting with WS425 Mounting Kit on page
90.

Maritime Installations
In maritime installations according to IEC 60945, WMT700
belongs to the installation category C, which means that it is
exposed to weather.

When making maritime installations, pay attention to the


following:

- Do not install WMT700 in the vicinity of a magnetic compass.


The product is magnetically inert, but the compass-safe
distance is not measured.
- Do not place WMT700 directly in front of a radar.
- Do not install WMT700 next to a powerful RF-transmitter
antenna.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 57
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Selecting Installation Location


Finding a suitable site for WMT700 is important for getting
representative ambient measurements. Select a site that represents
the general area of interest. Follow the WMO Guide to
Meteorological Instruments and Methods of Observation WMO-
No. 8, or other application-specific requirements set by various
organizations, like the International Civil Aviation Organization
(ICAO).

It is important to take into account the geography and surrounding


area to achieve optimum performance. Trees, buildings, or other
objects situated in the vicinity of WMT700 disturb free air flow
and thus affect the accuracy of the measurement results.

Ideally, WMT700 should be higher than any other object within a


horizontal radius of 300 m. In general, any object of height (h)
does not remarkably disturb wind measurement at a minimum
distance of 10 x h.

When mounting WMT700 on top of a building, the recommended


minimum height (h) for the mast is 1.5 the height of the
building (H). When the diagonal (W) is less than the height (H),
the minimum height of the mast is 1.5 W.

When there is a need to ensure free air flow with a cross arm
installation, the distance (y) between WMT700 and the mast
should be more than 20 the diameter of the vertical mast (z).
For more information, see Figure 19 on page 59 and follow
application-specific installation guidelines.

When mounting two WMT700 wind sensors at the same height,


make sure that there is a minimum of 10 meters of distance
between the two devices, as shown in Figure 21 on page 61. If the
difference in the height of the sensors is at least 0.5 meters, it is
enough to have a minimum distance of 2 meters between the two
devices to avoid possible acoustical interference between them.

WARNING If ice or snow accumulates on WMT700 or the mast, it can fall and cause
injury to persons below.

58 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 4 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

1001-016

Figure 19 Recommended Location in Open Area

where
h = Height of a building or other high structure
r = Distance from a building or other high structure
y = Distance from the vertical mast
z = Diameter of the vertical mast

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 59
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

1005-001

Figure 20 Recommended Mast Length on Top of Building

where
h = Recommended minimum height for the vertical mast
H = Height of the building
W = Diagonal of the building

WARNING To protect personnel (and the wind sensor), install a lightning rod with
the tip at least one meter above WMT700. The rod must be properly
grounded, compliant with all local applicable safety regulations. Do not
install the wind sensor above the top of the lightning protection rod.

WARNING Do not install WMT700 when there is a risk of thunderstorm or lightning


activity in the area.

60 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 4 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

Figure 21 Minimum Distance between Two WMT700


Devices Installed at Same Height

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 61
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Installation Procedure
At the measurement site, you need to mount, align, and connect
WMT700 to the power source and data acquisition system.

You can install the optional bird cage after the wind sensor is
mounted and the transportation damper is removed from the
sensor. For instructions, see section Installing Bird Cage on page
75.

CAUTION When handling WMT700, do not rotate, pull, strike, bend, scrape, or
touch the transducers with sharp objects. Any impact on the wind sensor
array may damage the device.

1005-004

Figure 22 Sensor Handling

Unpacking
NOTE Save the container and all the packaging materials for future
transportation or shipping.

WMT700 is shipped in a cardboard custom container with plastic


transportation dampers. One of the dampers protects the wind
sensor body, while the other shields the array and the transducers,
as shown in Figure 23 on page 63.

62 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 4 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

When unpacking the wind sensor, remove the transportation


damper that protects the sensor body. To avoid bending or
twisting the array, do not remove the damper protecting the array
until you have installed WMT700. Figure 23 below shows the
damper protecting the array.

Retain all original packaging in case you have to return WMT700


to Vaisala Service Center for maintenance purposes. You can
uninstall WMT700 by performing the steps of the mounting
procedure in reverse order.

1005-025

Figure 23 WMT700 and Transportation Damper

Mounting
You can mount WMT700 either on a vertical pole mast or a
horizontal cross arm. Each of the mounting options is further
described in the following sections.

For information on the dimensions of WMT700, see Dimensions


on page 193.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 63
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Mounting on Vertical Pole Mast


When mounting WMT700 on a vertical pole mast, you can place
it either on the side or on top of the mast. When selecting the
mounting position, take into account the other equipment installed
on the mast (for instance, lightning rods) and how the cable has
been routed (outside or inside the mast).
Figure 26 on page 66 and Figure 27 on page 67 show the
mounting procedure.

To mount WMT700 on a pole mast:


1. Attach the FIX70 mounting kit either to the side or on top
of the vertical pole mast with U bolts (provided). Insert the
U-bolts to the horizontal slots of the FIX70 mounting kit;
see number 4 in Figure 26 on page 66 and Figure 27 on
page 67.
2. Check that the mounting kit is not tilted to either side.
Tighten the U bolts only slightly.

NOTE Do not tighten the bolts too much at this stage because you still need to
rotate the mounting kit to align WMT700 after the installation.

3. Run the cable through the FIX70 mounting kit.


4. Connect the cable to the wind sensor as follows. First, insert
the cable in the cable tightening tool as shown in Figure 24
below. When you hear a click, the cable is properly
inserted.

1306-029

Figure 24 Inserting Cable in Cable Tightening Tool

The following numbers refer to Figure 24 above:


1 = Cable tightening tool
2 = Cable

5. Press the ribbed part of the cable tightening tool lightly and
attach the connector to WMT700. Direct the nib of the
connector towards the slot in the WMT700 connector.
Ensure that the connector is properly tightened before
proceeding to the next step.

64 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 4 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

1306-140

Figure 25 Attaching Connector to WMT700

NOTE You do not need to remove the cable tightening tool after tightening the
connector; you can leave it in place.

6. Hold the wind sensor from the enclosure and slide the
sensor into the mounting kit. Turn the sensor so that the
mounting screw slides into the appropriate slot. Do not
touch the array when handling WMT700.
To avoid misalignment, turn the sensor until the screw
reaches the far end of the slot. When the screw is in the
position indicated with number 3 in Figure 26 on page 66 or
number 2 in Figure 27 on page 67, tighten the screw.
7. Remove the transportation damper protecting the array and
store it for future use.
8. Align WMT700. For instructions, see section Alignment on
page 74.
9. Connect the cable to the data acquisition system and power
supply. For instructions, see section Wiring on page 77.

WMT700 is now ready for operation.

VAISALA________________________________________________________________________ 65
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

NOTE When installing WMT700 to the side of a mast, make sure that the
mounting kit is positioned at the top level of the mast. See Figure 26
below.

1006-077

Figure 26 WMT700 on Side of Pole Mast

The following numbers refer to Figure 26 above:


1 = FIX70 mounting kit
2 = WMT700 wind sensor
3 = Mounting screw in final position
4 = U-bolt and nut (M8DIN934-A4) in horizontal slot

66 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 4 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

1006-078

Figure 27 WMT700 on Top of Pole Mast

The following numbers refer to Figure 27 above:


1 = WMT700 wind sensor
2 = Mounting screw in final position
3 = North arrow
4 = U-bolt and nut (M8DIN934-A4) in horizontal slot
5 = FIX70 mounting kit

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 67
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Mounting on Horizontal Cross Arm


When mounting WMT700 on a cross arm, the wind sensor can be
placed with the array facing up or down. Mounting WMT700
with the array facing down provides additional protection against
the accumulation of snow and interference from birds. The
adapter drains located at the bottom of WMT700 prevent water
from accumulating inside the mounting adapter. If the wind
sensor is installed with the array facing down, you must configure
WMT700 accordingly. For configuration instructions, see section
Configuration Parameters on page 118.

Figure 28 on page 69 and Figure 29 on page 70 show the


mounting procedure.

To mount WMT700 on a cross arm:

1. Attach the FIX70 mounting kit to the cross arm with U bolts
(provided). Insert the U bolts to the vertical slots of the
FIX70 mounting kit. See number 3 in Figure 28 on page 69.
2. Check that the mounting kit is not tilted to either side.
Tighten the U bolts firmly.
3. Run the cable through the FIX70 mounting kit.
4. Insert the cable in the cable tightening tool as shown in
Figure 24 on page 64 to connect the cable to the wind
sensor. Connect the cable to WMT700 and tighten by
rotating the tightening tool clockwise by hand as shown in
Figure 31 on page 72. Ensure that the connector is properly
tightened before proceeding to the next step.
5. Hold the wind sensor from the enclosure and slide the
sensor into the mounting kit. Turn the sensor so that the
mounting screw slides into the slot. Do not touch the array
when handling WMT700.
To avoid misalignment, turn the sensor until the screw
reaches the far end of the slot. When the screw is in the
position indicated with number 4 in Figure 28 on page 69,
tighten the screw.

6. Remove the transportation damper protecting the array and


store it for future use.
7. Align the horizontal cross arm. For instructions, see section
Alignment on page 74.
8. Connect the cable to the data acquisition system and power
supply. Connect the wires according to section Wiring on
page 77.

WMT700 is now ready for operation.

68 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 4 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

1006-079

Figure 28 WMT700 on Cross Arm with Array Facing Up

The following numbers refer to Figure 28 above:


1 = WMT700 wind sensor
2 = Mounting adapter
3 = FIX70 mounting kit
4 = Mounting screw in final position
5 = U-bolt and nut (M8DIN934-A4) in vertical slot
6 = North arrow

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 69
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

1006-080

Figure 29 WMT700 on Cross Arm with Array Facing


Down

The following numbers refer to Figure 29 above:


1 = FIX70 mounting kit
2 = WMT700 wind sensor

70 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 4 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

The recommended way to tighten the connector is to use the cable


tightening tool shipped with your WMT700. The ribbed part of
the tool offers a better grip of the cable when tightening the
connector. Insert the cable in the cable tightening tool as shown in
Figure 30 below. You do not need to remove the cable tightening
tool when the connector is tightened. For detailed instructions, see
Figure 25 on page 65.

1306-033

Figure 30 Tightening Connector with Cable Tightening


Tool

The following numbers refer to Figure 30 above:


1 = WMT700
2 = Cable tightening tool
3 = Cable

VAISALA________________________________________________________________________ 71
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

You can tighten the connector without the cable tightening tool by
rotating the ribbed part of the connector by hand. However, do not
use tools when tightening the connector.

1103-054

Figure 31 Tightening Connector without Cable Tightening


Tool

The following number refers to Figure 31 above:


1 = Tighten the connector by rotating the ribbed part of the connector
by hand. DO NOT USE TOOLS

NOTE Verify that the connector is properly tightened to avoid water leakage and
damage to the sensor. If water leaks into the connector, this voids the
warranty for WMT700.

72 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 4 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

Checklist for Connection Cables


Take the following issues into account when installing WMT700:

- How you route the cables depends on the mounting option


selected for WMT700. When mounting to a mast, you can
route the cable either outside or inside the mast depending on
the mast type and other equipment (for instance, lightning
rods) installed to the mast.
- Make sure that the cable is properly attached to the mast or
cross arm before starting the installation. Otherwise, it may
slip and fall down during the installation procedure.
- Make sure to attach the cable properly to avoid strain on the
connector. Too much strain may cause the cable to fall off,
damage the cable or connector, or make the cable or connector
susceptible to water leakage. The recommended minimum
bending radius for the cable is 70 mm.

WARNING Make sure that you connect only de-energized wires.

WARNING Using a long cable between different units (sensors, transmitters, power
supplies, and displays) can cause a lethal surge voltage, if a lightning
strike occurs in the vicinity. Always apply proper grounding procedures
and follow the requirements of the local Electrical Code.

WARNING Do not install WMT700 when there is a risk of thunderstorm or lightning


activity in the area.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 73
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Alignment
WMT700 is permanently marked with the letter N and a north
arrow. You must align WMT700 in such a way that the arrow
points to the north. Misaligning WMT700 causes a wind direction
offset error in the measurement results, as shown in Figure 33 on
page 75.

To align WMT700:

1. Determine if the array of WMT700 is correctly aligned with


a compass or other similar method.
2. If the alignment is not correct, readjust the orientation as
follows:

- When installing WMT700 on a vertical mast, rotate the


FIX70 mounting kit so that the north arrow and the north
transducer point to the north in the measurement
location. Do not remove WMT700 from the mounting kit
during the alignment process. Tighten the bolts of the
FIX70 mounting kit.
- When installing WMT700 on a horizontal cross arm,
rotate the arm so that the north arrow and the north
transducer point to the north in the measurement
location.

Figure 32 below and Figure 33 on page 75 show the correct


alignment and the measurement error caused by the
misalignment of WMT700.

0208-025

Figure 32 Correctly Aligned WMT700

74 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 4 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

1001-018

Figure 33 Incorrectly Aligned WMT700 and Resulting


Offset Error

where
N = Correct direction for true north
= Wind direction offset error caused by the misalignment of
WMT700

Alignment Tuning
If mechanical alignment of WMT700 cannot be done, you can
correct the wind direction offset error by using an offset
adjustment command. For instructions, see Appendix D,
Configuration Parameters, on page 205.

Installing Bird Cage


To install the bird cage, you need to position the bird cage on top
of the wind sensor and secure the kit with two straps. You can
order the cage as an accessory from Vaisala; see Table 62 on page
192. The required straps are provided with the bird cage.

CAUTION Make sure that you do not damage the array when installing the bird
cage.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 75
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

To install the optional bird cage:

1. Unpack the bird cage and the bird cage straps.


2. Position the bird cage on top of the wind sensor and press
the kit down until the three hooks are in contact with the
transducer arms.
3. Run the lower strap through the three guides in the kit.
Figure 34 below shows the correct position.
4. Lift the latch screw.
5. Insert the strap to the latch.
6. Press the latch screw down.
7. Tighten the screw by turning the screw clockwise with a
screw driver or a socket. Do not over-tighten the screw.
8. Run the upper strap through the three guides in the kit.
9. Repeat the steps 4-7 for the other strap.

1104-086

Figure 34 Bird Cage and Bird Cage Straps

The following numbers refer to Figure 34 above:


1 = Bird cage
2 = Bird cage straps
3 = Wind sensor
4 = Guide for attaching the straps
5 = Latch for securing the straps

76 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 4 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

Wiring
The 17-pin M23 male connector is located at the bottom of
WMT700. The connector is used for power supply, digital
communications, and analog outputs. The signals related to digital
communications are galvanically separated from the ground. The
connector type is Hummel 7.106 series.

Cables
Ready-made cables are available for use with Vaisala MAWS and
AWS520 systems. These cables have connectors on both ends.
There is also a retrofit cable for Vaisala ROSA system in case
analog output has been used with WS425.
Vaisala provides open-lead cables for connections to other host
systems:
- Cable 2 m (227567SP)
- Cable 10 m (227568SP)
- RS485 Cable 2 m (228259SP)
- RS485 Cable 10 m (228260SP)
- ROSA Cable 10 m for Analog Outputs (231425SP)
- Junction Box with Cable 2 m (ASM210719SP)

Cable 2 m and Cable 10 m carry through all signals from


WMT700 while the RS485 cables are designed for RS485
operation with a limited number of wires. The ROSA Cable is
intended for replacing WS425 with WMT700 in the Vaisala
ROSA system if WS425 is connected using analog outputs. The
Junction Box is designed mainly for maritime RS422 operation
but it can be used whenever a connection longer than 10 meters is
needed as an entry point for an extension cable.
Table 22 on page 78 shows how to connect Cable 2 m
(227567SP) and Cable 10 m (227568SP). Same color coding is
also used in Junction Box wiring.
Table 24 on page 80 shows how to connect RS485 Cable 2 m
(228259SP) and RS485 Cable 10 m (228260SP).

NOTE Wire colors in the tables are not applicable to other cables.

NOTE If there are unused wires, make sure that they are unconnected and
protected. Do not cut off any wires.

VAISALA________________________________________________________________________ 77
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Cable 2 m, Cable 10 m, Cable 15 m,


and Cable 26 m
Table 22 below shows how to connect Cable 2 m (227567SP),
Cable 10 m (227568SP), Cable 15 m (237890SP), and Cable
26 m (237889SP).

Table 22 Connecting Cable 2 m (227567SP),


Cable 10 m (227568SP), Cable 15 m (237890SP),
and Cable 26 m (237889SP)
Power Supply Wire Colors Pin
Operating Power Supply White 1
Operating Power Supply Ground Gray-Pink 11
Heater Power Supply Gray 5
Heater Power Supply Pink 6
Heater Power Supply Ground Blue 7
Heater Power Supply Ground Red 8
Enclosure Ground Shield Shield
Analog Outputs
Analog Output AOUT2, Wind Direction Brown 2
Analog Output AOUT1, Wind Speed White-Green 13
Reference Input for AOUT2 (simulated potentiometer) White-Gray 17
Analog Output Ground Red-Blue 12
COM port RS-232 RS-422 RS-485 SDI-12
RS232Rx Rx Rx - Green 3
RS232Tx Tx Tx Data Yellow 4
COM2
- Tx+ Tx+ - Brown-Green 14
- Rx+ Rx+ - White-Yellow 15
COM1 and COM2 Communication Ports Ground Violet 10
COM1 RS-485 Black 9
(Service RS-485 + Brown-Yellow 16
Port)

78 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 4 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

RS485 for COM2 with Cable 2 m and 10 m


In RS485 mode, the same signals as in RS422 mode are available
at the end of Cable 2 m and Cable 10 m. Make two-wire loop-
backs at the end of the cable, as shown in Table 23 and Figure 35
below.

Table 23 COM2 RS485 Wiring


WMT700 Signals Wire Colors Pin RS485 Signals
RxB Green 3
-
TxB Yellow 4
TxA Brown-Green 14
+
RxA White-Yellow 15

1009-016

Figure 35 COM2 RS485 Wiring

NOTE To avoid confusion, the RS485 and RS422 signals of WMT700 are
named as follows:
- Inverting:
- Non-inverting: +
According to the EIA-485 standard, the lines are named as follows:
- Inverting: <=> A
- Non-inverting: + <=> B
The A/B naming used by some manufacturers is in conflict with the
standard. To ensure proper operation, verify the polarity of the signals
when using the device on the bus with signals named as A/B. Opposite
polarity causes data inversion on the bus, but it does not damage the
device.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 79
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

RS485 Cable 2 m and RS485 Cable


10 m
RS485 Cable 2 m and RS485 Cable 10 m are designed for the
standard connection: operating power, heater power, and RS485.
The two-wire RS485 loopback connections, as shown in Table 24
below, are preconnected inside the cable.

Table 24 Connecting RS485 Cable 2 m (228259SP) and


RS485 Cable 10 m (228260SP)
Power Supply Wire Colors Pin
Operating Power Supply White 1
Operating Power Supply Ground Gray-Pink 11
Heater Power Supply Gray, Green, Pink 5, 6
Heater Power Supply Ground Blue, Black, Red, Yellow 7, 8
Enclosure Ground Shield Shield
COM2
RS485 - Brown 3,4
RS485 + Red-Blue 14, 15
Communications Ground Violet 10

80 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 4 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

Connector Signals
Figure 36 and Table 25 below describe the pin-out of the 17-pin
M23 connector as seen from the outside. The serial output type of
COM2 depends on the sensor configuration. Analog outputs are
always available from the connector.

1103-061

Figure 36 Pins for 17-Pin M23 Connector

Table 25 Pin-Out for 17-Pin M23 Connector


Pin Description RS-232 RS-422 RS-485 SDI-12
1 Operating Power Supply
2 Analog output AOUT2, Wind Direction
3 RS232Rx Rx Rx -
COM2
4 RS232Tx Tx Tx Data
5 Heater Power Supply
6 Heater Power Supply
7 Heater Power Supply Ground
8 Heater Power Supply Ground
9 COM1 (Service Port) RS-485, B
10 COM1 and COM2 Communication Ports Ground
11 Operating Power Supply Ground
12 Analog Output Ground
13 Analog Output AOUT1, Wind Speed
14 - Tx+ Tx+ -
COM2
15 - Rx+ Rx+ -
16 COM1 RS-485+
(Service port)
17 Reference Input for AOUT2 (simulated potentiometer)
Shield Enclosure Ground

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 81
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Heating
WMT700 can include a heating functionality that ensures proper
operation in cold environmental conditions or in cases where
snow and ice build-up is possible.

In addition to the standard non-heated version, WMT700 can be


preconfigured at the factory according to your order:

- Heating for the transducers only


- Heating for both transducers and array arms
- Heating for body, transducers, and array arms

NOTE Ensure that the supply output power capacity is high enough especially
when transducers, array arms, and sensor body are equipped with heaters.
Also, note that there are individual connections for applying the heating
voltage.

Heated Transducers
The heating functionality has a thermostatic control with
temperature sensors in each transducer. The control function
keeps the transducer temperature above 0 C and adds heating
power when necessary. Therefore, heating is only activated when
there is a risk of ice build-ups. If a sensor is blocked, WMT700
increases the heating power to melt the ice and returns to lower
power after a period of time.

You cannot change the heating parameters, but you can enable or
disable the heating functionality with configuration parameters.
When heating voltage falls below 18 VDC, an alarm is raised.
Heating is automatically disabled if heating voltage falls below 15
VDC.

Regardless of heating voltage, the maximum heating power is


limited to 40 W and the average heating power is limited to 30 W.
The maximum power control is achieved by automatically
sequencing the transducer heaters depending on a heating voltage.
At low heating voltages, all the transducers are heated
simultaneously. At mid-range, two of the transducers are heated.
At high voltage end, a single transducer is heated at a time. A
PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) scheme is used to control the
average heating power.

82 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 4 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

Heated Transducers and Arms


In addition to heated transducers, the array arms can also be
heated, which prevents ice build-up on the arms.

The functional principle is the same as with the heated


transducers only, but the maximum heating power is limited to
200 W and the average heating power is limited to 150 W.

WARNING Some WMT700 product versions provide heating for transducers and/or
array arms. To avoid injury, do not touch the heated parts of the wind
sensor when the heating is enabled.

Heated Body, Transducers, and


Arms
The fully heated version of WMT700 is suitable for harsh weather
conditions. It provides heating for the sensor body, transducers,
and arms.

The functional principle is the same with the heated transducers


and arms. Body heating is controlled independently of transducer
and arm heating. The maximum heating power for the fully
heated WMT700 is 350 W and the average heating power is 250
W in harsh weather conditions. The inner temperature of the unit
is measured continuously. If the inner temperature starts rising,
body heating power automatically reduces to retain the optimum
inner temperature of WMT700.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 83
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Powering
WMT700 has separate power supply inputs for operating and
heating power. The inputs are usually connected to the same 24
VDC power supply unit, but special applications such as battery
operation or battery back-up may require separate supplies.

The operating power has one supply terminal and one ground
terminal, while the heating power has two supply terminals and
two ground terminals allowing a higher supply current. All supply
ground terminals are internally connected to each other.

NOTE In a system setup with two separate power supplies, avoid ground
potential differences between the supplies. Connect the negative
terminals together if necessary.

Operating Power
WMT700 can use any 9 ... 36 V (nominal voltage 24 V) minimum
2 W DC power supply that meets applicable safety regulations.
Connect heating supply wires to the ground in case heating is not
used. The typical current and power consumptions vs. operating
voltage are shown in Figure 38 and Figure 39 on page 86. Note
that the selected heating option affects the needed operation
voltage when separate powering for operation and heating is used.

Table 26 Operating Power Supply Voltage Requirements


Used Heating Option Operating Power Supply
None 9 36 VDC 2 W
Transducers 12 36 VDC 2 W
Transducers and arms 14 36 VDC 2 W
Transducers, arms and body 16 36 VDC 2 W

84 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 4 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

Figure 37 below shows the wiring of non-heated WMT700


versions.

1301-017

Figure 37 Wiring of Non-heated WMT700 Versions

NOTE In maritime environments, the normal input voltage ranges are:


operating voltage 10 30 VDC (-10% +30%) and heating voltage
24 30 VDC (-10% +30%), as defined in the maritime standard
IEC 60945.

For low-power operation using the SLEEP feature, see section


SLEEP Enter Low-Power Mode on page 137.

VAISALA________________________________________________________________________ 85
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 38 and Figure 39 below illustrate WMT700 Operating


Supply Current Consumption and Operating Supply Power
Consumption.

1104-054

Figure 38 Operating Supply Current Consumption

1104-055

Figure 39 Operating Supply Power Consumption

86 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 4 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

Heating Power
Table 27 below lists the minimum power supply requirements of
each WMT700 heating option.

NOTE In maritime environments, the normal input voltage ranges are: operating
voltage 10 30 VDC (-10% +30%) and heating voltage
24 30 VDC (-10% +30%), as defined in the maritime standard
IEC 60945.

Table 27 Heating Power Supply Requirements


Heating Option Heating Voltage Required Heating
Power Supply
None - -
Transducers 24 36 VDC 40 W
Transducers and arms 24 36 VDC 200 W
Transducers, arms and body 24 VDC 350 W (2 m cable)

Power and Cable Recommendations for Fully


Heated WMT700
Table 28 below shows cable and power recommendations. If a
longer than a 10 meter cable is needed, it is recommended to use
Junction Box with Cable (WMT70CABLE12) for extending the
cable length.

NOTE The minimum operation voltage for a fully heated WMT700


(transducers, arms, and body heated) is 16 V, if a separate power supply
unit is used for operation.

Table 28 Heating Power and Extension Cable


Wire Type/ 2m 10 m 20 m 30 m 40 m
Cable Length WMT70CABLE1* WMT70CABLE2*
0.5 mm2/AWG20 24V 400 W 28 V 400 W - - -
1 mm2/AWG17 - - 28V 400 W 30 V 400 W 32 V 400 W **
1.5 mm2/AWG15 - - - - 30 V 400 W
* Vaisala standard connection cable.
** Not for maritime use.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 87
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 40 and Figure 41 below illustrate the wiring of heated


WMT700 instruments.

1301-018

Figure 40 Wiring of Heated WMT700 Versions, Part 1

Note that when using separate power supplies for operating and
heating, the minus (-) terminals of the power supplies are
connected together by an additional wire. Use a minimum
0.75 mm2 wire for connecting the (-) terminals together.

1307-003

Figure 41 Wiring of Heated WMT700 Versions, Part 2

CAUTION There are two terminals connected in parallel for both positive and
negative rails of the heating voltage for the maximum current capacity. In
case the connection cable has parallel supply wires, they all have to be
connected to ensure current capacity. Leaving one terminal unconnected
or connecting it to the ground may cause a WMT700 malfunction or a
short circuit in the power supply.

88 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 4 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

NOTE Always use cables that meet the minimum dimension requirements. Long
cables with thin wires cause power losses in the cable and significantly
decrease the heating capabilities of WMT700.
Loop resistance of 0.15 results in approximately 1 V drop in heating
voltage with 200 W heating. You should note this to get proper heating
capability. For example, the loop resistance of a 10 m cable (227568SP)
is 0.7 resulting in an approximately 4 V drop. It is recommended that
you use at least a 28 V supply for the maximum heating capability.

Upgrading from WS425 to WMT700


When upgrading to WMT700, you have the following installation
options:

- Basic installation procedure, which consists of mounting


WMT700 with the FIX70 mounting kit and the WMT700
mounting adapter.
To upgrade to WMT700 according to this procedure, uninstall
the WS425 wind sensor and mounting kit and follow the
installation instructions in section Installation on page 57.
- Retrofit installation procedure, which consists of mounting
WMT700 with a WS425 mounting kit and the WMT700
mounting adapter for FIX30/60.

At the measurement site, you need to mount WMT700 and


connect it to the power source and data acquisition system.

After upgrading to WMT700, it is possible to install the optional


bird prevention kit available for the wind sensor. For more
information, see section Bird Cage on page 31.

WARNING To protect personnel (and the wind sensor), install a lightning rod with
the tip at least one meter above WMT700. The rod must be properly
grounded, compliant with all local applicable safety regulations. Do not
install the wind sensor above the top of the lightning protection rod.

WARNING Do not install WMT700 when there is a risk of thunderstorm or lightning


activity in the area.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 89
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

CAUTION When handling WMT700, do not rotate, pull, strike, bend, scrape, or
touch the transducers with sharp objects. Any impact on the wind sensor
array damages the device.

NOTE Save the container and all the packaging materials for future transporting
or shipping.

For instructions on unpacking, see section Unpacking on page 62.

Mounting with WS425 Mounting Kit


You can mount WMT700 either on a vertical pole mast or a
horizontal cross arm using the WS425 mounting kit. The
procedure for both mounting options is identical. Typically you
can upgrade from WS425 to WMT700 without removing the
mounting kit.

NOTE If you remove the mounting kit, you need to align the wind sensor after
the mounting procedure. To facilitate the aligning process, mark both the
wind sensor and the mounting kit with a marker pen before removing the
mounting kit.
You can use the mark as a rough reference when starting the aligning
process described in section Alignment on page 74.

When mounting WMT700 to a cross arm, the wind sensor can be


placed with the array facing up or down. If the wind sensor is
installed with the array facing down, you must configure
WMT700 accordingly. For configuration instructions, see
Configuration on page 110.

Figure 42 on page 91 shows the mounting procedure to a vertical


pole mast. Figure 43 on page 92 and Figure 44 on page 93 show
the mounting procedure to a horizontal cross arm.

90 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 4 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

1104-081

Figure 42 Retrofit Installation to Pole Mast

The following numbers refer to Figure 42 above:


1 = WMT700
2 = Mounting adapter for FIX30/60
3 = WS425 mounting kit
4 = Mounting screw

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 91
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

1104-082

Figure 43 Retrofit Installation to Cross Arm with Array


Facing Up

The following numbers refer to Figure 43 above:


1 = WMT700
2 = Mounting adapter for FIX30/60
3 = Mounting screw
4 = WS425 cross arm

92 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 4 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

1104-083

Figure 44 Retrofit Installation to Cross Arm with Array


Facing Down

The following numbers refer to Figure 44 above:


1 = Mounting adapter for FIX30/60
2 = WS425 cross arm
3 = WMT700

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 93
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Before You Start


Before you start the retrofit installation procedure, make sure that
you have the correct items:

- Correct mounting kit (already attached to the mast) for a


retrofit installation. Figure 45 below shows the available
options: FIX30 and WS425FIX60 mounting kits.

1006-054

Figure 45 FIX30, WS425FIX60-RST, and WS425FIX60-


POM

For information on the FIX70 mounting kit, see Figure 3 on page


20.

94 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 4 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

- Correct mounting adapter for your installation; FIX30,


WS425FIX60-POM, or WS425FIX60-POM, see Figure 46
below. The diameter of the mounting adapter for the adapters
is 61 mm. Change the mounting adapter if necessary. If you
are not sure that you have the correct mounting adapter,
contact Vaisala.

Figure 46 Mounting Adapter for FIX30, WS425FIX60


(Left), and Mounting Adapter for FIX70
(Right)

- Correct cables for the mounting kit and analog output/serial


communication. Table 29 below lists the available cables for a
retrofit installation. The In/Out stands for the possibility to
route the cable either inside or outside of the mast.

NOTE If you have FIX30, do not use the adapter cables but order the
appropriate WMT700 cable. The adapter cable will not fit inside the
mast.

Table 29 Mounting Kits and Cable Codes


Description Spare Part Item FIX70 FIX30 WS425FIX60
In Out In Out In Out
WMT700 cables with open leads 227567SP x x x x x
one end (Standard 227568SP x x x x x
2 m/10 m/15 m/26 m,
237890SP x x x x x
RS485 2 m/10 m,
ROSA analog 10 m) 237889SP x x x x x
231425SP x x x x x
228259SP x x x x x
228260SP x x x x x
WMT700 cables with connectors 227565SP x x x x x x
on both ends (MAWS, AWS520): 229807SP x x x x x
227566SP x x x x x

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 95
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Mounting Procedure
To upgrade from WS425 to WMT700:

1. Uninstall WS425.
2. If you are using a WMT700 cable, run the cable through the
WS425 mounting kit. Connect the cable to the WMT700
wind sensor.
If you are using a WS425 cable, ensure the pre-installed O-
ring seal sits properly in the plastic male connector
(between the existing WS425 cable and the adapter cable).
Connect the WS425 cable to the WS425 adapter cable (see
Figure 47 below). Run the adapter cable through the WS425
mounting kit. Connect the cable to the WMT700 wind
sensor.

1103-012

Figure 47 WS425 Adapter Cable

3. Tighten the connector by rotating the connector by hand


clockwise; see Figure 31 on page 72.
Ensure that the connector is properly tightened before
proceeding to the next step. If you are unable to tighten the
connector, loosen the mounting adapter fixing screws,
remove the mounting adapter, and connect the cable. After
that, reattach the mounting adapter.

4. Attach the WMT700 sensor body to the WS425 mounting


kit and tighten the bolt.
5. Remove the transportation damper protecting the array and
store it for future use.
6. Connect the cable to the data acquisition system and power
supply. Connect the wires according to section Wiring on
page 99.

WMT700 is now ready for operation.

96 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 4 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

Tightening Connector
When connecting the cable to your WMT700, it is recommended
that you tighten the connector with the cable tightening tool
shipped with your WMT700. The ribbed part of the tool offers a
better grip of the cable when tightening the connector. Insert the
cable in the cable tightening tool as shown in Figure 30 on page
71 and Figure 25 on page 65. You do not need to remove the
cable tightening tool when the connector is tightened.

You can tighten the connector without the cable tightening tool by
rotating the ribbed part of the connector by hand as shown in
Figure 31 on page 72. However, do not use tools when tightening
the connector.

NOTE Verify that the connector is properly tightened to avoid water leakage and
damage to the sensor. If water leaks into the connector, this voids the
warranty for WMT700.

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 97
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Checklist for Connection Cables


Take the following issues into account when installing WMT700:

- How to route the cables depends on the mounting option


selected for WMT700. When mounting to a mast, the cable can
be routed either outside or inside the mast depending on the
mast type and other equipment (for instance, lightning rods)
installed to the mast.
- Make sure that the cable is properly attached to the mast or
cross arm before starting the installation. Otherwise, it may
slip and fall down during the installation procedure.
- Make sure to attach the cable properly to avoid strain on the
connector. Too much strain may cause the cable to fall off,
damage the cable or connector, or make the cable or connector
susceptible to leakage. The recommended minimum bending
radius for the cable is 70 mm.

WARNING Make sure that you connect only de-energized wires.

WARNING Using a long cable between different units (sensors, transmitters, power
supplies, and displays) can cause a lethal surge voltage, if a lightning
strike occurs in the vicinity. Always apply proper grounding procedures
and follow the requirements of the local Electrical Code.

WARNING Do not install WMT700 when there is a risk of thunderstorm or lightning


activity in the area.

98 ___________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E
Chapter 4 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

Wiring in Retrofit Installations


There are two ways of performing WMT700 retrofit installation:

- Using Standard WMT700 Cables


- Using WS425 Cables with adapters

NOTE To avoid unnecessary connectors and maximize long-term reliability,


Vaisala recommends that you use the WMT700 cable for the retrofit
installation.

Using Standard WMT700 Cables


This is the recommended way for the retrofit installation. There
are various cables available for the installation:

- Cable 2 m (227567SP)
- Cable 10 m (227568SP)
- Cable 15 m (237890SP)
- Cable 26 m (237889SP)
- RS485 Cable 2 m (228259SP)
- RS485 Cable 10 m (228260SP)
- ROSA Cable 10 m for Analog Outputs (231425SP)
- MAWS Cable 10 m (227565SP)
- AWS520 Cable 10 m, Shield connected to PE pin (229807SP)
- AWS520 Cable 10 m, Shield not connected to PE pin
(227566SP)

VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 99
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

ROSA Cable 10 m (Analog Outputs)


The ROSA Cable 10 m (231425SP) is intended for replacing
WS425 with WMT700 in the Vaisala ROSA system in case the
WS425 has been connected using analog outputs. Table 30 below
shows the wire colors and related signals on WMT700.

Note that there are serial port signals available for configuration
purposes on the cable even though they are not used as
operational. The unused wires must be properly isolated and
terminated to avoid unwanted operation or failure.

Table 30 ROSA Cable 10 m (231425SP)


Power Supply Wire Colors Pin
Operating Power Supply White 1
Operating Power Supply Ground Gray-Pink 11
Heater Power Supply Gray 5
Heater Power Supply Pink 6
Heater Power Supply Ground Blue 7
Heater Power Supply Ground Red 8
Enclosure Ground Shield Shield
Analog Outputs
Analog Output AOUT2, Wind Direction Brown 2
Analog Output AOUT1, Wind Speed White-Green 13
Reference Input for AOUT2 (simulated potentiometer) White-Gray 17
Analog Output Ground Red-Blue 12
COM port RS-232 RS-485
RS232Rx Rx- Green 3
RS232Tx Tx- Yellow 4
COM2
- Tx+ Brown-Green 14
- Rx+ White-Yellow 15
COM1 and COM2 Communication Ports Ground Violet 10
RS-485, - Black 9
COM1
(service port) RS-485, + Brown- 16
Yellow

100 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 4 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

Using WS425 Cables with Adapters


If a retrofit installation using WMT700 cables is not possible,
there are adapters available for most situations.

- Adapter Cable for WS425 Serial (227569SP)


- Adapter Cable for WS425 Analog Frequency Output
(227570SP)
- Adapter Cable for WS425 Analog Voltage Output (227571SP)

The adapter cable specifications in this section apply for both


heated and non-heated versions of WMT700.

NOTE FIX30 is not compatible with adapter cables due to the small diameter of
the mast.

Adapter Cable for WS425 Serial Output


The Adapter Cable for WS425 Serial (227569SP) can be used
with the WS425 cables ZZ45203 and 010411.

Table 31 below lists the adapter pin-outs and signal descriptions


as they appear on their user guides for both WMT700 and WS425
connectors.

Table 31 Pin-Outs for WS425 Serial Adapter Cable


(227569SP)
WMT700 WMT700 Signal WS425 WS425 Signal WS425
Connector Description Connector Description Wire
Pin Pin Color
1 Operating Power 11 +12 VDC Brown
Supply
3 COM2: Rx-/ 10 Data in (RxD) (R-) Blue
RS232RX (RT-)
4 COM2: Tx-/ 9 Data out (TxD) (T-) Red
RS232TX (RT-)
5 Heater Power 16 +36 VDC Gray/Pink
Supply
7 Heater Power 3 GND Green
Supply Ground
10 COM2: 8 GND Yellow
Communications
Ground
11 Operating Power 1 GND Black
Supply Ground
14 COM2: Tx+ 12 Data out (T+) (RT+) White
15 COM2: Rx+ 14 Data in (R+) (RT+) Pink

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 101


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

NOTE The Adapter Cable for WS425 Serial (227569SP) does not support SDI-
12 operation.

Adapter Cable for WS425 Analog Frequency


Output
The Adapter Cable for WS425 Analog Frequency Output
(227570SP) can be with the WS425 cable ZZ45204. Table 32
below lists the adapter pin-outs and signal descriptions as they
appear on their user guides for both WMT700 and WS425
connectors.

Table 32 Pin-Outs for WS425 Analog Frequency Output


Adapter Cable
WMT700 WMT700 Signal WS425 WS425 Signal WS425
Connector Description Connector Description Wire
Pin Pin Color
1 Operating Power 11 +12 VDC Brown
Supply
2 Analog Output 13 WD Vout Gray
AOUT2, Wind
Direction
5 Heater Power 16 +36 VDC Gray/
Supply Pink
7 Heater Power 3 GND Green
Supply Ground
11 Operating Power 1 GND Black
Supply Ground
12 Analog Output 8 GND Yellow
Ground
13 Analog Output 14 WS Fout Pink
AOUT1, Wind
Speed
17 Reference Input 12 WD Vref in White
for AOUT2

102 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 4 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

Adapter Cable for WS425 Analog Voltage


Output
The Adapter Cable for WS425 Analog Voltage Output
(227571SP) can be used with the WS425 cable ZZ45204. Table
33 below lists the adapter pin-outs and signal descriptions as they
appear on their user guides for both WMT700 and WS425
connectors.

Table 33 Pin-Outs for WS425 Analog Voltage Output


Adapter Cable
WMT700 WMT700 Signal WS425 WS425 Signal WS425
Connector Description Connector Description Wire
Pin Pin Color
1 Operating Power 11 +12 VDC Brown
Supply
2 Analog Output 13 WD Vout Gray
AOUT2, Wind
Direction
5 Heater Power 16 +36 VDC Gray/
Supply Pink
7 Heater Power 3 GND Green
Supply Ground
11 Operating Power 1 GND Black
Supply Ground
12 Analog Output 8 GND Yellow
Ground
13 Analog Output 15 WS Vout Violet
AOUT1, Wind
Speed
17 Reference Input 12 WD Vref in White
for AOUT2

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 103


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Differences between WMT700 and


WS425 Analog Output Signals
WMT700 pin connections differ from the connections of WS425
in that wind speed signal output, both voltage and frequency
signals, appears on WMT700 pin 13.

NOTE WMT700 analog outputs must be configured according to the appropriate


analog output mode, which is either voltage, frequency, or potentiometer.

Table 34 below lists the analog output connections for WMT700


and WS425 connector pins.

Table 34 Analog Output Connections


WMT700 WMT700 Signal Voltage Output WS425 Connector Pin,
Connector Description Wire Color
Pin
13 Analog Output Voltage 15, Violet (connect pin 14
AOUT1, Wind to ground)
Speed Current not available
Frequency 14, Pink
2 Analog Output Voltage 13, Gray
AOUT2, Wind Current not available
Direction
Potentiometer 13, Gray
17 Reference Input Potentiometer 12, White
for AOUT2
12 Analog Output All modes 1, Black (common with
Ground supply ground)

104 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 4 ________________________________________________________________ Installation

Powering in Retrofit Installations


WMT700 is designed to operate with the same supply voltages as
WS425 and no connection changes are necessary. The power
consumption depends on the selected heating options. WMT700
with heated transducers can be used to replace similar WS425
models. When upgrading from WS425 to WMT700 with heated
transducers and arms, more capacity is required from the power
supply unit.

For information on power supply requirements of each WMT700


product type, see Table 27 on page 87.

NOTE When WMT700 is in operation, the power consumption is higher than


with WS425. This can affect system performance in power-critical
applications such as solar-powered or battery-powered systems.
Use solar-power or battery backup only to secure operating voltage.
Ensure that the solar-powered system has a sufficient power reserve
available.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 105


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

This page intentionally left blank.

106 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

CHAPTER 5
OPERATION

This chapter contains information on WMT700 configuration,


operating commands, protocols, and data messages.

Note that some of the operations are conducted in the


configuration mode and others in the measurement mode. For
detailed mode descriptions, see section Measurement and
Configuration Modes on page 47.

Serial Connection to WMT700


To update WMT700 settings through a serial connection, the
following prerequisites are needed:

- PC with a serial port.


- Required cables for a serial connection. For more information,
see section Cables on page 33.
- Any terminal program, such as Tera Term or Windows
HyperTerminal.

Communicating with Terminal


Software
To switch WMT700 to the configuration mode using Windows
HyperTerminal:

1. Connect a cable between your terminal computer, power


supply, and WMT700.
2. Open the Windows HyperTerminal program.
3. Cancel the new connection.
4. From the File menu, click Properties.
5. Select the correct COM port and click Configure.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 107


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

6. Set the communication parameters according to the


configured port settings of WMT700.
The default values for WMT700 are:
- Bits per second: 9600
- Data bits: 8
- Parity: None
- Stop bits: 1
- Flow control: None
7. Click Apply and OK.
8. On the Settings tab, click ASCII setup. Select ASCII
sending - Send line ends with line feed. Click OK and
close the New Connection Properties window.
9. On the View menu, click Font. In the Font list, select
Terminal.
10. From the Call menu, click Call. Enter a name and select an
icon for the connection. Click OK.

When a serial line cable is connected to the PC and the terminal


setup is correct, switch the sensor power supply on. The following
information is displayed to terminal screen:
WMT700 v<version number>

The sensor goes to measurement mode after four seconds and


it is ready to receive measurement mode commands.

At the end of each command, press ENTER to execute the


command. For a successful execution, the following combinations
of Carriage Return <CR> and Line Feed <LF> are accepted:

- <CR>
- <LF>
- <CR><LF>

Communication baud rate can be configured from 300 baud to


115200 baud. For available baud rates, see Appendix D,
Configuration Parameters, on page 205.

108 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Entering and Exiting Configuration Mode


With OPEN and CLOSE commands you can toggle between
configuration mode and measurement mode. In the measurement
mode, OPEN changes the mode to the configuration mode, and in
the configuration mode, CLOSE changes the mode to the
measurement mode. Note that the configuration mode does not
recognize the OPEN command and the measurement mode does
not recognize the CLOSE command.

OPEN Entering Configuration


Mode
To switch WMT700 from the measurement mode to the
configuration mode, use the CLOSE command.
$0OPEN<enter>
|| | |____To activate the command, press Enter
|| |_________The OPEN command
||____________Sensor address, all sensors answer 0 address
|_____________Fixed $ character starts command

After a successful OPEN command the sensor switches from


measurement mode to configuration mode and the following
symbol is displayed:
>

CLOSE Exiting Configuration


Mode
To switch WMT700 from the configuration mode to the
measurement mode, use the CLOSE command.
>CLOSE<enter>
| | |____To activate the command, press Enter
| |__________The CLOSE command
|_____________Configuration mode prompt

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 109


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Configuration
NOTE You have chosen the initial settings for WMT700 when placing the
order. In case you want to check and/or change the settings, see the
instructions in this section.
Otherwise, you can start using WMT700 directly after the installation.

The initial settings have been configured at the factory according


to the customer specifications you have given when ordering the
product. For available options, see section Ordering Options on
page 23.

Configuration Overview
You can configure WMT700 settings for serial communication or
analog output with configuration commands using the serial port.
However, you must set the port to the configuration mode before
starting configuration. It is also possible to use one serial port in
the configuration mode while operating WMT700 from the other
serial port.

WMT700 provides commands for:

- Parameter handling
- Wind measurement control
- Diagnostics
- Information

If the messages parameter is set to 1 (response for parameter


setting is enabled, see Appendix D, Configuration Parameters, on
page 205), WMT700 responds to an invalid command with an
error message. If the messages parameter is set to 0 (response for
parameter setting is disabled), WMT700 does not send any error
messages. You can fetch the most recent error data in the
configuration mode with the ERRORS command, see section
ERRORS Get Error Codes and Counts on page 116.

NOTE You can configure WMT700 by sending individual commands or by


loading a configuration file to the sensor. For instructions on configuring
all settings at once using configuration files, see section User-
Configurable Data Messages on page 119.

110 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Table 35 List of Configuration Mode Commands


Command Description
? Displays a list of configuration commands.
BAUD Changes or displays serial port settings.
CLEARERR Resets error counters.
CLOSE Switches the serial port to measurement mode.
ERRORS Fetches the error codes and counter information from WMT700.
G Displays either all or specified parameters.
H Displays a list of data messages and available values for
measurement unit, profile, baud rate, interface, and analog
output mode.
MEAS Starts wind measurement based on the user-configurable
averaging time. WMT700 does not send data messages
automatically.
POLL Tests data polling.
RESET Resets WMT700.
S Changes selected parameters or defines new data messages.
START Starts continuous measurement.
STOP Stops continuous measurement.
VERSION Displays the software version.
WIND_GET Fetches wind calibration information.

Parameter Handling Commands


All the commands in the configurating mode are in the following
form:

>CMD x,y<enter>
| | | | | | |___ Press Enter key to activate the command
| | | | | |_______Value of the parameter
| | | | |_______ Comma
| | | |________ Any parameter in Table 66 on page 205
| | |__________ Space
| |______________ Command
|_________________ Configuration mode prompt

The parameter name and allowed parameter values depend on the


command. For certain commands they are optional. In the
following command descriptions, WMT700 configuration mode
prompt and enter are left out for clarity.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 111


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

S Set Parameter
The S command defines new data messages and changes values
of the WMT700 parameters. For parameter names and the
allowed and default values, see Appendix D, Configuration
Parameters on page 205.

You can also use the S command to configure data messages. For
instructions, see Appendix D, Configuration Parameters, on page
205.

If you try to set an invalid value for a parameter or an invalid item


for a data message, the response depends on the messages
parameter. If messages are enabled (messages parameter is set to
1), WMT700 responds with an error message. If the messages
parameter has been set to 0, WMT700 does not send any response
to set parameter command. You can also fetch the most recent
error data in the configuration mode with the ERRORS
command, see section ERRORS Get Error Codes and Counts
on page 116.

NOTE Do not switch the power supply off immediately after the S command.
Power should be on for at least 5 seconds after the S command, or the
updated parameters values are not saved.

S x,y

where
x = Any parameter in Appendix D, Configuration Parameters, on
page 205
y = Value of the parameter

Example 1

In this example the baud rate is set to 2400 bps, parity to even,
data bits to 8 bits, and stop bits to 1 bit. WMT700 needs to be
RESET before the communication settings take place.
S com1_baud,2
S com1_parity,1
S com1_data,8
S com1_stop,1

NOTE You can also change or view the serial port settings with the BAUD
command. With the BAUD command the communication settings take
place immediately.

112 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Example 2

In this example the analog output 1 is set to send measurement


data as a current signal, the gain is set to 1 mA/m/s and the offset
to 4 mA.
S aout1_o,0.004
S aout1_g,0.001
S aout1mode,0

Example 3

In this example both analog outputs are disabled to reduce power


consumption.
S aout1mode,3
S aout2mode,7

G Get Parameter
The G command shows the values of the configuration
parameters. You can either display all parameter values or only
certain values.

For a list of available parameters, see Appendix D Configuration


Parameters on page 205.

Get All Parameters


You can use the G command to view all parameter values if you
do not specify any parameters in the command.

Get Specified Parameters


You can use the G command to view specified parameter values.

G x

where
x = Any parameter in Appendix D Configuration Parameters on
page 205

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 113


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Example:

In this example the averaging time is shown to be 4 seconds.


G wndAvg
s wndAvg ,3.00000

BAUD Display or Set Port Settings


This command shows or changes values of the serial port settings.

Set Port Settings


You can use the BAUD command to change the bit rate, parity
bit, data bits, stop bit, and communication profile of the selected
serial port. To restore default serial port settings, see Restoring
Serial Port Settings on page 186.

NOTE There is a 100-millisecond delay after which WMT700 takes the settings
into use. Do not send commands to WMT700 during this time.

BAUD x,y,z,w

where
x = Bit rate (300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400,
57600, or 115200)
y = Data bits (7 or 8)
z = Parity (n = none, e = even, o = odd)
w = Stop bits (1 or 2)

Example:

In this example the bit rate is set to 115200, data bits to 8, parity
to none, and stop bits to 1.

BAUD 115200,8,n,1

Display Port Settings


You can use the BAUD command to display the current serial
port settings.

BAUD

114 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Wind Measurement Control Commands


MEAS Single Wind Measurement
This command starts wind measurement based on the user-
configurable averaging time. WMT700 does not send the data
message automatically. Use the polling command to fetch
measurement data in the required data message format.

MEAS

START Start Continuous


Measurement
This command starts continuous wind measurement. Continuous
measurement starts when you exit the configuration mode or
restart WMT700.

You can retrieve data with a polling command or configure


WMT700 to send data messages at selected intervals. You can set
the interval for automatic messages with the autoInt parameter.

START

STOP Stop Wind Measurement


This command stops continuous wind measurement.

To restart measurement, use the MEAS or START command.


You can fetch the most recent measurement data at any time with
the polling command.

STOP

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 115


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Diagnostics and Support Commands


ERRORS Get Error Codes and
Counts
This command fetches error information from WMT700. For a
list of the errors and events, see section Error and Event Messages
on page 185.

ERRORS

The response is as follows:

a,b,c,d,e,f

where
a = Number of events since latest reset
b = Code for the first event since latest reset
c = Code for the most recent event
d = Number of errors since latest reset
e = Code for the first error since latest reset
f = Code for the most recent error

Example:

1,3,3,10,13,13

Interpretation of the example message:

- Number of events since latest reset: 1


- Code for the first event since latest reset: 3
- Code for the most recent event: 3
- Number of errors since latest reset: 10
- Code for the first error since latest reset: 13
- Code for the most recent error: 13

If no errors or events have occurred yet, the response is the


following:
0,0,0,0,0,0

116 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

CLEARERR Reset Error Codes


and Counts
This command resets the error counters of WMT700.

CLEARERR

POLL Get Message


This command fetches the latest measurement data from
WMT700. You need to specify the data message format in the
command.

NOTE Vaisala recommends that you only use this command for testing data
connections. To fetch measurement data for other purposes, switch the
serial port to the measurement mode. The polling command in the
measurement mode depends on the selected profile.

POLL y

where
y = Identification number for the data message format. For a list
of data message formats, see Table 40 on page 128

RESET Reset CPU


This command resets WMT700.
RESET

Information Commands
? Display Command Set
This command displays a list of available configuration
commands.
?

H Display Help and Messages


This command displays a list of supported data messages and
their identification numbers as well as the available values for

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 117


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

wind speed measurement unit, profile, baud rate, interface, and


analog output.
H

VERSION Show Firmware Version


This command displays the label and version of the WMT700
software.
VERSION

WIND_GET Get Calibration Data


This command fetches the WMT700 calibration date and other
calibration data. This information is mostly intended for Vaisala
technical support.
WIND_GET

Configuration Parameters
There are a number of parameters affecting WMT700
functionality. Appendix D, Configuration Parameters, on page
205 lists the parameters for configuring WMT700 settings. It
includes a detailed description of and the default values for each
parameter and the allowed values when using the WMT700
profile. Unless otherwise stated in the table, the changes take
place immediately after the command is sent.

To view and set parameter values, use the G and S commands.

NOTE You can configure WMT700 by sending individual commands or by


loading a configuration file to the sensor. For instructions on configuring
all settings at once using configuration files, see section Loading Settings
from Configuration File on page 124.

For information on configurable parameters and allowed values


when using the WS425 and SDI-12 profiles, see section
Upgrading from WS425 to WMT700 on page 89.

NOTE In the automatic message mode, to initiate continuous measurement, use


the START command. See section START Start Continuous
Measurement on page 115.

118 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

User-Configurable Data Messages


You can define new data messages for automatic messaging or
polling with the WMT700 profile. Each item in a user-
configurable data message string consists of 2 characters after the
\ character. For example, the item for wind speed is \ws. The
maximum number of characters for a string is 80.

The characters are passed to messages as they are. All visible


ASCII characters are allowed, except for Table 36 on page 120
that lists the available items for data message strings.

For a list of the predefined data messages, see section Data


Messages on page 127.

NOTE You can only use the user-configurable data messages with the WMT700
protocol.

Configuring Data Messages


Use the S command to define new data messages for WMT700
with the msg1, msg2, msg3, and msg4 parameters. For more
information on the S command, see S Set Parameter on page
112.
S y,\xx

where
y = Parameter for the data message (msg1, msg2, msg3, msg4).
\xx = String for the new data message. For the available items, see
section Items for Data Messages below

After you have defined the new data message, you can test the
message by polling it in the configuration mode. For instructions,
see section POLL Get Message on page 117.

Items for Data Messages


The user-configurable data messages can contain wind
measurement, control character, check sum, and monitoring
items. Configure new data messages with the msg1, msg2, msg3,
and msg4 parameters. All available items are listed in Table 36 on
page 120, Table 37 on page 120, and Table 38 on page 121.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 119


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Table 36 Wind Measurement Items for Data Messages


Item Description
\ad Address
\dm Wind direction minimum calculated over the averaging period
\dx Wind direction maximum calculated over the averaging period
\gu Wind gust speed
\lu Wind lull speed
\rg Signal quality
\st Speed of sound
\Ts Sonic temperature
\va Validity of the measurement data. The available values are:
1 = Valid wind measurement data
0 = Unable to measure
\w1 Wind direction when the peak speed (\wp) occurred
\wd Wind direction, average
\wm Wind speed minimum calculated over the averaging period
\wp Wind speed maximum calculated over the averaging period
\ws Wind speed, average
\wx Wind speed average, x component
\wy Wind speed average, y component

Table 37 Control Character and Checksum Items for


Data Messages
Item Description
\01 SOH (start of heading)
\02 STX (start of text)
\03 ETX (end of text)
\04 EOT (end of transmission)
\cr CR (carriage return)
\lf LF (line feed)
\se Checksum calculation end point
\sp Print checksum
\ss Checksum calculation start point

120 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Table 38 Monitoring Items for Data Messages


Item Description
\er Status code. The code is a decimal number. Each bit
corresponds to a status flag. For a list of the bits, see section
Status Flags on page 123
\fb 0 = No error
1 = Blocked sensor
\fh 0 = No error
1 = Heater failure. Incorrect heater resistance.
\fs 0 = No error
1 = Wind speed exceeds operating limits
2 = Sonic temperature exceeds operating limits
3 = Wind speed and sonic temperature exceed operating limits
\ft This value indicates temperature sensor failures when converted
to binary format:
Bit 0 = Temperature sensor 1 failure
Bit 1 = Temperature sensor 2 failure
Bit 2 = Temperature sensor 3 failure
\fv 0 = No error
1 = Supply voltage (Vh or Vi) too high
2 = Supply voltage (Vh or Vi) too low
\pa Average heating power
\ra Heater resistance
\ta Transducer temperature
\ti Internal temperature
\vh Heater voltage
\vi Supply voltage

Example 1:

In this example a new data message with identification number 1


is defined. The items included in the message are average wind
speed, average wind direction, and supply voltage.

S msg1,$\ws,\wd,\vi\cr\lf

When the above message is polled, WMT700 sends the following


data if the average wind speed is 5 m/s, the average wind
direction is 128 degrees, and the supply voltage is 23.4:
$05.00,128,23.4<CR><LF>

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 121


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Example 2:

In this example the data message 2 is set to include the following


items:

- SOH
- Checksum calculation start point
- Wind speed, average
- Wind direction, average
- Wind gust speed
- Wind lull speed
- Wind direction minimum
- Wind direction maximum
- Wind direction during the peak speed (wp) occurred
- Checksum calculation end point
- EOT
- Print checksum
- CR
- LF

S
msg2,\01\ss$\ws,\wd,\gu,\lu,\dm,\dx,\w1\se\04\sp\cr\l
f

WMT700 sends the following message that starts with the SOH
character which is excluded from the checksum. The checksum
ends before the EOT character. The checksum (in this case, D8) is
printed after the EOT character.

_$02.66,98.21,02.66,02.60,95.68,99.53,99.34_D8<CR><L
F>

The non-printable characters are shown above as and


<CR><LF>.

122 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Status Flags
Table 39 below lists the status flags included in the data message
when the status code item \er has been added to the message.
Each bit corresponds to a specific status.

Status flags are coded in decimal number format. To extract each


bit from the status code, the decimal number must be converted to
binary format.

Table 39 Status Flags


Bit Description
0 Temperature sensor 1 failure
1 Temperature sensor 2 failure
2 Temperature sensor 3 failure
3 Heater failure. Incorrect heater element resistance
4 Too high (Vh > 40 V or Vi > 40 V) supply voltage
5 Too low (Vh < 20 V or Vi < 10 V) supply voltage
6 Wind speed exceeds operating limits
7 Sonic temperature exceeds operating limits
8 Wind measurement fails over 80% of the averaging time.
Reported wind is still correct
9 Not used
10 Blocked sensor. Reported wind is still correct

Example:

The message contains status flag value 130:

130 in decimal format is 128 + 2 00010000010 Binary


| |_________ 2
|_______________ 128
000 1000 0010
| | | | | | | | | | |_Temperature sensor 1 OK
| | | | | | | | | |__Temperature sensor 2 failure ON
| | | | | | | | |___Temperature sensor 3 OK
| | | | | | | |____Heater OK
| | | | | | |______Supply voltage not too high
| | | | | |_______Supply voltage not too low
| | | | |________Wind speed in operation limit
| | | |_________Sonic temperature exceeds operating limit
| | |___________Wind measurement OK
| |____________Not used
|_____________No sensors blocked

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 123


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Loading Settings from Configuration


File
To facilitate the configuration of WMT700, all settings can be
configured at once using configuration files. You can send a text
file containing the configuration settings to the sensor with a
terminal program, such as Tera Term or Windows
HyperTerminal.
For a list of the parameters and their allowed and default values,
see Appendix D, Configuration Parameters, on page 205.
To change the parameters over the RS-485, RS-422, or RS-232
interface:

1. Use the G command to fetch the current WMT700


parameters.
2. Disable error messages with the following command:

S messages,0

3. Copy the values from the terminal program to a file.


Remove the parameters you do not want to change. Also
remove the parameter messages to avoid switching
messaging on during the transfer.
4. Clear the error counters with the following command:
CLEARERR

5. Send the file to WMT700 to change the settings.


6. To verify that the parameters are set correctly (the values
are in the allowed range and all parameters are valid), read
the error counters with the following command:

ERRORS

If all values are valid, WMT700 sends the following


response:

0,0,0,0

You can also use the G command to check that the


parameters are set correctly.

If the response for parameter setting is not disabled (as instructed


in step 3) but the messages parameter is set to 1 instead, WMT700
responds to each S command confirming the new parameter
values. If an error occurs during the configuration, WMT700
sends a response containing the error messages.

124 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

NOTE RS-485 is a half-duplex interface. If the RS-485 interface is used and


response for parameter setting is enabled (messages parameter is set to
1), a simple terminal program cannot be used for loading parameters
from file.

Example:

This configuration file contains all the WMT700 parameters that


are user-configurable.
S wndAvg,1.00000
S wndUnit,0
S wndDirOffset, 0.00000
S wndOrientation,0
S wndGustTime,3.00000
S wndCover,4
S wndVector,1
S wndCoast,0.00000
S autoInt,1.00000
S autoSend,0
S autoPort,1
S com1_baud,4
S com1_parity,0
S com1_data,8
S com1_stop,1
S com1_protocol,0
S com1_delay,20
S com2_baud,4
S com2_parity,0
S com2_data,8
S com2_stop,1
S com2_protocol,0
S com2_delay,20
S com2_interf,0
S sleepTime,5
S startDelay,5
S heaterOn,1.00000
S freqType,0
S aout1_o,0.00000
S aout1_g,1.00000
S aout1minv,0.00000
S aout1maxv,32000.0
S aout1err,1000.00
S aout1mode,3
S aout2_g,1.00000
S aout2_o,0.00000
S aout2minv,0.00000
S aout2maxv,32000.0
S aout2err,1000.00
S aout2mode,7
S msg1,\ss$\ws,\wd,\se\sp\cr\lf
S msg2,2
S msg3,3
S msg4,4
S address,A
S messages,1

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 125


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Operating WMT700
After WMT700 has been installed and configured, you can start
operating the wind sensor as follows:
- To receive wind measurement data through a serial connection
as data messages, use serial communication.
When using the WMT700 profile, see the operating
instructions below.
For using the WS425 or SDI-12 profiles, see section Operating
WMT700 with WS425 and SDI-12 Profiles on page 145.
- To receive wind measurement data as current, potentiometer,
voltage, or frequency output, use analog output.
For general information, see section Analog Output on page
50.
For instructions on using WMT700 analog output in a system
configured for WS425, see section Operating WMT700 in
WS425 Analog Output Mode on page 139.

NOTE For a complete list of the serial commands available for the WMT700
series wind sensors, see Appendix A, Complete Command Set for
WMT700, on page 195.

Operating WMT700 with Terminal


Program
To operate WMT700 through a serial connection, the following
prerequisites are needed:
- PC with a serial port
- Required cables for serial connection. For more information,
see section Cables on page 33.
- Any terminal program, such as Tera Term or Windows
HyperTerminal

To switch on WMT700 in the measurement mode using


Windows HyperTerminal, see section Communicating with
Terminal Software on page 107.
For information on operating commands, see section
Measurement Mode Commands on page 135.

For information on available data messages, see section Data


Messages on page 127.

126 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Data Messages
Depending on the settings, there are two modes in WMT700 for
sending data messages to the serial ports:

- Poll mode
- Automatic message mode

The data messages can contain measurement data calculated by


WMT700 and information on the status and properties of the
wind sensor.

For the Automatic message mode, you need to set the following
parameters:

- autoInt (defines the message send interval in seconds, 0.25 s


resolution)
- autoSend (0 = Automatic message mode disabled, for available
messages, see Table 40 on page 128.
- autoPort (defines where the message is sent: 1 = COM1,
2 = COM2)

When the WMT700 protocol is used, you can use either one of
the predefined message formats or user-configurable data
message format.

Table 40 on page 128 lists the data messages supported by


WMT700. The data message numbers in the table below are
needed when the WMT700 protocol POLL command is used or
the Automatic Message mode is used with any protocol.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 127


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Table 40 Data Messages


Data Message Description
Number
WMT700 Data Messages
20 WMT700 NMEA MWV profile message that reports average
wind speed and direction.
21 WMT700 profile message that reports average wind speed
and direction.
22 WMT700 profile message that reports wind speed in x and y
components.
23 WMT700 profile message that reports wind speed and
direction and self-diagnostics information.
24 WMT700 profile message that reports wind speed and
direction and self-diagnostics information, and includes the
checksum.
25 WMT700 profile message that reports wind measurement,
sonic temperature, and status data, and includes the
checksum.
27 ROSA - MES12 Standard profile message
WS425 and SDI-12 Messages
15 WS425 A/B NMEA Extended profile message
16 WS425 A/B ASCII profile message
17 WS425 A/B SDI-12 profile message for M command
18 WS425 A/B SDI-12 profile message for V command
19 WS425 A/B NMEA Standard profile message
32 WS425 A/B WAT11 profile message
User-Configurable Data Messages
1 Items defined by the user.
2 See User-Configurable Data Messages on page 119
3
4

To select a data message when using polling, specify the


corresponding data message identification number in the polling
command. See section POLL Poll Data on page 137.

To select a data message when using automatic messages, use the


configuration parameters. See section Configuration Parameters
on page 118.

Each of the predefined data messages of the WMT700 protocol is


described in more detail in sections below.

NOTE For more information on user-configurable data messages, see section


User-Configurable Data Messages on page 119.

128 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

WMT700 Data Message 21


WMT700 Data Message 21 reports the wind speed and direction
in the format described below:
$\ws,\wd\cr\lf

where
$ = Fixed text
\ws = Wind speed, average
\wd = Wind direction, average
\cr = CR (carriage return)
\lf = LF (line feed)

Example:
$00.08,299.20<cr><lf>

Interpretation of the example message:

- Wind speed, average: 0.08 m/s


- Wind direction, average: 299.2

For examples of different wind speed and direction presentations,


see Figure 13 on page 39.

WMT700 Data Message 22


WMT700 Data Message 22 reports the wind speed in x and y
components in the format described below:
$\wx,\wy\cr\lf

where
$ = Fixed text
\wx = Wind speed average, x component
\wy = Wind speed average, y component
\cr = CR (carriage return)
\lf = LF (line feed)

Example:
$-00.04,00.07<cr><lf>

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 129


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Interpretation of the example message:


- Wind speed, average, x component: -0.04
- Wind speed, average, y component: 0.07

For examples of different wind speed and direction presentations,


see Figure 13 on page 39.

WMT700 Data Message 23


WMT700 Data Message 23 reports wind measurement and self-
diagnostics data in the format described below:
$\ws,\wd,\wp,\wm,\Ts,\vh,\vi,\ta,\er\cr\lf

where
$ = Fixed text
\ws = Wind speed, average
\wd = Wind direction, average
\wp = Wind speed, maximum
\wm = Wind speed, minimum
\Ts = Sonic temperature
\vh = Heater voltage
\vi = Supply voltage
\ta = Transducer temperature
\er = Status code. The code is a decimal number. Each bit
corresponds to a status flag. For a list of the bits, see
section Status Flags on page 123
\cr = CR (carriage return)
\lf = LF (line feed)

Example:
$03.21,75.83,03.34,03.15,22.37,12.2,23.5,20.0,32<cr><
lf>

Interpretation of the example message:


- Wind speed, average: 3.21 m/s
- Wind direction, average: 75.83
- Wind speed, maximum: 3.34 m/s
- Wind speed, minimum: 3.15 m/s
- Sonic temperature: 22.37 C
- Heater voltage: 12.2 V
- Supply voltage: 23.5 V
- Transducer temperature: 20.0 C
- Status code: 32, which corresponds to status bit 5. For the
meaning of status flags, see section Status Flags on page 123

130 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

WMT700 Data Message 24


WMT700 Data Message 24 reports wind measurement and self-
diagnostics data. The checksum is included in the message.
WMT700 calculates the checksum by applying 8-bit XOR for all
bytes between checksum calculation start point and end point.
The result is printed as a 2-digit hexadecimal value. The message
is in the format described below:
\ss$\ws,\wd,\wp,\wm,\Ts,\vh,\vi,\ta,\er,\se\sp\cr\lf
where
\ss = Checksum calculation start point, not shown in the message
$ = Fixed text
\ws = Wind speed, average
\wd = Wind direction, average
\wp = Wind speed, maximum
\wm = Wind speed, minimum
\Ts = Sonic temperature
\vh = Heater voltage
\vi = Supply voltage
\ta = Transducer temperature
\er = Status code. The code is a decimal number. Each bit
corresponds to a status flag. For a list of the bits, see section
Status Flags on page 123
\se = Checksum calculation end point, not shown in the message
\sp = Print checksum (to verify message integrity)
\cr = CR (carriage return)
\lf = LF (line feed)

Example:
$03.45,76.03,03.58,03.37,21.97,23.8,23.6,23.8,0,D4<cr
><lf>

Interpretation of the example message:

- Wind speed, average: 3.45 m/s


- Wind direction, average: 76.03
- Wind speed, maximum: 3.58 m/s
- Wind speed, minimum: 3.37 m/s
- Sonic temperature: 21.97 C
- Heater voltage: 23.8 V
- Supply voltage: 23.6 V
- Transducer temperature: 23.8 C
- Status code: 0
- Checksum: D4

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 131


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

WMT700 Data Message 25


WMT700 Data Message 25 reports wind measurement, sonic
temperature, and status data. The checksum is included in the
message. WMT700 calculates the checksum by applying 8-bit
XOR for all bytes between checksum calculation start point and
end point. The result is printed as a 2-digit hexadecimal value.
The message is in the format described below:
\ss$\ws,\wd,\wp,\wm,\Ts,\er,\se\sp\cr\lf

where
\ss = Checksum calculation start point, not shown in the message
$ = Fixed text
\ws = Wind speed, average
\wd = Wind direction, average
\wp = Wind speed, maximum
\wm = Wind speed, minimum
\Ts = Sonic temperature
\er = Status code. The code is a decimal number. Each bit
corresponds to a status flag. For a list of the bits, see section
Status Flags on page 123
\se = Checksum calculation end point, not shown in the message
\sp = Print checksum (to verify message integrity)
\cr = CR (carriage return)
\lf = LF (line feed)

132 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Example:
$03.22,75.29,03.38,03.07,22.13,0,A4<cr><lf>

Interpretation of the example message:

- Wind speed, average: 3.22 m/s


- Wind direction, average: 75.29
- Wind speed, maximum: 3.38 m/s
- Wind speed, minimum: 3.07 m/s
- Sonic temperature: 22.13 C
- Status code: 0
- Checksum: A4

ROSA - MES12 Data Message


The MES12 Data Message 12 is used in the ROSA Surface
Analyzer for Roads and Runways system. You can use this data
message when WMT700 is connected to the Vaisala ROSA
system.

This message contains sensor identifications (sids), corresponding


data items, and the synchronization characters SOH, STX, and
ETX. The lines are ended by CR and LF characters.

For more information, see Chapter 5, Operation, section Data


Messages, in the Surface Analyzer for Roads and Runways
ROSA, DM32 Version User's Guide (M210242EN).

Missing Readings
If WMT700 is not able to measure the wind, it indicates a missing
reading in the output. Most common reasons for measurement
problems are ice, birds, or other foreign objects on the line of
measurement.

When the WMT700 profile is used, WMT700 indicates missing


readings by showing 999 in the data messages.

Example:

When the WMT700 Data Message 22 is polled, missing readings


are indicated with the following response:
$999.00,999.00<cr><lf>

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 133


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Error Indication
WMT700 provides advanced self-diagnostics for monitoring the
status of the wind sensor and the validity of the measurement
data. You can use the diagnostics as follows:

- WMT700 checks the status of the internal operational software


at each reset by verifying the CRC checksum of the software.
The software check is not made periodically; it is only made at
each reset. If the checksum is incorrect, WMT700 does not
start up. If the checksum is correct, WMT700 continues by
calculating the CRC checksum of the parameter memory. In
case the parameter memory is corrupted, the sensor replies
with the text "Parameters crc error" upon startup. In case the
parameter memory checksum is correct, WMT700 replies with
the text "ready" as shown in the example below.
>$WMT700 v<version number>
ready.

- To check the status of the wind sensor, include the status code
item \er in the data message. You need to convert the status
code to a binary number to verify the status. An error code
does not indicate that the wind data is invalid. For more
information, see section Status Flags on page 123.
- To check that the wind data is valid, include the \va item in the
data message. For more information, see section Items for Data
Messages on page 119.
- To check other diagnostics-related data, include the required
items in the data message. For more information, see section
Items for Data Messages on page 119.

NOTE Only a power-off self-test exists. See Appendix A, Complete Command


Set for WMT700, on page 195.

134 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Measurement Mode Commands


The available commands in the measurement mode depend on the
selected profile.

NOTE For a list of serial commands available for all the communication profiles
supported by WMT700, see Appendix A, Complete Command Set for
WMT700, on page 195.
For more detailed information on commands of the WS425 and SDI-12
profiles, see section Operating WMT700 with WS425 and SDI-12
Profiles on page 145.

WMT700 Profile Commands


When the WMT700 profile is selected, you can use the
commands listed in this section to operate WMT700. In each of
the command descriptions below, <CR> is an ASCII carriage
return control character and <LF> is an ASCII line feed control
character. Commands may be sent at any speed. The command is
executed when end-of-line character is received.

Each measurement mode command must start with the user-


configurable WMT700 address. It can be any string of printable
ASCII characters, with the maximum length of 30 characters.
Characters <CR>, <LF>, and $ are not allowed. If you use 0 as
the address in the command, WMT700 responds regardless of the
configured address.

If response for parameter setting is enabled (messages parameter


is set to 1), WMT700 responds to an invalid command with an
error message.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 135


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Table 41 Measurement Mode Commands


Command Description
$aMEAS Starts wind measurement in single measurement mode. The
duration of the measurement is based on the user-
configurable averaging time.
$aOPEN Switches the serial port to configuration mode.
$aPOLL,y Fetches latest measurement data from WMT700.
$aSLEEP Switches WMT700 from normal operating mode to low-power
mode.

where
$ = Fixed text
a = WMT700 address. If the value is 0, it refers to any
WMT700 address
y = Identification number for the data message format. For a
list of the data message formats, see Table 40 on page 128

MEAS Start Measurement


This command starts wind measurement in single measurement
mode based on the user-configurable averaging time. WMT700
does not send the data message automatically. Use the polling
command to fetch the measurement data in the required format.
$aMEAS<CR><LF>

where
$ = Fixed text
a = WMT700 address. If the value is 0, it refers to any
WMT700 address

OPEN Enter Configuration Mode


This command switches the serial port to the configuration mode.
$aOPEN<CR><LF>

where
$ = Fixed text
a = WMT700 address. If the value is 0, it refers to any
WMT700 address

NOTE WMT700 automatically returns to normal operating mode, if no


commands are received in two minutes, or multiple unrecognized
commands are detected.

136 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

POLL Poll Data


This command fetches data from WMT700. You need to specify
the data message number in the polling command.

NOTE When WMT700 is in the low-power mode, it does not receive the first
character in the command. Thus, you must send an extra character
(space) before the polling command to receive data.

$aPOLL,y<CR><LF>

Where
$ = Fixed text
a = WMT700 address. If the value is 0, it refers to any
WMT700 address
y = Identification number for the data message format.
For a list of data message formats, see Table 40 on page
128

Example:

In this example WMT700 custom data message 1 is polled from


WMT700.
$0POLL,1<CR><LF>

SLEEP Enter Low-Power Mode


This command switches WMT700 from the normal operating
mode to the low-power mode. WMT700 will resume normal
operation after sleep period determined by the sleepTime
parameter has elapsed, or when a character is received on data
port COM2. For more information on the sleepTime parameter,
see Appendix D, Configuration Parameters, on page 205.

$aSLEEP<CR><LF>

where
$ = Fixed text
a = WMT700 address. If the value is 0, it refers to any WMT700
address

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 137


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

ROSA - MES12 Profile Commands


When the ROSA - MES12 profile is selected, you can poll data in
the MES12 data message format. This data message is used in the
ROSA Surface Analyzer for Roads and Runways system. You
can use this data message when WMT700 is connected to the
Vaisala ROSA system.

M 12 Poll MES12 Data Message


This command fetches data from WMT700 in the MES12 data
message format. For more information on the data message, see
section ROSA - MES12 Data Message on page 133.
@a M 12<CR><LF>

where
@ = Fixed text
a = WMT700 address. The allowed range is from 0 to 99

138 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Operating WMT700 in WS425 Analog


Output Mode
This section provides information on operating WMT700 in
analog output mode in a system configured for WS425. For
general information on operating WMT700 with analog output,
see section Analog Output on page 50.

Analog Output Settings


In analog output operation WMT700 takes measurements
according to the configured averaging time and synthesizes the
analog outputs of wind speed and wind direction with an update
interval of 0.25 seconds. The analog output signal type and range
depend on the configured settings.

Normally, analog output is enabled and the output settings are


preconfigured at the factory according to your order. WMT700
can be operated using these settings directly after the installation.
However, the analog output settings of WMT700 can be changed
or the analog output functionality can be disabled at any time to
save power over the serial interface.

When operating WMT700 in a system configured for WS425, the


analog output settings must be configured according to Table 42
on page 140 using the S command. For more information on the S
command, see section S Set Parameter on page 112.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 139


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Table 42 Required Parameters for WS425 Analog


Output Operation Mode
Parameter Name Default Value Allowed Values Description of How to Emulate WS425
aout1err 1000 0 . 32000 Set 1 for voltage output and 625 for
frequency output for similar operation as
with WS425.
aout1_g 1 0 . 100 Gain for AOUT1.
Set 0.017895 for compatibility with WS425
voltage output.
Set 11.18 for compatibility with WS425
frequency output.
aout2_g 1 0 . 100 Gain for AOUT2.
Set 0.0027855 for compatibility with
WS425 potentiometer output.
aout1mode 3 0 = Current Analog output mode for AOUT1.
1 = Voltage Set 1 for WS425 voltage output
2 = Frequency compatibility.
3 = Disabled 2 for WS425 frequency output
compatibility.
aout2mode 7 4 = Current Analog output mode for AOUT2.
5 = Voltage Set 6 WS425 potentiometer output
6 = Potentiometer compatibility.
7 = Disabled
aout1_o 0 -10000 10000 Offset for AOUT1 and AOUT2.
aout2_o Set output offset to 0.

For configuration instructions, see section Configuration on page


110.

140 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Wind Speed Output


In a system configured for WS425, you can set WMT700 to
measure wind speed and send analog output as frequency or
voltage.
These sections describe WMT700 analog output:
- Settings are configured according to Table 42 on page 140.
- Wires are connected according to section ROSA Cable 10 m
(Analog Outputs) on page 100.

Frequency
When frequency is selected as the wind speed analog output,
WMT700 sends a pulsed signal of 0 to 10 V with a frequency
proportional to wind speed through AOUT1. Every mile per hour
adds 5 Hz (WS425) to the frequency. In SI units, a change of
0.894 meters per second adds 10 Hz to the frequency.
A frequency counter is required to count the output in Hz and the
calculation that scales the result to appropriate units.

Figure 48 below shows the frequency output when an adapter


cable for analog frequency output (227570SP) and a WS425 cable
are used. With WMT700, the wind speed signal appears at pin 14
(pink) of the adaptor cable.

1212-001

Figure 48 Wind Speed Frequency Analog Output with


WS425 Cable and Adapter Cable for Analog
Frequency Output

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 141


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Voltage
When voltage is selected as the wind speed analog output, the
output from WMT700 varies linearly from 0 VDC at 0 miles per
hour to 1 VDC at 125 miles per hour. In SI units, the voltage
varies linearly from 0 VDC at 0 meters per second to 1 VDC at
55.88 meters per second.

Figure 49 below shows the voltage output when an adapter cable


for voltage output (227571SP) and a WS425 cable are used. With
WMT700, the wind speed signal appears at pin 15 (violet) of the
adaptor cable. The violet wire must be connected to V read
channel, and the pink wire must be connected to the analog
ground.

1212-002

Figure 49 Wind Speed Voltage Analog Output with


WS425 Cable and Adapter Cable for Analog
Voltage Output

142 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Wind Direction Output


When wind direction is measured, WMT700 sends analog output
as simulated potentiometer output voltage referred to as external
reference voltage. The output is a proportional signal 0 ... 100 %
of the reference voltage representing the wind direction. The
reference voltage must be in the range of 1.0 to 4.0 VDC
(WMS425) or 010 VDC (WMT700). The output is 0 VDC at
zero degrees and increases to the reference voltage at 359 degrees.

Figure 50 below shows the output for wind direction. With


WMT700, the wind direction signal appears at pin 13 (gray) of
the adapter cable.

1212-003

Figure 50 Wind Direction Voltage Output with WS425


Cable and Adapter Cable

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 143


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Limitations for Output Signals


You can specify the minimum and maximum values for analog
output with the configuration parameters. The output is fixed to
the specified values, and the unit depends on the selected analog
output mode.

Example

To limit the output 1 in voltage mode to a range of 0.1 5 V, set


the analog output minimum value to 0.1 and the analog output
maximum value to 5. Enter the following commands:
S aout1minv,0.1
S aout1maxv,5

Missing Readings and Error Indication


If WMT700 is not able to measure the wind, it indicates a missing
reading in the output. The most common reasons for measurement
problems are foreign objects (such as ice, birds, or other foreign
object) on the line of measurement or sound reflections from
nearby objects (such as wind tunnel walls).

The default error indication is an out-of-range signal that is more


than 10 V or 20 mA but other error settings can also be
configured.

Example

To set analog output 1 error indication in voltage mode to 1 V, set


the analog output error value to 1. Enter the following command:
S aout1err,1

144 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

Operating WMT700 with WS425 and SDI-12


Profiles
In this section, each communication profile has its own section
listing the configurable parameters and the available commands
and data messages. For information on available commands and
data messages when using the WMT700 profile, see Chapter 5,
Operation, on page 107.

NOTE For a complete list of the serial commands available for WMT700, refer
to Appendix A, Complete Command Set for WMT700, on page 195.

Communication Profiles
In addition to the WMT700 and MES12 profiles, WMT700
supports the following communication profiles:

- WMT700
- ROSA - MES12
- WS425 - ASCII
- WS425 - NMEA Extended (version 0183)
- WS425 - SDI-12 (version 1.3)
- WS425 - ASOS

The profile has been preconfigured at the factory according to


your requirements specified when ordering WMT700. You can
change the profile through the serial interface, if necessary. For
instructions, see section Changing Communication Profile below.

Changing Communication Profile


The communication profile and other settings have been
configured at the factory according your specifications. You can
start using WMT700 directly after the installation with these
settings.

In case you want to change the communication profile, change


manually all needed parameters to match the new profile. The
needed configurable parameters are listed separately for each
profile in this manual.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 145


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Operating WMT700 with Terminal Program


To operate WMT700 through a serial connection, the following
prerequisites are needed:

- PC with a serial port.


- Required cables for serial connection. For more information,
see section Before You Start on page 94.
- Any terminal program, such as Tera Term or Windows
HyperTerminal.

To switch on WMT700 in measurement mode using Windows


HyperTerminal:

1. Connect a cable between your terminal computer, power


supply, and WMT700.
2. Open the Windows HyperTerminal program.
3. Cancel the new connection.
4. From the File menu, click Properties.
5. Select the correct COM port and click Configure.
6. Set the communication parameters according to the
configured port settings of WMT700. The default values for
WMT700 are:
- Bits per second: 9600
- Data bits: 8
- Parity: None
- Stop bits: 1
- Flow control: None

For the correct settings for SDI-12 profile, see section SDI-
12 on page 165.

7. Click Apply and OK.


8. On the Settings tab, click ASCII setup. Select ASCII
sending - Send line ends with line feed (optional). Click
OK and close the New Connection Properties window.
9. On the View menu, click Font. In the Font list, select
Terminal.
10. From the Call menu, click Call. Enter a name and select an
icon for the connection. Click OK.
11. Switch the sensor power supply on.
The following information is displayed:
WMT700 v<version number>

146 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

12. Wait for 4 seconds. WMT700 enters measurement mode


automatically.
13. To test the connection, enter configuration mode with the
following command:

$0OPEN<CR><LF>

14. Use the following command to return to measurement


mode:

CLOSE<CR><LF>

You can now start operating WMT700. Note that WMT700


does not send data messages automatically unless
configured to do so.

NOTE In configuration mode, you can use any of the following end-of-line
character combinations: <CR><LF>, <CR>, or <LF>.

Entering Configuration Mode


This command switches the serial port to configuration mode.
The command works with any communication profile supported
by WMT700.
$aOPEN<CR><LF>

where
$ = Fixed text
a = Value of the address parameter. If the value is 0, it
refers to any WMT700 address
<CR> = Carriage return
<LF> = Line feed

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 147


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

WS425 F/G ASOS Profile


Configurable Parameters
Table 43 below lists the configurable parameters and their
allowed and default values for the WS425 F/G ASOS profile.

Table 43 Configurable Parameters for WS425 F/G ASOS


Profile
Parameter Default Profile-Specific Allowed Description
Value Values
autoSend 0 0 = Automatic messages Automatic data message number.
disabled Selects the data message format for
automatic messages
com1_protocol 0* 2 = WS425 F/G ASOS Profile for serial port COM1
com2_protocol 2 2 = WS425 F/G ASOS Profile for serial port COM2
com2_interf N/A** 0 = RS-485 Interface for serial port COM2
1 = RS-422
3 = RS-232
wndAvg 5 0.25 3600 Averaging time for wind
Resolution: 0.25 measurement in seconds
wndGustTime 3 0.25 3600 Averaging time for wind minimum and
Resolution: 0.25 maximum in seconds
wndOrientation 0 0 = Array facing up Orientation of the array of WMT700
1 = Array facing down
wndUnit 0** 0 = Meters per second (m/s) Wind speed unit
1 = Miles per hour (mph)
2 = Kilometers per hour (km/h)
3 = Knots (knot)
wndVector 0 0 = Scalar averaging Wind averaging method
* The parameter has no protocol-specific default value. It is determined
separately in the configuration code.
** Wind speed unit and COM2 digital communication interface are defined in
the order form. Default setting may be any of the allowed options, and it can be
verified from the units configuration code.

To start continuous measurement, use the START command.


You can stop the measurement with the STOP command. For
instructions, refer to section Wind Measurement Control
Commands on page 115.

148 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

WS425 F/G ASOS Commands


WMT700 responds to each command with a fixed-length
message. In each of the command descriptions below, <CR> is an
ASCII carriage return control character and <LF> is an ASCII
line feed control character.

NOTE When the WS425 F/G ASOS profile is selected, WMT700 only responds
to upper case characters.

Table 44 below lists the available commands for operating


WMT700 with the WS425 F/G ASOS profile.

Table 44 WS425 F/G ASOS Commands


Command Description
WA Requests average wind speed and direction message
WS Requests the verbose Built-In Test (BIT) results

The WA command is executed by the ASOS at an interval that


ranges from 1 to 30 seconds. For the WA command, WMT700
responds to the ASOS interrogation poll within 250 milliseconds
of receiving the request.

NOTE The following WS425 F/G ASOS commands cannot be used with
WMT700: WB, WFIRMWARE, WJ, WD, WF, WR, WCAL, WH,
WT, WCDV, WSTK, WL, WM, WN, WSST, and WATE.
WMT700 can only be configured in the configuration mode. For a list of
configuration commands for WMT700, see section Configuration on
page 110.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 149


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

WA Fetch Averaged Wind Speed and


Direction
This command requests the averaged wind speed and direction
message with peak winds.
WA <CR><LF>

The response to the WA command consists of the averaged wind


speed and direction data, peak wind speed, and associated
direction. The average wind speed is a scalar running average of
the fundamental
1-second interval wind speed measurement made by WMT700.
For a description of the data message, see section WS425 F/G
ASOS Data Message on page 152.
You can set the wind averaging time and gust time with the
wndAvg and wndGustTime parameters. Set the wndVector
parameter to 0 to use scalar averaging.
The command also fetches the WMT700 status, the averaging
time for average and peak wind speed and wind direction, and
signal quality.

WS Fetch Internal Diagnostics Information


This command requests the verbose Built-In Test (BIT) results.
WS<CR><LF>

The command gives a textual run down of the results of all Built-
In Tests (BITs). In every line, except the bad reading counter, the
pass/fail indication is given with the single character P or F. This
is followed by the description of the measured parameter, which
is followed by the actual measured value.
The Bad 1 second readings counter is a running total of the
number of fundamental 1-second readings that the sensor flagged
as bad. This number rolls over to zero after reaching the count
value of 65535. It is initialized to zero on each power-up or any
other activity that performs a re-initialization of the sensor. The
time measurement quality indices are given for path numbers as
follows:
- Path 0 is from south transducer to north transducer
- Path 1 is from north transducer to south transducer
- Path 2 is from north transducer to east transducer
- Path 3 is from east transducer to north transducer
- Path 4 is from east transducer to south transducer
- Path 5 is from south transducer to east transducer

150 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

A listing for the command response is given below with


representative values.
<CR><LF>
P Heater voltage 22.3 Volts <CR><LF>
P Array heater resistance 4.9 Ohms <CR><LF>
P Heaters off voltage 0.1 Volts <CR><LF>
P Incoming supply voltage 12.2 Volts <CR><LF>
P 5.0 volt supply 5.05 Volts <CR><LF>
P 10 volt supply 10.2 Volts CR LF
- Bad 1 second reading counter 0 <CR><LF>
P Path 0 signal quality index 99 <CR><LF>
P Path 1 signal quality index 99 <CR><LF>
P Path 2 signal quality index 99 <CR><LF>
P Path 3 signal quality index 99 <CR><LF>
P Path 4 signal quality index 99 <CR><LF>
P Path 5 signal quality index 99 <CR><LF>

The test limits for the various tests are as listed below:

- Heater voltage good in range 18.0 to 26.0 V


- Array heater resistance good in range 4.0 to 6.0
- Heaters off voltage good if below 0.5 V
- Incoming supply voltage good in range 10.5 to 13.5 V
- 5.0 V supply good in range 4.5 to 5.5 V
- 10 V supply good in range 9.0 to 11.0 V
- Signal Quality Index good above 50

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 151


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

WS425 F/G ASOS Data Message


WMT700 responds to the WA command with a data message
described in Table 45 below.

Table 45 WS425 F/G ASOS Data Message


Byte Description
1 Start of text
2 Sensor ID
3 Command identifier
4 Sensor status:
P = Pass
F = Fail
H = Heater failure
For further information, refer to notes 1 and 2.
5-7 Averaged wind direction (degrees)
8-10 Wind direction (degrees) @ peak wind speed
11-12 Averaging time for wind speed and direction
13-14 Averaging time for peak wind speed and direction (seconds)
15-19 Averaged wind speed
20-24 Peak wind speed since last WA command
25 Wind speed unit:
M = Miles per hour
K = Knots
L = Kilometers per hour
T = Meters per second
26-27 Signal quality. For further information, refer to note 3.
28-29 Hex checksum. For further information, refer to note 4.
30 End of text
31 Carriage return
32 Line feed

Notes:

1. The sensor status (byte 4) indicates the following:


- P (Pass) indicates that all diagnostic tests have passed
and WMT700 is functioning normally.
- F (Fail) indicates that one or more of the diagnostic tests
have failed. You can then request diagnostics and
extended tests (WS) to further isolate the problem.
- H (Heater failure) indicates that the wind reading is valid
but one or more built-in heater diagnostic tests have
failed.
2. When the status byte is F, the wind direction fields are set to
999 and the wind speed fields are set to 999.9 in the
applicable sensor response messages.

152 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

3. The signal quality (bytes 26-27) is a numeric value from 0


to 99 representing the data quality of processed data
samples during the averaging time.
For example, a value of 99 signifies that all data samples
were determined to be valid and processed during the
averaging time. If some samples were determined to be
"missing", these samples were not processed and the
reported signal quality is a proportional value less than 99.

4. Bytes 28-29 are the modulo 256 hexadecimal checksum of


the ASCII values calculated for bytes from 2 to 27.

Example:
WAP2131870503012.6014.7K99xx

Interpretation of the example message:

- Sensor ID: W
- Command identifier: A
- Sensor status: P = pass
- Averaged wind direction (degrees): 213
- Wind direction (degrees) @ peak wind speed: 187
- Averaging time for wind speed and direction: 05
- Averaging time for peak wind speed and direction (seconds):
03
- Averaged wind speed: 012.6
- Peak wind speed since last WA command: 014.7
- Wind speed units: K = knots
- Signal quality: 99
- Hex checksum (refer to note 4): xx

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 153


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

WS425 A/B NMEA Standard Profile


When the WS425 A/B NMEA Standard profile is configured,
WMT700 sends messages based on the configured automatic
message interval. There are no operating commands available for
the user.

Configurable Parameters
Table 46 below lists the configurable parameters and their
allowed and default values for the WS425 A/B NMEA Standard
profile.

Table 46 Configurable Parameters for WS425 A/B


NMEA Standard Profile
Parameter Default Value Profile-Specific Allowed Description
Values
address 1 String with 1 character Address for WMT700
autoInt 1 0.25 ... 1000 Automatic message interval in
Resolution: 0.25 seconds. Do not select a message
interval that is shorter than the time it
takes to send a data message
autoPort 1 1 = COM1 port Serial port to which WMT700 sends
2 = COM2 port automatic data messages
autoSend 0 0 = Automatic messages Automatic data message number.
disabled Selects the data message format for
19 = NMEA automatic automatic messages
data message
com1_protocol 0* 4 = WS425 A/B NMEA Profile for serial port COM1
Standard
com2_protocol 0 4 = WS425 A/B NMEA Profile for serial port COM2
Standard
com2_interf N/A** 0 = RS-485 Interface for serial port COM2
1 = RS-422
3 = RS-232
wndAvg 1 0.25 3600 Averaging time for wind
Resolution: 0.25 measurement in seconds
wndOrientation 0 0 = Array facing up Orientation of the array of WMT700
1 = Array facing down
wndUnit 0** 0 = Meters per second Wind speed unit
1 = Miles per hour
2 = Kilometers per hour
3 = Knots
wndVector 1 0 = Scalar averaging Wind averaging method
* The parameter has no protocol-specific default value. It is determined
separately in the configuration code.
** Wind speed unit and COM2 digital communication interface are defined in
the order form. Default setting may be any of the allowed options, and it can be
verified from the units configuration code.

154 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

To start continuous measurement, use the START command.


You can stop the measurement with the STOP command. For
instructions, refer to sections START Start Continuous
Measurement and STOP Stop Wind Measurement on page
115.

WS425 A/B NMEA Standard Data


Message
The standard variable length, comma-separated, MWV wind
message is defined by NMEA 0183 V2.20 as follows:
$WIMWV,<dir>,<ref>,<spd>,<uni>,<sta>*<chk><CR><LF>

where
$WIMWV = Fixed text
<dir> = Wind angle: 0 to 359 degrees
<ref> = Reference:
R = Relative
<spd> = Wind speed
<uni> = Wind speed unit:
K = Kilometers per hour
M = Meters per second
N = Knots
<sta> = Status:
A = Data valid
V = Invalid data
* = Fixed text
<chk> = Checksum (8-bit XOR, excluding $ and *)
<CR> = Carriage return code, ASCII 0DH
<LF> = Line feed code, ASCII 0AH

NOTE When the NMEA Standard profile is selected, the autoInt parameter
must have a non-zero value since no polling command is defined for this
profile.

Missing Readings
If data is missing due to a measurement problem, the NMEA
messages show "V" in the status field. Wind speed and wind
direction fields are left empty.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 155


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

WS425 NMEA Extended Profile (v. 0183)


When the WS425 A/B NMEA Extended profile is selected, you
can set WMT700 to send messages based on the configured
automatic message interval or poll data using the $WIP
command.

Configurable Parameters
Table 47 below lists the configurable parameters and their
allowed and default values for the WS425 A/B NMEA Extended
profile.

Table 47 Configurable Parameters for WS425 A/B


NMEA Extended Profile
Parameter Default Profile-Specific Description
Value Allowed Values
address A String with 1 character Address for WMT700
autoInt 1 0.25 ... 1000 Automatic message interval in seconds. Do
Resolution: 0.25 not select a message interval that is shorter
than the time it takes to send a data message
autoPort 2 1 = COM1 port Serial port to which WMT700 sends automatic
2 = COM2 port data messages
autoSend 15 0 = Automatic Automatic data message number. Selects the
messages disabled data message format for automatic messages
15 = NMEA automatic
data message
com1_protocol 0* 5 = WS425 A/B NMEA Profile for serial port COM1
Extended
com2_protocol 5 5 = WS425 A/B NMEA Profile for serial port COM2
Extended
com2_interf N/A** 0 = RS-485 Interface for serial port COM2
1 = RS-422
3 = RS-232
wndAvg 3 0.25 3600 Averaging time for wind measurement in
Resolution: 0.25 seconds
wndOrientation 0 0 = Array facing up Orientation of the array of WMT700
1 = Array facing down
wndUnit 0** 0 = Meters per second Wind speed unit
1 = Miles per hour
2 = Kilometers per hour
3 = Knots
wndVector 0 0 = Scalar averaging Wind averaging method
* COM1 service port is always by default 0 - WMT700 protocol. This can be
changed using serial commands if COM1 is needed for protocol-specific
communication.
** Wind speed unit and COM2 digital communication interface are defined in
the order form. Default setting may be any of the allowed options, and it can be
verified from the units configuration code.

156 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

To start continuous measurement, use the START command.


You can stop the measurement with the STOP command. For
instructions, refer to START Start Continuous Measurement
and STOP Stop Wind Measurement on page 115.

WS425 A/B NMEA Extended


Commands
This command polls data from WMT700.
$WIP<id>Q,*<chk><CR><LF>

where
$WIP = Fixed text
<id> = Data ID; A Z
Q = Fixed text
* = Fixed text
<chk> = Checksum (8-bit XOR, excluding $ and *)
<CR> = Carriage return code, ASCII 0DH
<LF> = Line feed code, ASCII 0AH

Table 48 Checksum Table


ID Character <id> Checksum <chk> Polling String
A 72 $WIPAQ,*72<CR><LF>
B 71 $WIPBQ,*71<CR><LF>
C 70 $WIPCQ,*70<CR><LF>
D 77 $WIPDQ,*77<CR><LF>
E 76 $WIPEQ,*76<CR><LF>
F 75 $WIPFQ,*75<CR><LF>
G 74 $WIPGQ,*74<CR><LF>
H 7B $WIPHQ,*7B<CR><LF>
I 7A $WIPIQ,*7A<CR><LF>
J 79 $WIPJQ,*79<CR><LF>
K 78 $WIPKQ,*78<CR><LF>
L 7F $WIPLQ,*7F<CR><LF>
M 7E $WIPMQ,*7E<CR><LF>
N 7D $WIPNQ,*7D<CR><LF>
O 7C $WIPOQ,*7C<CR><LF>

NOTE To use WMT700 with the NMEA Extended profile, either set the
autoSend parameter to 0 to enable polling or define a fixed output
interval with the autoInt parameter. If you are using automatic messages,
the value for the autoSend parameter must be set to 15.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 157


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

WS425 A/B NMEA Extended Data


Message
WS425 A/B NMEA Extended data message is as follows:
$P<id>MWV,<dir>,<ref>,<spd>,<uni>,<sta>*<chk><CR><LF>

where
$P = Fixed text
<id> = Data ID; A Z
MWV = Fixed text
<dir> = Wind angle: 0 to 359 degrees
<ref> = Reference:
R = relative
<spd> = Wind speed
<uni> = Wind speed unit:
K = Kilometers per hour
M = Meters per second
N = Knots
<sta> = Status:
A = Valid data
V = Invalid data
* = Fixed text
<chk> = Checksum (8-bit XOR, excluding $ and *)
<CR> = Carriage return code, ASCII 0DH
<LF> = Line feed code, ASCII 0AH

Missing Readings
If data is missing due to a measurement problem, the NMEA
messages show "V" in the status field. Wind speed and wind
direction fields are left empty.

158 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

WS425 A/B ASCII Profile


NOTE In Vaisala WINDCAP Ultrasonic Wind Sensor WS425 User's Guide,
this profile was called the Handar mode.

Configurable Parameters
Table 49 below lists the configurable parameters and their
allowed and default values for the WS425 A/B ASCII Profile.

Table 49 Configurable Parameters for WS425 A/B ASCII


Profile
Parameter Default Profile-Specific Description
Value Allowed Values
autoInt 1 0.25 ... 1000 Automatic message interval in seconds.
Resolution: 0.25 Do not select a message interval that is shorter
than the time it takes to send a data message
autoPort 1 1= COM1 port Serial port to which WMT700 sends automatic
2= COM2 port data messages
autoSend 0 0 = Automatic Automatic data message number. Selects the
messages disabled data message format for automatic messages
com1_protocol 0* 3 = WS425 A/B ASCII Profile for serial port COM1
com2_protocol 3 3 = WS425 A/B ASCII Profile for serial port COM2
com2_interf N/A** 0 = RS-485 Interface for serial port COM2
1 = RS-422
3 = RS-232
wndOrientation 0 0 = Array facing up Orientation of the array of WMT700
1 = Array facing down
wndUnit 0** 0 = Meters per second Wind speed unit
1 = Miles per hour
2 = Kilometers per hour
3 = Knots
wndVector 0 0 = Scalar averaging Wind averaging method
* The parameter has no protocol-specific default value. It is determined
separately in the configuration code.
** Wind speed unit and COM2 digital communication interface are defined in
the order form. Default setting may be any of the allowed options, and it can be
verified from the units configuration code.

To start continuous measurement, use the START command.


You can stop the measurement with the STOP command. For
instructions, refer to sections START Start Continuous
Measurement on page 115 and STOP Stop Wind Measurement
on page 115.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 159


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

WS425 A/B ASCII Commands


Table 50 below lists the available commands for operating
WMT700 with the WS425 A/B ASCII profile.

Table 50 WS425 A/B ASCII Commands


Command Description
I Requests identification information for WMT700.
Wx Starts measurement based on averaging time and fetches the data.

NOTE The following WS425 A/B ASCII command cannot be used with
WMT700: Measurement Unit Change Ux
For a list of configuration commands for WMT700, see Table 63 on page
195.

I Identify Sensor
This command shows the vendor, model number, and version
information of WMT700.
I

Example of the command and response:


I

VAISALA WMT700 200

Wx Start Measurement
This command starts wind measurement based on averaging time
and fetches the data automatically when the measurement has
finished. You must specify the averaging time in the command.

Averaging time supplied in the command (x) sets the averaging


time for WMT700, as if it was set with the S command. When
you change the averaging time, it applies to the next new wind
value.

Wx

where
x = Time for averaging wind speed and wind direction. The range
is from 1 to 9

160 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

WMT700 responds to the Wx command with a 19-character


fixed-length data message. For more information, see Table 51
below.

Table 51 WS425 A/B ASCII Data Message


Character Description
1 02H (<STX>, start of transmission)
2 W
3 Averaging in seconds
4 Status:
P = Pass
F = Fail
5 Wind direction (most significant digit)
6 Wind direction (middle digit)
7 Wind direction (least significant digit)
8 Wind speed (most significant digit)
9 Wind speed (next digit)
10 Wind speed (next digit)
11 Wind speed (least significant digit)
12 . (dot character)
13 Wind speed (tenth digit)
14 Wind speed unit:
M = Miles per hour
K = Knots
L = Kilometers per hour
T = Meters per second
15 Checksum (most significant digit). For more information, see the
note below
16 Checksum (least significant digit)
17 03H (<ETX>, end of transmission)
18 CR (carriage return)
19 LF (line feed)

NOTE The checksum is calculated from the characters from position 2 to 14.
The accumulator initializes at 0 with the addition of the byte value. The
checksum has a range of 0H FFH.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 161


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Example of the command and response:

W5

W5P1200013.2TDE

Interpretation of the example message:

- 02H (<STX>, start of transmission)


- Sensor ID: W
- Averaging in seconds: 5
- Sensor status: P = pass
- Wind direction: 120
- Wind speed: 0013
- . (dot character)
- Wind speed unit: T = meters per second
- Checksum (most significant digit): D
- Checksum (least significant digit): E

- 03H (<ETX>, end of transmission)

Missing Readings
If data is missing due to a measurement problem, the WS425 A/B
ASCII message reports 999.9 for wind speed.

162 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

WS425 A/B WAT11 Profile


Configurable Parameters
Table 52 below lists the configurable parameters and their
allowed and default values for the WS425 A/B WAT11 profile.

Table 52 Configurable Parameters for WS425 A/B


WAT11 Profile
Parameter Default Value Profile-Specific Allowed Description
Values
com1_protocol 0* 6 = WS425 A/B WAT11 Profile for serial port COM1
com2_protocol 0 6 = WS425 A/B WAT11 Profile for serial port COM2
* The parameter has no protocol-specific default value. It is determined
separately in the configuration code.

To start continuous measurement, use the START command.


You can stop the measurement with the STOP command. For
instructions, refer to sections START Start Continuous
Measurement and STOP Stop Wind Measurement on page
115.

WS425 A/B WAT11 Commands


When the WS425 A/B WAT11 profile is selected, you can poll
data using the following command:
<esc><id>

where
<esc> = Escape character ASCII 27H
<id> = WMT700 ID, for example, A

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 163


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

The response is as follows:


<stx><id><spd><dir>

where
<stx> = Start of text character (1 digit)
<id> = WMT700 identification character, for example, A (one digit)
<spd> = Wind speed (in meters per second) multiplied by 10. For
example, 045 is 4.5 meters per second (three digits)
<dir> = Wind direction with two octal numbers for 6-bit binary data,
for example, 73 corresponds to (7*8+3)/64*360 = 332
degrees

Missing Readings
The WS425 A/B WAT11 message reports missing

164 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

SDI-12 Profile (v 1.3)


SDI-12 is a standard for interfacing data recorders with
microprocessor-based sensors. The name stands for serial/digital
interface at 1200 baud.

The SDI-12 Support Group is an association of companies that


produce and use SDI-12 products with the purpose of reviewing
requests to enhance, clarify, or modify the SDI-12 architecture
and that votes on proposed changes to SDI-12.

For the complete SDI-12 standard text and information on the


SDI-12 Support Group, refer to the SDI-12 web-site at the
following address: http://www.sdi-12.org.

NOTE SDI-12 sub modes A and B are not supported by WMT700.

NOTE When establishing the terminal connection to WMT700, set the


following communication settings for the SDI-12 profile:
Bits per second: 1200
Data bits: 7
Parity: 1
Stop bits: 1
Flow Control: None

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 165


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Configurable Parameters
Table 53 below lists the configurable parameters and their
allowed and default values for the SDI-12 profile.

Table 53 Configurable Parameters for SDI-12 Profile


Parameter Default Profile-Specific Description
Value Allowed Values
address 1 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 Address for WMT700
autoPort 1 1 = COM1 port Serial port to which WMT700 sends automatic
2 = COM2 port data messages
autoSend 0 0 = Automatic messages Automatic data message number. Selects the
disabled data message format for automatic messages
com1_protocol 0* 1 = SDI-12 Profile for serial port COM1
com2_baud 1 1 = 1200 Baud rate for serial port COM2.
Changes take effect only after reset or the
RESET command.
Note that low bit rate can affect measurement
timing, if WMT700 cannot send the data message
before new measurement starts
com2_data 7 7 = 7 data bits Data bits for serial port COM2.
Changes take effect only after reset or the
RESET command
com2_interf 0** 2 = SDI-12 Interface for serial port COM2
com2_parity 1 1 = Even Parity for serial port COM2.
Changes take effect only after reset or the
RESET command
com2_protocol 1 1 = SDI-12 Profile for serial port COM2
com2_stop 1 1 = 1 bit Stop bits for serial port COM2.
Changes take effect only after reset or the
RESET command
wndAvg 1 0.25 3600 Averaging time for wind measurement in seconds
Resolution: 0.25
wndOrientation 0 0 = Array facing up Orientation of the array of WMT700
1 = Array facing down
wndUnit 0** 0 = Meters per second Wind speed unit
1 = Miles per hour
2 = Kilometers per hour
3 = Knots
wndVector 0 0 = Scalar averaging Wind averaging method
* The parameter has no protocol-specific default value. It is determined
separately in the configuration code.
** Wind speed unit and COM2 digital communication interface are defined in
the order form. Default setting may be any of the allowed options, and it can be
verified from the units configuration code.

To start continuous measurement, use the START command.


You can stop the measurement with the STOP command. For
instructions, refer to sections START Start Continuous
Measurement and STOP Stop Wind Measurement on page
115.

166 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

SDI-12 Commands
Table 54 below lists the available commands for operating
WMT700 with SDI-12 profile.

NOTE You can only use COM2 serial port for sending commands and receiving
data messages with the SDI-12 profile.

Table 54 SDI-12 Commands


Command Description
?! Queries WMT700 for its address
a! Ensures that WMT700 is responding
aI! Queries WMT700 for its SDI-12 compatibility level, model number, and
firmware version number
aAb! Changes WMT700 address
aC! Starts concurrent measurement
aCC! Starts concurrent measurement with CRC calculation
aD0! Fetches instant data from WMT700
aM! Starts measurement
aMC! Starts measurement with CRC calculation
aV! Starts verification

where
a = Single-digit WMT700 address that corresponds to the first
character of the address value
! = Terminates the command

NOTE The following SDI-12 commands cannot be used with WMT700:


Measurement Unit Change Command aXUx!, Heater Control Command
aXHx!, Check Current Sub mode aX?!, Place Sensor in Sub mode B
Command aXQx;c.c;n;yyyy!, Reset the Sensor to Sub mode A
Command aXS!, Check Current Measurement Unit Command aX*!,
aR0! Continuous Measurement.
For a list of configuration commands for WMT700, see Appendix A,
Complete Command Set for WMT700, on page 195.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 167


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

?! Address Query
This command queries for the WMT700 address.

When you use a question mark (?) as the address character with
the a! command, WMT700 responds as if it was being addressed
on the SDI-12 bus. Regardless of its address, WMT700 responds
to the command, which allows you to determine the address for
the wind sensor.

NOTE If more than one WMT700 is connected to the bus, they all respond,
causing a bus contention.

?!

where
? = Wildcard
! = Terminates the command

The response is the following:


a<CR><LF>

where
a = Single-digit WMT700 address that corresponds to the
first character of the address value
<CR><LF> = Terminates the response.

168 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

a! Acknowledge Active
This command ensures that WMT700 is responding to a data
recorder or another SDI-12 device. It asks the WMT700 to
acknowledge its presence on the SDI-12 bus.
a!

where
a = Single-digit WMT700 address that corresponds to the
first character of the address value
! = Terminates the command

The response is the following:


a<CR><LF>

where
a = Single-digit WMT700 address that corresponds to the
first character of the address value
<CR><LF> = Terminates the response

Example of the command and response:


1!

1<CR><LF>

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 169


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

aAb! Change Address


This command changes the WMT700 address. After WMT700
has received this command and sent a response, the sensor does
not respond to any other command for one second. This gives
WMT700 time to write the new address to the non-volatile
memory.

NOTE You can also change the WMT700 address by entering configuration
mode and changing the address parameter.

aAb!

where
a = Current single-digit WMT700 address that corresponds
to the first character of the address value
A = Change address command
b = New address
! = Terminates the command

The response is the following:


b<CR><LF>

where
b = New single-digit WMT700 address (or the original
address if WMT700 is unable to change the address)
<CR><LF> = Terminates the response

170 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

aC! Start Concurrent Measurement


This command starts concurrent measurement. WMT700 does not
return measurement data after this command. It sends a response
that indicates when the measurement result can be retrieved using
the aD0! command and the number of parameters.
aC!

where
a = Single-digit WMT700 address that corresponds to the
first character of the address value
C = Start concurrent measurement command
! = Terminates the command

The response is the following:


atttnn<CR><LF>

where
a = Single-digit WMT700 address that corresponds to the
first character of the address value
ttt = Period of time, in seconds, after which WMT700 has
the measurement ready
nn = Number of measurement values WMT700 calculates
and returns as a response to one or more subsequent
aD0! commands
<CR><LF> = Terminates the response

Example of the command and response:


1C!

100205<CR><LF>

Interpretation of the example message:

- Time after which the measurement is ready: 2 seconds


- Number of returned measurement values: 5

To fetch the measurement results, use the aD0! command.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 171


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

aD0! Send Data


This command fetches instant data from WMT700. aD0! must be
preceded by a C!, M!, or V! command. WMT700 responds by
sending measurement data (after C! or M!) or verification data
(after V!).

In a SDI-12 system compliant with the standard, if the expected


number of measurements is not returned in response to an aD0!
command, a data recorder issues D1!, D2!, and so on, until all
measurement values are received. The expected number of
measurements is included in the message that WMT700 sends in
response to an aC!, aM! or aV! command. Multiple data requests
are not needed with WMT700, since all return values fit easily
into one response string.
aD0!

where

a = Single-digit WMT700 address that corresponds to the


first character of the address value
D0 = Send data command
! = Terminates the command

For a description of the data messages, see section SDI-12 Data


Messages on page 176.

aI! Send Identification


This command queries WMT700 for its SDI-12 compatibility
level, model number, and firmware version number.
aI!

where
a = Single-digit WMT700 address that corresponds to the
first character of the address value
I = Send identification command
! = Terminates the command

172 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

The response is the following:


allccccccccmmmmmmvvvxxx . . . xxx<CR><LF>

where
a = Single-digit WMT700 address that corresponds to the
first character of the address value
11 = SDI-12 version number, indicating SDI-12 version
compatibility; for example, version 1.1 is encoded as 11
cccccccc = 8-character vendor identification Vaisala_
mmmmmm = 6 characters specifying the model number of WMT700
vvv = 3 characters specifying the firmware version 604
xxx ... xxx = Optional field, up to 13 characters, used for a serial
number or other specific WMT700 information that is
not relevant for operation of the data recorder (not used)
<CR><LF> = Terminates the response

aM! Start Measurement


This command starts measurement. WMT700 does not return
measurement data after this command. It sends a response that
indicates when the measurement result can be retrieved using the
aD0! command and the number of parameters.
aM!

where
a = Single-digit WMT700 address that corresponds to the
first character of the address value
M = Start measurement command
! = Terminates the command

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 173


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

The response is the following:


atttn<CR><LF>

where
a = Single-digit WMT700 address that corresponds to the
first character of the address value
ttt = Period of time, in seconds, after which WMT700 has
the measurement ready
n = Number of measurement values WMT700 calculates
and returns as a response to one or more subsequent
aD0! commands
<CR><LF> = Terminates the response

Example of the command and response:


1M!

10025<CR><LF>

Interpretation of the example message:

- Time after which the measurement is ready: 2 second


- Number of returned measurement values: 5

To fetch the measurement results, use the aD0! command.

174 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

aV! Start Verification


This command starts verification. However, WMT700 does not
return verification data directly after this command. It sends a
response that specifies when the verification results can be
retrieved using the aD0! command and the number of parameters.
The WMT700 verification data includes a watchdog count, sensor
measurement unit settings, and the current SDI mode setting.

The command is the following:


aV!

where
a = Single-digit WMT700 address that corresponds to the
first character of the address value
V = Starts verification command
! = Terminates the command

The response is the following:


atttn<CR><LF>

where
a = Single-digit WMT700 address that corresponds to the
first character of the address value
ttt = Period of time, in seconds, after which WMT700 has
the verification data ready
n = Number of verification data fields that will be returned
<CR><LF> = Terminates the response

Example of the command and response:


1V!

10014<CR><LF>

Interpretation of the example message:

- Time when the measurement is ready: 1 second


- Number of returned measurement values: 4

To fetch the measurement results, use the aD0! command.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 175


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

SDI-12 Data Messages


When the SDI-12 profile is selected, the data message sent by
WMT700 depends on the command that you use before fetching
the data with the aD0! command.

WS425 A/B SDI-12 Message for C and M


Command
When you have given the commands aC! or aM! followed by
aD0!, the response is the following:
a<WS><WD><x><y><s><CR><LF>

where
a = Single-digit WMT700 address that corresponds to
the first character of the address value
<WS> = Polar wind speed in selected units
Format: +(ss)s.s
<WD> = Polar wind direction in degrees
Format: +(dd)d.d
<x> = x component of wind speed in selected units
Format: (ss)s.s
<y> = y component of wind speed in selected units
Format: (ss)s.s
<s> = Static speed of sound in miles per hour
Format: (ss)s.s
<CR><LF> = Terminates the response

The above are measurement data fields.

Missing Readings
If data is missing due to a measurement problem (for example,
blocked paths between transducers), the measurement data is
replaced with 999.9.

Example of the command and response when data is missing:

7D0!

7+999.9+999.9+999.9+999.9+999.9 <CR><LF>

176 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 5 _________________________________________________________________ Operation

WS425 A/B SDI-12 Message for V Command


When you have given the commands aV! and aD0!, the response
is the following:
a<watchdog><WS_unit><SDI-mode><spare><CR><LF>

where
a = Single-digit WMT700 address that corresponds to the
first character of the address value
<watchdog> = Number of times the watchdog has triggered. Ideally
should be zero. Format: +(c)c
<WS_unit> = Wind speed unit. The options are:
+0 = mph
+1 = kt
+2 = km/h
+3 = m/s
<SDI-mode> = Current sub mode setting. The options are:
+0 = SDI-12 sub mode A
+1 = SDI-12 sub mode B
<spare> = 1 digit for factory use, format: +c
<CR><LF> = Terminates the response

The above are verification data fields.

Requesting Cyclic Redundancy Check


Error detection capability can be enhanced by using the aCC! or
aMC! command to start the measurement. These commands have
the same function and send the same response as commands aC!
and aM! respectively. The difference is that Cyclic Redundancy
Check will be appended to the data returned by aD0! command.

The 16-bit Cyclic Redundancy Check value is appended to the


response of aD0! command before the <CR><LF>. It is encoded
as three ASCII characters using the following algorithm:
1st character=0x40 OR (CRC shifted right 12 bits)
2nd character=0x40 OR ((CRC shifted right 6 bits) AND
0x3F)
3rd character=0x40 OR (CRC AND 0x3F)

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 177


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Example of the command and response:


1MC!

10025<CR><LF>

1D0!

1+2.7+85.2-0.2-2.7+770.5CAH<CR><LF>

178 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 6 _______________________________________________________________ Maintenance

CHAPTER 6
MAINTENANCE

This chapter contains information on performing visual


inspection, cleaning, and verifying the operation of WMT700.

WARNING Some WMT700 product versions provide heating for transducers, array
arms, and/or sensor body. To avoid injury, do not touch the heated parts
of the wind sensor when heating is enabled.

CAUTION When handling WMT700, do not rotate, pull, strike, bend, scrape or
touch the transducers with sharp objects. Any impact on the wind sensor
array damages the device.

NOTE In maritime environments, it is not possible to perform WMT700


software updates.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 179


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Periodic Maintenance
WMT700 is a very reliable and rugged sensor. Since no moving
or consumable parts are used, no periodic maintenance is
required. WMT700 has been calibrated at the factory, and you are
not required to perform recalibration.

NOTE Periodic calibration of WMT700 is not required for technical reasons.


You can use the WM Verifier to test the mechanical integrity of the
device and perform one-point calibration.
However, some quality management systems may require regular
calibration of the measuring instruments.
To fulfill these requirements, Vaisala recommends that you recalibrate
the wind sensor every 24 months. Contact Vaisala Service Center for
more information.

Visual Inspection
Vaisala recommends that you carry out a periodic visual
inspection of the wind sensor to ensure correct operation and
clean the wind sensor if it becomes contaminated. If necessary,
you can also test the operation of WMT700 with an optional
verifier, which is a small echo-free chamber.

If any of the transducers have been bent, twisted or rotated, the


measurement results might not be accurate.

To avoid errors caused by a damaged array, check the following:

- Array has not been hit or bent. All transducers must be parallel
to each other.
- Transducers have not been scraped or touched with sharp
objects. The silicon rubber transducer sleeve must be
undamaged.

Cleaning
Regular cleaning of WMT700 is not required. If the wind sensor
becomes contaminated, you can clean it with a soft cloth
moistened with a mild detergent. Do not use solvents or a
pressure washer to clean WMT700, since they may damage the
silicon rubber transducer sleeve.

180 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 6 _______________________________________________________________ Maintenance

Testing Proper Operation


WMT700 measures the time it takes for an ultrasonic signal to
travel from one transducer to another. Therefore, the accuracy of
the sensor depends on the distance between the transducers and
the time-of-flight measurement circuit, which uses a crystal
oscillator for its time reference.

If necessary, you can verify the distance between the transducer


arms with an optional verifier. You can order WM Verifier from
Vaisala as an accessory; see Table 62 on page 192.

Vaisala recommends that you perform the test every 12 months or


if you suspect that the transducers may have been damaged. The
test can be performed either in the field or in a laboratory. Do not
perform the test when the wind speed is more than 10 m/s, or
when there is a risk of thunderstorm in the area.

NOTE Disable heating before performing the verifier test. You can do this either
by disconnecting the heater supply voltage or by setting the heaterOn
parameter to 0.

To perform the test:

1. Slip the verifier over the three transducers. To see how the
verifier fits over the transducers, see Figure 51 on page 182.
2. Start wind measurement. The command depends on the
selected communication profile.
3. Make sure that WMT700 reads less than 0.5 miles per hour
(0.22 m/s) with the verifier in place.
4. Remove the verifier.

NOTE Some random data samples may be lost during the verifier test. This,
however, does not indicate that WMT700 is faulty.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 181


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

1005-003

Figure 51 Testing WMT700 with WM Verifier

182 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 7 ____________________________________________________________ Troubleshooting

CHAPTER 7
TROUBLESHOOTING

This chapter describes common problems, their probable causes


and remedies, and provides contact information for technical
support.

Problem Situations
Table 55 Some Problem Situations and Their Remedies
Problem Probable Cause Remedy
Connection to WMT700 is Power supply is not sufficient. Check that the power supply
lost. matches the requirements listed
in section Powering on page 84.
Wind measurement failure. The installation site is causing Check that the installation site
WMT700 is sending irregular measurement problems. matches the requirements listed
data values. in section Selecting Installation
Location on page 58.

Snow, ice, a bird, or some other object Remove the blockage and check
is blocking the measurement path that the wind transducers are not
between the ultrasonic transducers. damaged.
If the blockage is ice or snow, it
melts after some time if you are
using a heated version of
WMT700. Duration of the
blockage depends on the severity
of the weather event.
If birds are causing the blockage,
consider installing a bird cage.
Reported wind direction is WMT700 is misaligned, which causes Realign WMT700 according to
not correct. an offset error. section Alignment on page 74.
Wind direction indication Orientation of the sensor does not Set the wndOrientation
acts erratically. match the wndOrientation parameter parameter value according to the
value. actual orientation of the sensor.
See section Configuration
Parameters on page 118.

There is no response when The WMT700 settings are unknown or Reset the serial communication
you try to switch to they have been accidentally changed. settings to default values. See
configuration mode with the section Restoring Serial Port
OPEN command. Settings on page 186.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 183


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Problem Probable Cause Remedy


WMT700 does not respond The communication profile is not Configure the communication
to any commands. correct. profile to match the host
communication profile.

The wiring might be incorrect. Check the wiring, see section


Wiring on page 77

Connection works but data The command has been mistyped. Use the ERRORS command to
messages are not available. fetch the error messages from
WMT700.
See section ERRORS Get
Error Codes and Counts on page
116.
Data messages are not in The selected data message is not If you are using automatic
the expected format. correct. messages:
Check the selected data
message with the G command. If
necessary, set a new value for
the autoSend parameter.
If you are using polling:
Check that you are using the
correct data message number in
the polling command, see Table
40 on page 128.
Some items are missing The configured data message does Define the data message again
from the data messages. not contain all the required items. with the required items. See
section Parameter Handling
Commands on page 111.
Configuration commands do WMT700 is in measurement mode. Switch from measurement mode
not work. to configuration mode. See
section Communicating with
Terminal Software on page 107.
WMT700 sends an error For probable causes, see section For remedies, see section Error
message as a response to a Error and Event Messages on page and Event Messages on page
command. 185. 185.
No signal is present on Analog output has been disabled. Enable analog output with the
analog outputs. aout1_mode and aout2_mode
parameters. See Configuration
Parameters on page 118
Automatic data messages WMT700 is not in continuous Initiate continuous measurement
are not received although measurement mode. with START command. See
parameters have been set START Start Continuous
correctly. Measurement on page 115.
Data from WMT700 is The data logger and wind sensor are Make sure that the data logger
temporarily lost. not in the same operating mode and wind sensor are both in
(polling or automatic transmission either polling or automatic
mode). transmission mode.
Data messages are not Baud rates of the data logger and Change the baud rate so that it is
received. wind sensor do not match. the same in the data logger and
wind sensor.
Parameter does not change The parameter requires reset before it Check Appendix D Configuration
after S command has been becomes valid. Parameters on page 205 if reset
given. is required before the parameter
is changed.

184 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 7 ____________________________________________________________ Troubleshooting

Problem Probable Cause Remedy


Inconsistent serial Pin contacts of the connector have Change the WMT700 cable.
communication or missing become oxidized or the connector is
data. not firmly attached.
Retrofit installation of You do not have the correct mounting Check that you are using the
WMT700 is not possible. kit for the retrofit installation. correct mounting adapter with
your mounting kit. Refer to
Appendix F, Accessories, on
page 213.
WMT700 does not work Incorrect cables were used in the Check that you have used cables
properly after retrofit retrofit installation. listed in Checklist for Connection
installation. Cables on page 73.
If you do not have the correct
cables, contact Vaisala technical
support.
Connection to WMT700 is The power supply is not sufficient, Check that the power supply
lost. especially if you are using a heated matches the requirements in
version of WMT700. section Powering on page 105.

Error and Event Messages


If messages parameter is set to 1, WMT700 sends error and event
messages. Table 56 below lists the available messages.

Table 56 Error and Event Messages


Error/Event Code Probable Cause Remedy
2 Event. You can change the default
Parameters have been set to factory settings in configuration mode;
defaults. see Communicating with
Terminal Software on page 107.
3 Event. Contact Vaisala technical
Wind calibration data has been lost. support.
WMT700 needs to be calibrated.
10 Error. Check the allowed parameter
You have given an invalid value when values; see Appendix D
using the S command. Configuration Parameters on
page 205.
11 Error. Check that you are using the
Parameter used with the S command correct parameter names, see
is unknown. Appendix D Configuration
Parameters on page 205.
12 Error. Check the allowed commands in
Unknown command. Appendix A, Complete Command
Set for WMT700, on page 195.
13 Error. Check the command and
String before the end of command parameter names that you are
character is too long. using.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 185


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

You can also troubleshoot WMT700 as follows:

- Fetch the error and event messages with the ERRORS


command. For more information, see section ERRORS Get
Error Codes and Counts on page 116.
- Include diagnostics-related items in the data message. For
more information, see section Parameter Handling Commands
on page 111.

Restoring Serial Port Settings


If you are not familiar with the configured settings of the
WMT700 wind sensor, or if the settings have been accidentally
changed, you may not get any response when you send the OPEN
command to WMT700. In that case, restore the serial port settings
to known values.

To restore the default serial port settings using Windows


HyperTerminal:

1. Connect a cable between your terminal computer, power


supply, and WMT700.
2. Open the Windows HyperTerminal program.
3. Cancel the new connection.
4. On the File menu, click Properties.
5. Select the correct COM port and click Configure.
6. Regardless of the configured port settings of WMT700,
select the following communication settings:
- Bits per second: 19200
- Data bits: 8
- Parity: None
- Stop bits: 1
- Flow Control: None

7. Close the New Connection Properties window.


8. Connect to WMT700 using the RS-485 interface.
9. Switch the sensor power supply off and back on.

186 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 7 ____________________________________________________________ Troubleshooting

10. Press # on your keyboard and hold down the key for at least
five seconds. WMT700 responds by sending the following
string:

Ok
Restoring COM1 and COM2 settings

Updating the settings will be completed in a few seconds.


When the operation is done, WMT700 sends the following
response:
Done. Rebooting

WMT700 has now applied the settings and will reboot using
the new settings. The restored settings are shown in Table
57 below.
11. Before you start configuring new values to WMT700, you
need to apply the new settings to HyperTerminal. In the
Call menu, click Disconnect to close the connection.
12. On the File menu, click Properties.
13. In the Properties dialog, click Configure.
14. Select 9600 in the Bits per second combo box.
15. Close the Properties window.
16. On the Call menu, click Call.

Table 57 Restored Serial Port Settings


Parameter Name Default Value Description
com1_baud 4 4 = 9600 bauds per second
com2_baud
com1_data 8 Number of data bits
com2_data
com1_delay 20 Response delay in milliseconds
com2_delay
com2_interf 0 0 = RS-485
com1_parity 0 0 = None
com2_parity
com1_protocol 0 WMT700 protocol
com2_protocol
com1_stop 1 Number of stop bits
com2_stop

The serial port settings have now been restored to known values.
You can send the OPEN command and start configuring
WMT700. For information on the configuration commands, see
section Configuration on page 110.

NOTE You can also use other terminal programs, such as Tera Term.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 187


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Technical Support
For technical questions, contact the Vaisala technical support by
e-mail at helpdesk@vaisala.com. Provide at least the following
supporting information:

- Name and model of the product in question


- Serial number of the product
- Name and location of the installation site
- Name and contact information of a technically competent
person who can provide further information on the problem

Product Returns
If the product must be returned for service, see
www.vaisala.com/services/return.html.

For contact information of Vaisala Service Centers, see


www.vaisala.com/services/servicecenters.html.

188 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 8 _____________________________________________________________ Technical Data

CHAPTER 8
TECHNICAL DATA

This chapter provides the technical data of WMT700.

Table 58 Wind Speed


Property Description/Value
Measurement range:
WMT701 0 ... 40 m/s
WMT702 0 ... 65 m/s
WMT703 0 ... 75 m/s
Starting threshold 0.01 m/s
Resolution 0.01 m/s
Response time 250 ms
Available variables instant, peak, average, maximum, minimum,
gust, lull
Accuracy 0.1 m/s or 2% of reading, whichever is
greater

Table 59 Wind Direction


Property Description/Value
Measurement range 0 360
Starting threshold 0.1 m/s
Resolution 0.01
Accuracy 2
Response time 250 ms
Available variables instant, average, maximum, minimum

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 189


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Table 60 Outputs
Property Description/Value
Digital outputs:
Communication interfaces COM1: RS-485
COM2: RS-485, RS-422, RS-232, SDI-12
Communication protocols WMT700, WS425 ASCII, NMEA Standard
and Extended (version 0183), SDI-12 (version
1.3), WS425 ASOS, ROSA - MES12,
Customized
Bit rate 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400,
57600, or 115200
Available averages Max. 3600 s
Analog outputs:

Wind speed:
Frequency push-pull Pulse 0 V/10 V: 0 ... 2 kHz (f = 10 Hz/m/s)
(Load > 10 kohm)
Frequency pull-down Pulse 0.5 V/Vin-2 V (11 V min.): 0 ... 750 Hz
(Load 50 kohm 20%)
Frequency pull-up Pulse 1.5 V/Vin-4 V (8 V min.): 0 ... 750 Hz
(Load 50 kohm 20%)
Voltage 0 ... 10 V (U = 100 mV /m/s)
Current 0 ... 20 mA (I = 0.2 mA/m/s)
Wind direction: 0 ... 10 V (U = 20 mV/)
Voltage 0 ... 20 mA (I = 50 uA//)
Current Reference voltage 1 ... 10 VDC
Potentiometer 0 ... Vref represents 0 ... 359
Readout update interval Max. 4 Hz
Units available m/s, knots, mph, km/h, V, mA, Hz
Operating mode Automatic Message or Poll Mode
Virtual temperature Celsius degrees

NOTE In extreme weather conditions, ice or snow accumulation may cause a


temporary wind measurement blackout even when the heating is enabled.
WMT700 indicates this with missing readings or in the data message.

190 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 8 _____________________________________________________________ Technical Data

Table 61 General
Property Description/Value
Heating No heating: 0 W
Average heating power 30 W
Peak transducer heating power: 40 W
Average transducer and array arm heating:
150 W
Average transducer, arm, and body heating:
250 W
Peak transducer, arm, and body heating: 350 W
at 24 VDC
Operating temperature -10 ... +60 C
-40 ... +60 C
-55 ... +70 C
Operating voltage: 9 ... 36 VDC; see details in Table 26 on page 84
Absolute maximum 40 VDC
Heating voltage:
Typical ranges 24 ... 36 VDC
Absolute maximum 40 VDC
IP class IP66/IP67
Material:
Body Stainless steel AISI316
Transducers Silicone
Mounting kit Stainless steel AISI316
Dimensions:
Height 348 mm
Width 250 mm
Depth 285 mm
Weight WMT700 Wind Sensor: 1.8 kg
Mounting adapter: 0.3 kg
Fix70 Mounting Kit 1.4 kg
Connector Hummel 7.106 series

NOTE In maritime environments, the normal input voltage ranges are:


operating voltage 10 30 VDC (-10% +30%) and heating voltage
24 30 VDC (-10% +30%), as defined in the maritime standard
IEC 60945.

NOTE Any temporary element or object (such as snow, ice, or a bird) blocking
the measurement path between the ultrasonic transducer heads may affect
the wind measurement accuracy or even invalidate the output data.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 191


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Table 62 Accessories
Group Description Order Code
Tool Zero Wind Verifier WMT70Verifier
Cable Tightening Tool 237888SP
Bird Bird cage WMT70BirdKit
Bird perch WS425BirdPerch
Cable Cable connector WMT70Conn
Cable 2 m, cable connector, open leads on one end 227567SP
Cable 10 m, cable connector, open leads on one end 227568SP
Cable 15 m, cable connector, open leads on one end 237890SP

Cable 26 m, cable connector, open leads on one end 228260SP


RS-485 Cable 2 m, cable connector, open leads on one 228259SP
end
RS-485 Cable 10 m, cable connector, open leads on one 228260SP
end
MAWS cable 10 m 227565SP
AWS520 cable 10 m, shield connected to PE pin 229807SP
AWS520 cable 10 m, shield not connected to PE pin 227566SP
ROSA analog cable 10 m, cable connector, open leads 231425SP
on one end
Adapter cable for WS425 serial 227569SP
Adapter cable for WS425 analog frequency output 227570SP
Adapter cable for WS425 analog voltage output 227571SP
Junction Box with Cable 2 meters ASM210719SP
WMT700 Adapter for FIX70 228869
Mounting General purpose mounting adapter (suitable also for WMT70FIXSP
Accessories inverted mounting)
Plastic mounting adapter for 60 mm tube WMT700FIX60-POM
Stainless steel mounting adapter for 60 mm tube WMT700FIX60-RST
Cross-arm (requires WMT70FIX mounting adapter) WMT70CROSSARM
WS425 Mounting Adapter for WS425FIX30, WS425FIX60-POM, and 228777
Accessories WS425FIX60-RST
Mounting adapter for 30 mm tube WS425FIX30
Aluminum mounting adapter for 60 mm tube WS425FIX60
Sensor support arm for 60 mm pole (655 mm with WAC425
integrated fix for item 228777)

192 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Chapter 8 _____________________________________________________________ Technical Data

Dimensions
Figure 52 below and Figure 53 on page 194 show the dimensions
of the WMT700 wind sensor and the FIX70 mounting kit.

1001-015

Figure 52 WMT700 Dimensions in Millimeters

VAISALA_______________________________________________________________________ 193
User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

1103-055

Figure 53 FIX70 Mounting Kit Dimensions in Millimeters

194 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Appendix A __________________________________________ Complete Command Set for WMT700

APPENDIX A
COMPLETE COMMAND SET FOR
WMT700

Table 63 below lists all the commands available for WMT700.

Table 63 Command Set for All Profiles


Configuration Mode/ Command Description
Measurement Mode and
Profile
Configuration mode ? Displays a list of configuration commands.
Configuration mode BAUD Changes or displays serial port settings.
Configuration mode CLEARERR Resets error counters.
Configuration mode CLOSE Switches the serial port to measurement mode.
Configuration mode ERRORS Displays error codes and counts.
Configuration mode G Displays either all or specified parameters.
Configuration mode H Displays list of data messages and available values for
measurement unit, profile, baud rate, interface, and
analog output mode.
Configuration mode MEAS Starts wind measurement based on the user-
configurable averaging time. WMT700 does not send
data messages automatically.
Configuration mode POLL Tests data polling.
Configuration mode RESET Resets WMT700.
Configuration mode S Changes selected parameters or defines new data
messages.
Configuration mode START Starts continuous measurement.
Configuration mode STOP Stops continuous measurement.
Configuration mode VERSION Displays the software version.
Configuration mode WIND_GET Fetches wind calibration information.
Measurement Mode MEAS Starts wind measurement. The duration of the
WMT700 profile measurement is based on the user-configurable
averaging time.
Measurement mode OPEN Switches the serial port to configuration mode.
WMT700 profile
Measurement mode POLL Fetches data from WMT700.
WMT700 profile
Measurement mode SLEEP Switches WMT700 from normal operating mode to low-
WMT700 profile power mode.
Measurement Mode @a M 12 Polls data from WMT700 in the MES12 data message
MES12 profile format.
Measurement mode WA Requests average wind speed and direction message.
WS425 ASOS F/G profile
Measurement mode WS Requests the verbose Built-In Test (BIT) results.
WS425 ASOS F/G profile

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 195


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Configuration Mode/ Command Description


Measurement Mode and
Profile
Measurement mode $WIP Polls data from WMT700.
WS425 A/B NMEA
Extended profile
Measurement mode $aabbQ,MWV Polls NMEA MWV message from WMT700.
WMT700 NMEA MWV
profile
Measurement mode I Requests identification information from WMT700.
WS425 A/B ASCII profile
Measurement mode Wx Starts measurement based on averaging time and
WS425 A/B ASCII profile fetches the data.
Measurement mode <esc><id> Polls data from WMT700.
WS425 A/B WAT11 profile
Measurement mode ?! Queries WMT700 for its address.
SDI-12 profile
Measurement mode a! Ensures that WMT700 is responding.
SDI-12 profile
Measurement mode aI! Queries WMT700 for its SDI-12 compatibility level,
SDI-12 profile model number, and firmware version number.
Measurement mode aAb! Changes WMT700 address.
SDI-12 profile
Measurement mode aC! Starts concurrent measurement.
SDI-12 profile
Measurement mode aCC! Starts concurrent measurement.
SDI-12 profile CRC is included in the response.
Measurement mode aD0! Fetches instant data from WMT700.
SDI-12 profile
Measurement mode aM! Starts measurement.
SDI-12 profile
Measurement mode aMC! Starts measurement.
SDI-12 profile CRC is included in the response.
Measurement mode aV! Starts verification.
SDI-12 profile

196 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Appendix B ________________________________________________ Typical System Environments

APPENDIX B
TYPICAL SYSTEM ENVIRONMENTS

This appendix lists the most typical WMT700 system


environments.

Figure 54 below shows a system in which the weather station is


connected to COM2, while COM1 is left for service and
maintenance purposes only. This is the recommended setup for
WMT700 serial communications.

1003-051

Figure 54 System Environment with Serial Port COM1


Only

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 197


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 55 below shows a system in which the weather station is


only connected to the analog output channel. Serial port COM1 is
used for maintenance purposes.

1003-052

Figure 55 System Environment with Analog Output Only

198 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Appendix B ________________________________________________ Typical System Environments

Figure 56 below shows a system in which serial ports COM1 and


COM2 operate independently. Serial port COM1 is used for
maintaining WMT700 and monitoring the wind sensor in
mission-critical applications while COM2 provides continuous
measurement data.

1003-053

Figure 56 System Environment with Serial Ports COM1


and COM2

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 199


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 57 below shows a system with a separate back-up battery


for operating power. The heating power is supplied with a direct
power supply unit that prevents the heating function from
consuming the power supply for the operations. This setup is
suitable for WMT700 product types that provide heating for the
wind sensor.

1004-001

Figure 57 System Environment with Backup Battery

200 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Appendix C ______________________________ Default Settings for Different Communication Profiles

APPENDIX C
DEFAULT SETTINGS FOR
DIFFERENT COMMUNICATION
PROFILES

This appendix lists the default settings for different digital


communication profiles. All the allowed values for different
communication profiles are listed in Table 64 on page 202.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 201


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Table 64 Default Settings for Different Digital


Communication Profiles
Setting Parameter WMT700 WS425 WS425 WS425 WS425 ROSA
ASCII NMEA SDI-12 F/G MES12
Ext ASOS
Service Port
Protocol com1_ WMT700 WMT700 WMT700 WMT700 WMT700 WMT700
protocol
Baud rate com1_baud 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600
Data bits com1_data 8 8 8 8 8 8
Parity com1_parity 0 (None) 0 (None) 0 (None) 0 (None) 0 (None) 0 (None)
Stop bits com1_stop 1 1 1 1 1 1
Response com1_delay 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms
Delay
Data Port
Protocol com2_ WMT700 WS425 WS452 SDI-12 WS425 ROSA
protocol ASCII NMEA Ext F/G MES12
ASOS
Baud rate com2_baud 9600 2400 9600 1200 2400 9600
Data bits com2_data 8 8 8 7 8 8
Parity com2_parity 0 (None) 0 (None) 0 (None) 1 (Even) 0 (None) 0 (None)
Stop bits com2_stop 1 1 1 1 1 1
Response com2_delay 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms N/A 20 ms 20 ms
Delay
Other Parameters
Address address A A A 1 1 12
Automatic autoSend Disabled Disabled WS425 Disabled Disabled Disabled
message NMEA Ext
number
Automatic autoPort COM1 COM1 COM2 COM1 COM1 COM1
message
port
Automatic autoInt 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
data
message
interval
Wind wndAvg 1s 1s 3s 1s 5s 600 s
averaging
time
Gust wndGustTime 3s 3s 3s 3s 3s 3s
averaging
time
Installation wndOrientation Array Array Array Array Array Array
orientation facing up facing up facing up facing up facing up facing up
of
WMT700
Wind wndVector Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar Scalar
measure- averaging averaging averaging averaging averaging averaging
ment
averaging
method

202 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Appendix C ______________________________ Default Settings for Different Communication Profiles

The parameters in Table 65 below do not have a protocol-specific


default value. They are defined in the configuration code.

Table 65 Parameters without Protocol-Specific Default


Value
Setting Parameter WMT700 WS425 WS425 WS425 WS425 F/G ROSA MES12
ASCII NMEA SDI-12 ASOS
Ext
Interface com2Interf N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
type
Wind wndUnit N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
speed unit

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 203


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

This page intentionally left blank.

204 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Appendix D ___________________________________________________ Configuration Parameters

APPENDIX D
CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS

This appendix lists the WMT700 configuration parameters.

Table 66 Parameter Descriptions


Parameter Default Allowed Values Units Description
Name Value
address A String with a Address for WMT700. Note that the
maximum of 40 SDI-12, ASCII, NMEA Extended, ASOS,
characters. and MES12 profiles use the first
character only.
SDI-12 only uses digits 1 9.
aout1err 1000 0 32000 V, A, Value for AOUT1 and AOUT2 analog
aout2err Hz, % output if wind measurement fails.
aout1_g 1 0 ... 100 Gain for AOUT1 (wind speed) and
aout2_g AOUT2 (wind direction).
aout1_o 0 -10000 10000 Offset for AOUT1 and AOUT2.
aout2_o
aout1maxv 32000 032000 V, A, Analog output maximum value for
aout2maxv Hz, % AOUT1 and AOUT2. The output is fixed
to this value. The unit depends on analog
output mode.
aout1minv 0 032000 V, A, Analog output minimum value for AOUT1
aout2minv Hz, % and AOUT2. The output is fixed to this
value. The unit depends on the analog
output mode.
aout1mode 3 0 = Current Analog output mode for AOUT1.
1 = Voltage
2 = Frequency
3 = Disabled
aout2mode 7 4 = Current Analog output mode for AOUT2.
5 = Voltage
6 = Potentiometer
7 = Disabled
autoInt 1 0.25 ... 1000 s Automatic message interval in seconds.
This parameter affects both serial
Resolution: 0.25 communication and analog output.
Do not select a message interval that is
shorter than the time it takes to send a
data message.
autoPort 1 1 = COM1 port Serial port to which WMT700 sends
2 = COM2 port automatic data messages.
autoSend 0 0 = Automatic Automatic data message number.
messages disabled Selects the data message format for
1 99 automatic messages.
cal_date Wind calibration date.
This is a read-only parameter.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 205


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Parameter Default Allowed Values Units Description


Name Value
com1_baud 4 0 = 300 Baud rates for serial ports COM1 and
com2_baud 1 = 1200 COM2. Changes take effect only after
2 = 2400 reset or the RESET command.
3 = 4800 Note that a low bit rate can affect
4 = 9600 measurement timing, if WMT700 cannot
5 = 19200 send the data message before a new
6 = 38400 measurement starts.
7 = 57600
8 = 115200
com1_data 8 7 = 7 data bits Data bits for serial ports COM1 and
com2_data 8 = 8 data bits COM2. Changes take effect only after
reset or the RESET command.
com1_delay 20 0 10000 ms COM1 and COM2 Response delay in
com2_delay milliseconds.
com2_interf 0 0 = RS-485 Interface for serial port COM2. (The
1 = RS-422 interface for serial port COM1 cannot be
2 = SDI-12 changed.)
3 = RS-232
com1_parity 0 0 = None Parity for serial ports COM1 and COM2.
com2_parity 1 = Even Changes take effect only after reset or
2 = Odd the RESET command.
com1_protocol 0 0 11 Protocol for serial port COM1.
0 = WMT700
2 = WS425 F/G ASOS
3 = WS425 A/B ASCII
4 = WS425 A/B NMEA Standard
5 = WS425 A/B NMEA Extended
6 = WS425 A/B WAT11
8 = MES12
11 = WMT700 NMEA MWV
com2_protocol 0 0 11 Protocol for serial port COM2.
0 = WMT700
1 = SDI-12
2 = WS425 F/G ASOS
3 = WS425 A/B ASCII
4 = WS425 A/B NMEA Standard
5 = WS425 A/B NMEA Extended
6 = WS425 A/B WAT11
8 = MES12
11 = WMT700 NMEA MWV
com1_stop 1 1 = 1 bit Stop bits for serial ports COM1 and
com2_stop 2 = 2 bits COM2.
Changes take effect only after reset or
the RESET command.
freqType 0 0 = Push-pull AOUT1 frequency output type. Setting 1
1 = Active pull-down requires external pull-up resistor.
2 = Active pull-up Setting 2 requires external pull-down
resistor.
heaterOn 1 0 = Heater off Heater control. When the value is set to
1 = Automatic 1, WMT700 controls the heaters based
on the temperature and other conditions.
messages 1 0 = Disabled Response for parameter setting.
1 = Enabled

206 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Appendix D ___________________________________________________ Configuration Parameters

Parameter Default Allowed Values Units Description


Name Value
msg1, msg2, String with a User-configurable data message formats.
msg3, msg4 maximum of 80 Parameters correspond to the message
characters. identification numbers from 1 to 4.
serial_n Serial number for WMT700.
This is a read-only parameter
serial_pcb Circuit board serial number.
This is a read-only parameter.
sleepTime 5 0 = Disabled s Duration of the low-power mode in
seconds. WMT700 returns automatically
1 32000 to normal state after this period of time
has elapsed. You can also return to
normal state by sending an extra space
before the polling command.
startDelay 5 0 30 s Defines how long WMT700 waits before
activating automatic messages at startup.
wndAvg 1 0.25 3600 s Averaging time for wind measurement in
seconds. This parameter affects both
Resolution: 0.25 serial communication and analog output.
wndCoast 0 0 100 m/s Wind direction coasting threshold in
meters per second. When wind speed
0 = Disabled drops below the limit, wind direction
coasting is performed.
Only affects the scalar averaging mode.
wndCover 4 0 ... 20 seconds s Defines how long WMT700 continues to
report the last valid wind value if wind
measurement fails (for example due to
snow or birds). 0 means that if
measurement fails, WMT700 reports
missing measurement data immediately.
wndDirOffset 0 -180 180 degrees Deg User-defined wind direction offset.
wndGustTime 3 0.25 10 s Averaging time for wind minimum and
Resolution: 0.25 maximum in seconds.
wndOrientation 0 0 = Array facing up Orientation of the transducer arms of
1 = Array facing down WMT700.
wndUnit 0 0 = m/s Wind speed unit.
1 = mph This parameter affects data messages
2 = km/h sent through serial interfaces but has no
3 = knots impact on analog output.
wndVector 0 0 = Scalar averaging Wind averaging method
1 = Vector averaging

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 207


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

This page intentionally left blank.

208 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Appendix E ________________________________________________ WMT700 NMEA MWV Profile

APPENDIX E
WMT700 NMEA MWV PROFILE

This appendix lists the configurable parameters, commands, and


data messages of the WMT700 NMEA MWV profile.

When the WMT700 NMEA MWV profile is selected, you can set
WMT700 to send messages based on the configured automatic
message interval or poll MWV message using the NMEA Query
command.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 209


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

Configurable Parameters
Table 67 below lists the configurable parameters and their
allowed and default values for the WMT700 NMEA MWV
profile.

Table 67 Configurable Parameters for WMT700 NMEA


MWV Profile
Parameter Default Profile-Specific Allowed Description
Value Values
address N/A String with 2 characters, Address for WMT700. The address must
for example "WI" consist of two capital letters A Z
autoInt 1 0.25 ... 1000 Automatic message interval in seconds.
Resolution: 0.25 Do not select a message interval that is
shorter than the time it takes to send a data
message
autoPort 1 1 = COM1 port Serial port to which WMT700 sends
2 = COM2 port automatic data messages
autoSend 0 0 = Automatic messages Automatic data message number. Selects
disabled the data message format for automatic
20 = WMT700 NMEA messages
MWV automatic data
message
com1_protocol 0* 11 = WMT700 NMEA Profile for serial port COM1
MWV protocol
com2_protocol 0 11 = WMT700 NMEA Profile for serial port COM2
MWV protocol
com2_interf N/A** 0 = RS-485 Interface for serial port COM2
1 = RS-422
3 = RS-232
wndAvg 1 0.25 3600 Averaging time for wind measurement in
Resolution: 0.25 seconds
wndOrientation 0 0 = Array facing up Orientation of the array of WMT700
1 = Array facing down
wndUnit 0** 0 = Meters per second Wind speed unit
1 = Miles per hour
2 = Kilometers per hour
3 = Knots
wndVector 0 0 = Scalar averaging Wind averaging method
* COM1 service port is always by default 0 - WMT700 protocol. This can be
changed using serial commands if COM1 is needed for protocol-specific
communication.
** Wind speed unit and COM2 digital communication interface are defined in
the order form. Default setting may be any of the allowed options, and it can be
verified from the unit's configuration code.

To start continuous measurement, use the START command.


You can stop the measurement with the STOP command. For
instructions, refer to sections START Start Continuous
Measurement and STOP Stop Wind Measurement on page
115.

210 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Appendix E ________________________________________________ WMT700 NMEA MWV Profile

WMT700 NMEA MWV Commands


This command polls data from WMT700 when the WMT700
NMEA MWV protocol is selected.
$--<id>Q,MWV*<chk><CR><LF>

where
$ = Message header
-- = Two-character talker ID of the polling unit
<id> = Two -character WMT700 sensor ID; AA ZZ
Q = Query command
, = Field delimiter
MWV = Sentence formatter
*<chk> = Checksum field(8-bit XOR, excluding $ and *)
<CR> = Carriage return code, ASCII 0DH
<LF> = Line feed code, ASCII 0AH

NOTE To use WMT700 with the WMT700 NMEA MWV profile, either set the
autoSend parameter to 0 to enable polling or define a fixed output
interval with the autoInt parameter. If you are using automatic messages,
the value for the autoSend parameter must be set to 20.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 211


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

WMT700 NMEA MWV Data Message


WMT700 NMEA MWV data message is as follows:
$<id>MWV,<dir>,<ref>,<spd>,<uni>,<sta>*<chk><CR><LF>

where
$ = Message header
<id> = Two character sensor ID; AA ZZ
MWV = Fixed text
<dir> = Wind angle: 0 to 359 degrees
<ref> = Reference:
R = Relative
<spd> = Wind speed
<uni> = Wind speed unit:
K = Kilometers per hour
M = Meters per second
N = Knots
<sta> = Status:
A = Valid data
V = Invalid data
* = Fixed text
<chk> = Checksum (8-bit XOR, excluding $ and *)
<CR> = Carriage return code, ASCII 0DH
<LF> = Line feed code, ASCII 0AH

Example of the command and response:


$IIWIQ,MWV*2F<CR><LF>

$WIMWV,045,R,011.63,N,A*09<CR><LF>

Interpretation of the example message:

- Talker ID "II" queries the WMT700 NMEA MWV message


from sensor which has address parameter set to "WI".
- WMT700 responds with talker ID "WI" and the requested
MWV message. The reported relative wind direction is 045
degrees and the wind speed is 11.63 knots.

Missing Readings
If data is missing due to a measurement problem, the NMEA
messages show "V" in the status field. Wind speed and wind
direction fields are left empty.

212 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Appendix F ______________________________________________________________ Accessories

APPENDIX F
ACCESSORIES

This Appendix lists all the accessories available for WMT700.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 213


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

1304-061

Figure 58 Complete Set of Accessories

214 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Appendix F ______________________________________________________________ Accessories

The following numbers refer to Figure 58 on page 214:


1 = Bird perch (WMT70BirdPerch)
2 = Bird cage (WMT70BirdKit)
3 = Zero wind verifier (WMT70Verifier)
4 = Vaisala WMT700
5 = Adapter for WMT70FIX, WMT700FIX-POM, and
WMT700FIX60-RST (228869)
6 = Adapter for WS425FIX30, WS425FIX60, and WAC425 (228777)
7 = Plastic mounting adapter for 60 mm tube (WS425FIX60-POM)
8 = Stainless steel mounting adapter for 60 mm tube
(WS425FIX60-RST). Also available in aluminum
(WS425FIX60).
9 = Mounting adapter for 30 mm tube (WS425FIX30)
10 = Sensor support arm for 60 mm mast (WAC425)
11 = Plastic mounting adapter for 60 mm tube (WMT70FIX60-POM)
12 = Stainless steel mounting adapter for 60 mm tube
(WMT70FIX60-RST)
13 = General purpose mounting adapter for WMT700 (WMT70FIX)
14 = Cross arm (WMT70CrossArm)
15 = Cable tightening tool (237888SP)
16 = Cables with open lead (227267SP, 227568SP, 228259SP,
237889SP, 237890SP)
17 = Vaisala MAWS cable (227565SP)
18 = Vaisala AWS cables (229807SP, 227566SP)
19 = Vaisala WS425 adapter cables (227569SP, 227570SP, 227571SP)
20 = WMT700 connector DIY kit (WMT70Conn)

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 215


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

This page intentionally left blank.

216 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


Appendix G _______________________________________________________________ Certificates

APPENDIX G
CERTIFICATES

This appendix contains copies of certificates issued for WMT700.

VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 217


User's Guide ______________________________________________________________________

218 __________________________________________________________________ M211095EN-E


www.vaisala.com

*M211095EN*

You might also like